BS-360E ServiceManul V1.0 en

BS-360E Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
IVD Global Technical Support Dept
Preface
© 2017 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issue date is 2017-09.
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function
and intended use. Please read this manual thoroughly before using the product. Observance of this manual is
a prerequisite for proper performance and correct operation, and it ensures patient and operator safety. All
graphics including screens and printouts in this manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be used
for any other purposes. The screens and printouts on the actual product should prevail.
This manual is used for models: BS-360E.
Manual introduction
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the
intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information
protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of
Mindray, or of others.
，，，，，，，，RealTF，
TrackWB，TrueTCR，Q-pick，AutoOLC，iVision，DBF，DRF，RDA，DRA，DFS、SyncNavi、GQ-Ana、One-
touchIP、Holo-IS、Opt-VRA、SuperVE-Cine、NFP-DSC、iTouch、iStation、BeneView、SmarTemp are the
trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear
in this manual are used only for informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective
owners.
Statement
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:
 All installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are
conducted by Mindray authorized personnel.
 All repairs involving replacement parts and associated accessories and consumables are original
(original) or approved by Mindray。
 The electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local
requirements.
 The product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable
service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 i
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or
liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of
the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray
authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or unauthorized service
people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Customer service department
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech industrial
park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC - Representative
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
Product introduction
The instrument is a computer-controlled fully-automated chemistry analyzer, intended for quantitative
determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), and other human body
fluids. It can fulfill auto dispensing, reaction, colorimetric measurement, process monitoring, and result
calculation. It is one of the necessary tools for laboratory automation.
Safety information
This chapter provides you with safety symbols used in this manual and their meanings, summarizes the safety
hazards and operating precautions that should be considered seriously when the instrument is being operated,
and lists the labels and silkscreens that have been applied to the instrument and their indications.
Safety symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions necessary to operate the
product safely and in accordance with its function and intended use. A safety symbol and text constitutes a
warning as shown in the table below:
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Biological risks
Summary of hazards
This section lists hazards of the instrument itself. The hazards of specific operation are included in the warning
information of each operation task.
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of them may lead to personal
injury or equipment damage.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 ii
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection provided by the product may be
impaired.
Electric shock hazards
WARNING
When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel authorized by our company
must not open the rear cover or side cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even electric shock. Do not place
sample and reagent on the product. In case of spillage, Switch off the power immediately, remove the spillage
and contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards
WARNING
Do not touch such moving parts as sample/reagent carousel, reaction carousel, probe, mixer, and cuvette wash
station, when the system is in operation.
Exercise caution while using the ISE module Prevent your hair, legs or other parts of your body from being hurt
by the driving parts.
Do not put your fingers or hands into any open part when the system is in operation.
Photometer lamp hazards
WARNING
Eye injury could occur from light emission from the photometer lamp. Do not stare into the lamp when the system
is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the MAIN POWER and then wait at least 5 minutes
for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you may get burned.
Sample, calibrator and control hazards
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not touch
samples, controls, calibrators, mixtures, or waste with your bare hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if
necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the standard laboratory safety procedure and
consult a doctor.
The serum samples remaining in the electrodes may contain a great number of viruses. Wear gloves to prevent
infection while operating around the electrodes.
Reagent and wash solution hazards
WARNING
Reagents, diluted wash solution and concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution
when using reagents and concentrated wash solution. In case your skin or clothes contact them, wash them off
with soap and clean water. If reagents or wash solution spills into your eyes, rinse them with much water and
consult an oculist.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 III

Waste hazards
BIOHAZARD
Some substances contained in reagent, control, calibrator, concentrated wash solution, and waste are subject
to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national rule
for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System disposal hazards
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance
with your local or national rule for waste disposal.
Fire and explosion hazards
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using ethanol around the instrument in order to
prevent fire and explosion.
Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal
WARNING
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or disposal process, please clean and
sterilize the parts that may cause biohazards(probe, mixer, etc.) and remind the person who handles the device
of the related hazards.
Cleaning and Decontamination
CAUTION
Appropriate decontamination is carried out if hazardous material is spilled onto or into the equipment.
No decontamination or cleaning agents are used which could cause a HAZARD as a result of a reaction with
parts of the equipment or with material contained in it. Strong acid or alkaline solutions are forbidden to clean
the equipment.
If there is any doubt about the compatibility of the decontamination or cleaning agents with parts of the
equipment or with material contained in it, please contact our customer service department or the local
distributor.
Summary of precautions
This section lists precautions to be understood during instrument operation. The precautions of specific
operation are included in the warning information of each operation task.
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating precautions.
Intended use
WARNING
The instrument is an automated chemistry analyzer for in vitro diagnostic use in clinical laboratories and
designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and cerebrospinal
fluid samples.
Please consult us before you use the instrument for other purposes.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 IV
When drawing a clinical conclusion, please also refer to patients' clinical symptoms and other test results.
Installation Precautions
NOTE
The safety of any system incorporating the equipment is the responsibility of the assembler of the system.
Environment precautions
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual. Installing and operating the
system in other environment may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Electromagnetic noise precautions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do not install devices generating excessive
electromagnetic noise around the system. Do not use such devices as radio transmitters in the room housing
the system. Do not use other CRT displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate electromagnetic noise to interfere
with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or
radio transmitters), as these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in a domestic environment may cause
radio interference, in which case, you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
NOTE
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to provide equipment electromagnetic compatibility information to the
customer or user.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that a compatible electromagnetic environment for the equipment can be
maintained in order that it will perform as intended.
Operating precautions
CAUTION
Take the clinical symptoms or other test results of the patient into considerations when making diagnosis based
on the measuring results produced by the system.
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the system may lead to unreliable
test results or even equipment damage or personal injury.
When using the system for the first time, run calibrations and QC tests to make sure the system is in proper
state.
Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result may be unreliable.
Start the operating software again when the analyzing unit is powered off.
Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation. Keep the reagent carousel cover closed.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is used for connection with the operation unit only. Do not use it for other
connections. Use the cables provided by our company or your local distributor for the connection.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 V
The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed. Installing other software or
hardware on the computer may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when the system
is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not use the computer for other purposes or
connect it to the Internet. If the computer is infected by virus, please install anti-virus software to check for and
clear virus.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with chemicals.
Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds after placing it to OFF; otherwise the system
may enter the protection status. If it does so, place the MAIN POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.
Chemistry parameter configuration precautions
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength, follow the instructions in this
manual and the instructions of reagents.
ISE module precautions
CAUTION
To prevent ISE electrodes from being damaged due to water scarcity, if the system, when equipped with an ISE
module will be powered off for a long time, perform the electrode storage maintenance.
Sample precautions
CAUTION
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin or suspended matter; otherwise the
sample probe may be clogged.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test results; running a serum index test
therefore, is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of samples and lead to unreliable
results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample open for a long period.
Prepare sufficient sample volume before analysis.
Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis begins; otherwise reliable results
may not be obtained.
Reagent, calibrator and control precautions
CAUTION
Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the system. Consult the reagent
suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for details, if you are not sure about your reagent choice.
Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the suppliers; otherwise, reliable
results or best performance of the system may not be obtained. Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and
controls may lead to unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity period.
Perform calibration after changing the reagents, otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to unreliable test results. Consult the reagent
suppliers for details.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 VI
ISE calibration precautions
BIOHAZARD
The calibrators contain preservatives. In case your skin contacts calibrators, wash them off with soap and water.
In case the calibrators spill into your eyes, rinse them with water and consult an oculist. If you swallow them by
mistake, see a doctor.
CAUTION
Use the calibrators specified by our company. Use of other reagents or calibrators may result in unreliable
results, or damage the Hydropneumatic system, or even shorten the electrodes life span.
Prior to using the calibrators, check if they are within the expiration date.
Place them correctly; otherwise, it may cause unreliable results, or leak, or module damage.
ISE wash solution biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The ISE wash solution is sodium hypochlorite. Use the ISE wash solution carefully to prevent it from contacting
your skins or eyes. If your skins or eyes contact the ISE wash solution, rinse them off with fresh water and
consult a doctor.
Data archiving precautions
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss, however, is still possible due to
mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You are recommended to regularly archive the data to such
medium as CDs.
To avoid the data loss caused by unexpected power failure, UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is recommended.
External equipment precautions
WARNING
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer to their operation manuals.
External equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces must be authorized and complied with
relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Standard
and CISPR 22 EMC of Information Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects
additional equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is responsible for
ensuring that the system works normally and complies with the safety and EMC requirements. If you have any
questions, consult the technical services department of your local representative.
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate maintenance may lead to unreliable
results, equipment damage or personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not too wet) cloth soaked with soap water
rather than organic solvents such as ethanol. After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning. Take necessary measures to prevent
water ingression, otherwise equipment damage or personal injury may be caused.
Replacement of such major parts as photometer lamp, probe, mixer and syringe assembly must be followed by
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 VII

a calibration.
Replacement of the photometer lamp should be done when the system power has been switched off for at least
5 minutes.
If the system fails and needs servicing, contact our Customer Service Department or the local distributor. The
system may need to be stopped or transported during servicing, which will probably cause biohazards, electric
shock hazards and moving part hazards. Exercise caution when prepare the system for servicing.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
NOTE
Check the safe state of the equipment after repair. Make sure the equipment is safe and then offer it to the
customer.
Tube and liquid container precautions
WARNING
When the tube or the part that contain liquid become aged or damaged, please stop its use immediately and
contact our customer service department or your local distributor to check and replace it.
Labels and silkscreen

The following labels and silkscreen are used on the product for system identification and operating instruction.
For the label marked with , please consult the related documentations in order to find out the nature of the
potential HAZARDS and any actions which have to be taken to avoid them.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes vague or peels off, contact
our Customer Service Department or your local distributor for replacement.
Labels and silkscreen list
Symbol Meaning
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
CE marking
Authorized Representative in the European

Community
The following definition of the WEEE label applies

to EU member states only: The use of this
symbol indicates that this product should not be
treated as household waste. By ensuring that
this product is disposed of correctly, you will help
prevent bringing potential negative
consequences to the environment and human
health. For more detailed information with
regard to returning and recycling this product,
please consult the distributor from whom you
purchased the product.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 VIII

Symbol Meaning
In Vitro diagnostic medical device
Biological risks
Caution
Caution: hot surface
“ON” (Power)
“OFF” (Power)
“ON” for a part of equipment
“OFF” for a part of equipment
Serial interface
Protective conductor terminal
Fuse(for models powered by 220V-240V~ or

220V/230V~ supply voltage)
Fuse(for models powered by 110V/115V~ supply
voltage)
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

The positions on the sample /reagent carousel
This symbol indicates the positions on the sample/reagent carousel. Middle ring: 1~50. Inner ring: 51~100
Wash Station bracket

This symbol indicates wash station bracket
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 IX
Interfaces for fluid connection

This symbol located on the fluid connection interfaces indicates the connection of fluid tubing.
ISE tube installation location

This symbol indicates the specific tubes of ISE module.
Humidity range
This symbol indicates the humidity requirement under normal working condition.
Atmospheric pressure
This symbol indicates the atmospheric pressure requirement under normal working condition.
Temperature limit
This symbol indicates the temperature requirement under normal working condition.
Warning labels
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 X
Biohazard warning
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following positions:
 Probe
 Waste outlet
 Waste tank
Moving parts warning

This symbol and text indicating the hazardous moving parts is located in the following positions:
 Probe
 Mixer
 Wash station
Photometer lamp warning

This symbol and text located on the lamp housing reminds you of not touching the lamp before it gets cool.
Probe collision warning

This symbol and text located near the sample/reagent carousel and reaction carousel reminds you of not
opening the cover to prevent from damaging the probe.
ISE module
This symbol and text located on the left side panel of the analyzer. Please turn off the main power before opening
the small door.
Liquid level floater

This symbol and text is located near the liquid level floater of the DI water tank and the wash solution tank,
Please do not take out the liquid level floater during test.
Cuvette replacement window

This symbol and text is located on the cuvette replacement window.
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XI
Risk of injury when replacing the lamp

This label is located close to the door of the lamp. Do not touch the moving parts when replacing the lamp.
Chemical hazard
This label is applied on the diluted wash solution tank. Please take protective measures to prevent chemical
hazard.
Cabinet
This label is applied at the middle of the cabinet back. If you want to relocate your analyzer, contact our
Customer Service Department or your local distributor. When relocating it, do not carry it with the cabinet. Only
when the cabinet is supported by the anchors, can the analyzer be placed on the cabinet.
User Permissions
 Engineer username: serviceuser
 Password: #BS8A#SEU
Note: After logging into the analyzer using the engineer on a client, remember to switch back to the
account of engineer.
Revision history
Chapter History Version
1.Added revision history
Preface V1.0
2. Added description about user permission
Chapter 1 1. Rearranged V1.0
1.Rearranged
Chapter 2 V1.0
2. Changed FRU
1. Rearranged
2. Changed FRU
Chapter 3 V1.0
3. Changed wrong description
4. Aded ISE
1. Rearranged
2. Changed FRU
Chapter 4 V1.0
3. Changed PCB picture
4. Added 4.5.4
1. Rearranged
Chapter 6 V1.0
2. Added 6.2
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XII

3. Added 6.3
4. Added 6.6.2
5. Added 6.7
6. Added6.8
1. Rearranged
Chapter 7 2. Changed picture. V1.0
3. Added7.9
1. Rearranged
Chapter 8 2. Added 8.1 V1.0
3. Added 8.6-8.8
1. Rearranged
Chapter 10 2. Added 10.1~10.3 V1.0
3. Changed 10.4
Chapter 11 1. Added chapter V1.0
Added :
1. Installation Acceptance Report
2. Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No Alignment
Tooling)
Appendices V1.0
3. Tool list
4. Error Information Feedback Form
5. Series Recovery Checklist
6. Maintenance log sheet
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XIII

Table of Contents
Preface ............................................................................................................................................................ i
Manual introduction................................................................................................................................... i
Intellectual Property Statement .......................................................................................................... i
Statement .......................................................................................................................................... i
Warranty ............................................................................................................................................ i
Exemptions ....................................................................................................................................... ii
Customer service department ........................................................................................................... ii
EC - Representative.......................................................................................................................... ii
Product introduction ......................................................................................................................... II
Safety information ............................................................................................................................ II
Summary of hazards ........................................................................................................................ II
Summary of precautions ................................................................................................................. IV
Labels and silkscreen ................................................................................................................... VIII
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen.................................................................................................... IX
User Permissions .................................................................................................................................. XII
Revision history .................................................................................................................................... XII
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................................................ XIV
1 System Description.............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit ................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit ........................................................................................ 1-2
2 System Performance and Workflow ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Major Specifications ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General Specifications ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Sample Specifications ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.1 Reagent Specifications ......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Specifications of Reaction System ........................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.3 Specifications of Operation Unit............................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.4 Typical Test Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.5 Startup Procedure ................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.6 Shutdown Procedure ............................................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.7 Workflow Descriptions .......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.8 Measuring Points ................................................................................................................. 2-6
3 Moudules and Units ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Shell Assembly .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Module Functions ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shielding Cover ......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels ................................................................. 3-3
3.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel ................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Desk Panels .............................................................................. 3-3
3.1.7 Replacing Air Spring ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.1.8 Remove the dust from the fans ............................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Frame Assembly ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.1 Module Functions ................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.3 Replacing Dust Screens ....................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly...................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Main functions ...................................................................................................................... 3-5
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XIV

3.3.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................... 3-6

3.3.3 Replacing the cables of the reaction carousel cover ............................................................. 3-8
3.3.4 Replacing the cable of the heat insulation chamber .............................................................. 3-9
3.3.5 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor ........................................................... 3-11
3.3.6 Replacing motor assembly and synchronous belt ............................................................... 3-13
3.3.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ............................................................................................... 3-14
3.4 Sample/Reagent carousel cover assembly ............................................................... 3-14
3.4.1 Module Functions ............................................................................................................... 3-14
3.4.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Body Assembly ........................................................ 3-16
3.4.4 Replacing Reagent Temperature Sensor ............................................................................ 3-17
3.4.5 Replacing cooler and sealing ring ....................................................................................... 3-18
3.4.6 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor .......................................................... 3-20
3.4.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly ....................................................... 3-21
3.4.8 Replacing the synchronous belt .......................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.9 Replacing cooling fan of reagent refrigeration ..................................................................... 3-24
3.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader ............................................................................................. 3-24
3.4.11 Replacing Reagent Anti-fogging Heating Assembly ........................................................... 3-25
3.5 Probe assembly ....................................................................................................... 3-27
3.5.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement ...................................... 3-28
3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws........................................... 3-29
3.5.5 Replacing Reagent Preheating Assembly ........................................................................... 3-30
3.5.6 Replacing level sense board............................................................................................... 3-31
3.5.7 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt ................................................................ 3-32
3.5.8 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly........................................................................ 3-33
3.5.9 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly ............................................................................ 3-34
3.5.10 Replacing Probe Drive Assembly ...................................................................................... 3-35
3.6 Mixer Assembly........................................................................................................ 3-37
3.6.2 Component Locations and FRU Details .............................................................................. 3-37
3.6.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement ...................................... 3-38
3.6.4 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt ................................................................ 3-39
3.6.5 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly........................................................................ 3-40
3.6.6 Replacing DC motor, mixer and powder screws .................................................................. 3-41
3.6.7 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly ............................................................................ 3-42
3.6.8 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly................................................................................ 3-43
3.7 Cuvette Wash Station............................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.3 Replacing Wash Probes Assembly ..................................................................................... 3-47
3.7.4 Replacing Wash Station ..................................................................................................... 3-47
3.7.5 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Assembly .............................................................................. 3-48
3.7.6 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Motor .................................................................................... 3-49
3.7.7 Replacing Zero Position Photocoupler ................................................................................ 3-51
3.8 Syringe Assembly .................................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.2 Component Locations and FRU Details .............................................................................. 3-52
3.8.3 Replacing 2.5ml syringe and 10ml syringe .......................................................................... 3-52
3.8.4 Replacing probe syringe assembly ..................................................................................... 3-52
3.9 Photometer Unit ....................................................................................................... 3-53
3.9.1 Functions and Parameters ................................................................................................. 3-53
3.9.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly.................................................................. 3-53
3.9.3 Replacing Lamp ................................................................................................................. 3-55
3.9.4 Replacing Fiber Bundle ...................................................................................................... 3-56
3.9.5 Replacing Light-splitting Assembly...................................................................................... 3-57
3.9.6 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ............................................................................................... 3-58
3.9.7 Photometer Lens Maintenance ........................................................................................... 3-59
3.10 ISE Unit (Optional) ................................................................................................... 3-59
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XV
3.10.1 Module Functions ............................................................................................................. 3-59

3.10.2 Structure and FRU List ..................................................................................................... 3-63
3.10.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes .................................................................................................. 3-64
3.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube ...................................................................................................... 3-65
3.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube ................................................................................................ 3-65
3.10.6 Replacing ISE electrode ................................................................................................... 3-66
3.10.7 Removing reagent pack(ISE) ............................................................................................ 3-67
3.10.8 Storing electrodes(ISE) .................................................................................................... 3-67
3.10.9 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack ............................................................................. 3-68
4 Hardware Circuits ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Harzards .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Summary of PCBAs ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.4 Functions of PCBA..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1 Control Structure .................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Main Board .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.3 Power driver board ............................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.4 Pre-amplifying AD board...................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.5 Integration Liquid Detecting Board...................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.6 AC Drive Board .................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.4.7 Clog Detection Board(Optional) .......................................................................................... 4-18
4.5 Power Supply System .............................................................................................. 4-21
4.5.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit .................................................................................. 4-21
4.5.2 Performance Indices .......................................................................................................... 4-22
4.5.3 DCDC power supply board ................................................................................................. 4-22
4.5.4 Replacing Power swich and fuse ........................................................................................ 4-25
4.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer ...................................................................................... 4-29
5 Fluidic system ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Fluidic Diagram .......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ........................................................................ 5-3
5.3.1 Probe wash module.............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.2 Cuvette Wash Module .......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.3 Inlet/outlet module ................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.4 Interfaces for fluid connection ............................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions ..................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.1 Fluidic Initialization ............................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components .......................................... 5-7
5.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.5.2 Probe and mixer wash module ............................................................................................. 5-8
5.5.3 Cuvette Wash Module ........................................................................................................ 5-13
5.5.4 External Modules ............................................................................................................... 5-16
6 Software .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Software Installation................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ...................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Analyzer Software Version Information ................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.3 Folder Structure ................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.4 Log Files .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Computer Settings ..................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 Computer Requirements (for International Customers) ......................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Hard disk defragment ........................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Application Software ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.4 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby ........................................................................ 6-5
6.2.5 Disable Automatic Synchronization with Internet Time Server ............................................... 6-6
6.2.6 Turn off Automatic Updates .................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.7 Resolution Setting ................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.2.8 Confirmation of Administrator Permission and UAC .............................................................. 6-8
6.2.9 SQL Version Check ............................................................................................................ 6-10
6.2.10 Check the installation. ...................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.11 Firewall Whitelist Setting .................................................................................................... 6-11
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XVI

6.3 Installation of Operating Software.............................................................................. 6-11

6.3.1 Preparation before Installation ............................................................................................. 6-11
6.3.2 Software Installation ............................................................................................................ 6-11
6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file .............................................................................................. 6-14
6.4 Software Upgrading ................................................................................................. 6-15
6.4.1 Preparation before Upgrading ............................................................................................ 6-15
6.4.2 Upgrading of Operating Software ....................................................................................... 6-17
6.4.3 Upgrading Control System ................................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading.............................................................................................. 6-20
6.5 Software startup process and autostart settings ....................................................... 6-20
6.5.1 Normal Startup Procedure .................................................................................................. 6-20
6.5.2 Software antostart settings ................................................................................................. 6-21
6.6 Software and SQL Database Uninstallation .............................................................. 6-22
6.6.1 Remove the software ......................................................................................................... 6-22
6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling................................................................................................. 6-22
6.7 Data backup and recovery ....................................................................................... 6-24
6.7.1 Data backup....................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.7.2 Database Recovery............................................................................................................ 6-24
6.7.3 Unit parameter Backup....................................................................................................... 6-24
6.7.4 Parameter Configuration .................................................................................................... 6-25
6.8 Demo Software Setup .............................................................................................. 6-26
7 Alignment ............................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Basic Operation ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Utility - Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Alignment fixtures ................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Mechanical Reset................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2 Alignment Procedure.................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3 Photometric Unit ........................................................................................................ 7-4
7.3.1 Best Alignment Position Configuration .................................................................................. 7-5
7.3.2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment .............................................................................................. 7-7
7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit ................................................................................... 7-8
7.4.1 Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment ........................................................ 7-8
7.4.2 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position .......................................... 7-10
7.4.3 Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position......................................... 7-12
7.4.4 Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position ........................................... 7-12
7.5 Probe unit ................................................................................................................ 7-13
7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel ............................................................. 7-13
7.5.2 Probe to Horizontal and Vertical Positions on Wash Well .................................................... 7-15
7.5.3 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring.................................................................. 7-16
7.5.4 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring ................................................................ 7-16
7.5.5 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring .................................................................. 7-17
7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel ......................................................... 7-17
7.5.7 Probe to Vertical Limit Position in Reagent Bottle................................................................ 7-17
7.5.8 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part (Optional) ............................................................. 7-18
7.5.9 Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part (Optional) ................................................................. 7-18
7.6 Mixer Unit ................................................................................................................ 7-20
7.6.1 Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel .............................................................. 7-20
7.6.2 Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel .................................................................. 7-22
7.6.3 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position ...................................................................................... 7-23
7.7 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Unit ............................................................................... 7-24
7.7.1 Cuvette Wash Station Home............................................................................................... 7-24
7.7.2 Cuvette Wash Station Height .............................................................................................. 7-26
7.8 Bar Code Unit (Optional) .......................................................................................... 7-26
7.8.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements ........................................................................................ 7-26
7.8.2 Bar code Unit ..................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment ................................................................................ 7-28
7.8.4 Bar Code Stability Test ....................................................................................................... 7-30
7.9 Hydropneumatic Unit................................................................................................ 7-30
7.9.1 Preparations before Alignment ........................................................................................... 7-30
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XVII

7.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status ..................................................................................... 7-31

7.9.3 Syringe Check.................................................................................................................... 7-32
7.9.4 Fluidic Prime ...................................................................................................................... 7-32
7.9.5 Mixer Wash Flow Test ........................................................................................................ 7-34
7.9.6 Probe interior Wash Flow Test ............................................................................................ 7-36
7.9.7 the volume of the reaction liquid during cuvette washing process ........................................ 7-36
7.10 Pyrology Unit ........................................................................................................... 7-37
7.10.1 Configuration of Sensor Parameters ................................................................................. 7-37
7.10.2 Observe Temperature Curve............................................................................................. 7-38
7.10.3 Wash Solution Temperature Control ................................................................................. 7-39
7.10.4 Reagent refrigeration assembly ........................................................................................ 7-40
7.11 ISE Unit ................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.11.1 Module Intialization ........................................................................................................... 7-41
7.11.2 ISE Error Codes ............................................................................................................... 7-42
8 Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Installation Procedure........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Installation Time Consumption.............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Check before Installation ............................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Installation Environment ....................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Configuration Check ............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.3 Installation Requirements ........................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation ........................................................... 8-2
8.3.2 Power Supply and Noise ...................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage.................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3.4 Computer Requirements ...................................................................................................... 8-4
8.4 Installing the Analyzer ................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4.2 Removing Packaging ........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.3 Installing Accessories ........................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4.4 Connect the pipeline............................................................................................................ 8-11
8.4.5 Connecting the Overall System .......................................................................................... 8-12
8.4.6 Setting the PC .................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.7 Software Installation ........................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.8 Starting up the System ....................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.9 Aligning the Analyzer .......................................................................................................... 8-14
8.4.10 Aligning the ISE (Optional)................................................................................................ 8-15
8.4.11 Prime the fluidic system .................................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.12 Initial Maintenance Record ............................................................................................... 8-15
8.4.13 Startup Initialization .......................................................................................................... 8-16
8.4.14 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray Reagents ............................ 8-16
8.4.15 Running Water Test .......................................................................................................... 8-18
8.5 Verifying Basic Performance .................................................................................... 8-22
8.5.1 Checking System Status .................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5.2 Testing Movement Positioning Performance ....................................................................... 8-22
8.5.3 Testing Optical Performance............................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.4 Testing Bar Code Performance ........................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.5 Testing Clinical Performance .............................................................................................. 8-24
8.6 LIS Connection ........................................................................................................ 8-24
8.7 Backing Up Data ...................................................................................................... 8-24
8.8 Handling Exceptions in Installation ........................................................................... 8-25
9 Preventive maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Preventive maintenance ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Biochemistry maintenance commands.................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.3 ISE maintenance commands ................................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Maintenance Tools ..................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Maintenance Procedure ............................................................................................. 9-3
9.3.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.3.2 Steps ................................................................................................................................... 9-4
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XVIII

9.4 Post-maintenance Check .......................................................................................... 9-11

10 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Classification of logs......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Viewing and handling logs ................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Error Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Common Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 10-4
10.2.1 Database initializing failed ................................................................................................ 10-4
10.2.2 Database backup failed .................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 Database Version Is Higher Than the Current Software Version........................................ 10-5
10.2.4 Unmatched Operating Software VersionA22039 ............................................................... 10-7
10.2.5 Water Residues Exist in the Cuvette A02027 .................................................................... 10-7
10.2.6 Bar Code Scanning Faults ................................................................................................ 10-8
10.2.7 Cuvette Blank Out of Range C07004 ................................................................................ 10-9
10.2.8 Light Intensity Is Too Weak C07003 .................................................................................. 10-9
10.2.9 Water Blank Out of Range (10X) C07009 ......................................................................... 10-9
10.2.10 Lamp Is Not Turned On C07005 .................................................................................... 10-11
10.2.11 Light Intensity Is Too Strong C07006 ............................................................................. 10-12
10.2.12 Equipment cannot be connected................................................................................... 10-12
10.2.13 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level of the Wash Well A01028 ................................ 10-14
10.2.14 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level on the Reaction Carousel when Dispensing A01033
................................................................................................................................................. 10-16
10.2.15 Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Is Out of Range ..................................................... 10-17
10.2.16 Clinical Result Problems ............................................................................................... 10-18
10.3 Data alarms ........................................................................................................... 10-20
10.4 Error messages and corrective actions ................................................................... 10-28
11 Parts List ............................................................................................................................................ 11-1
12 LIS Connection Setting and Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Overview of LIS ....................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 LIS Networking ........................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2.1 Querying State of RS232 Serial Port Card and Network Card ........................................... 12-1
12.2.2 Checking Network Status ................................................................................................. 12-2
12.3 LIS Parameter Setup................................................................................................ 12-4
12.3.1 Introduction to Protocols ................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3.2 Parameter Setup on a Workstation Computer ................................................................... 12-5
12.3.3 Basic Concept of Unidirectional/Bidirectional LIS Communication ..................................... 12-5
12.3.4 Channel ID Setup ............................................................................................................. 12-6
12.4 Operation Guidance of Test Tool .............................................................................. 12-8
12.4.1 Operation Procedure of Test Tool...................................................................................... 12-8
12.5 Common Problems and Corrective Measures ......................................................... 12-11
12.5.1 LIS cannot be connected ................................................................................................. 12-11
12.5.2 LIS communication interrupted suddenly ........................................................................ 12-12
12.5.3 Issues with firewall ......................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.4 Invalid LIS response ....................................................................................................... 12-13
12.5.5 ISE response time out .................................................................................................... 12-14
12.5.6 LIS communication result slowly transmitted ................................................................... 12-15
12.5.7 Part of item results missed during LIS communication .................................................... 12-15
12.6 Bidirectional LIS communication interaction log ...................................................... 12-15
13 Instrument Relocation and Emptying .......................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.1 Short-Term Suspension .................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Long-Term Suspension..................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Analyzer Relocation.......................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Emptying Fluidic Tubes ............................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional) ................................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.2 Emptying Wash Tube ....................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.3 Emptying Waste Tubes ..................................................................................................... 13-7
13.2.4 Use Count of Emptying Pump and Syringe ....................................................................... 13-8
13.2.5 Confirmation after emptying.............................................................................................. 13-9
13.3 Clearing Data......................................................................................................... 13-10
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XIX

13.4 Packing................................................................................................................... 13-11

13.4.1 Removing the Tubes ....................................................................................................... 13-11
13.4.2 Removing the Accessories .............................................................................................. 13-11
13.4.3 Securing the Assemblies by Tape and Foam ................................................................... 13-12
13.4.4 Securing and Packing the Main Unit ............................................................................... 13-12
13.4.5 Packing the Accessories ................................................................................................. 13-12
13.4.6 Packing the Main Unit and Display of the PC .................................................................. 13-12
14 Optional Modules ....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2 ISE Module .............................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2.1 Overview of ISE Module ................................................................................................... 14-2
14.2.2 Installing the ISE Module .................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2.3 Alignment of the ISE module ............................................................................................ 14-8
14.2.4 Precautions for ISE ........................................................................................................ 14-10
14.3 Clog Detection Module ............................................................................................ 14-11
14.3.1 Introduction to Clog Detection Module ............................................................................. 14-11
14.3.2 Installing the Clog Detection Module................................................................................ 14-11
14.4 Bar Code Scanning Module ................................................................................... 14-14
14.4.1 Overview of Bar Code Scanning Module......................................................................... 14-14
14.4.2 Installing the Barcode Scanner ....................................................................................... 14-14
Appendices............................................................................................................................................. 14-20
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XX
1 System Description
1.1 Overview
The BS-360E is a fully automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer designed for the in vitro
determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples. This
product consists of Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit.
Figure 1-1 Chemistry analyzer

Throughput of the biochemistry system: 360 tests/hour.
Throughput of the ISE module:
270 tests/hour for serum and plasma (Na+, K+ and Cl-)
180 tests/hour for urine (Na+, K+, Cl-)
Maximum throughput of biochemistry and ISE: 540 tests/hour
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit
The Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit (computer), and output unit
(printer).
 The analyzing unit performs all operations of sample analysis, which include dispensing sample and
reagent, mixing, reaction and measurement, auto washing of cuvettes, ISE analysis, etc.
 The operation unit is a computer installed with the operating software, which controls operation of the
analyzer and processes the test data.
 The printer is used to print test results.
 The operation unit and the analyzing unit are independent structurally and communicate with each other
through the serial port. The operation unit sends data and instructions to the analyzing unit and acquires
the data and status information from the analyzing unit.
Analyzing
unit
PC(Operating software)
Main unit
Printer
Figure 1-2 System structure
No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 1-1

The instrument is composed of the following components: one reaction carousel, one sample/reagent carousel,
one probe, one mixer, ne automatic cuvette wash station, one photometric detection system, one ISE module
(optional). The optical measurement system, which is composed of gratings and diode array, performs
photometric measurement to the reaction cuvettes that hold "sample+reagent" mixture. After testing, the cuvette
wash station performs 8-phase auto wash to the reaction cuvettes.
(5)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Figure 1-3 Layout of the analyzer’s operation panel
(1) Probe (2) Sample/reagent carousel

(3)Mixer (4) Reaction carousel
(5) Cuvette wash station
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit
The working procedure of the system is described as follows.
1) The system resets to initialize all mechanical units and wash the exterior and interior of the probe and mixer.
2) Reaction cuvettes are washed through 8 phases, and run water blank test after phase 6.
3) The reagent carousel rotates to the R1 position, from which the probe aspirates reagent.
4) The reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent dispense position after the 8-phase washing. Then rotate
the probe with R1 added to the reaction carousel and dispense R1 into the reaction cuvette;
5) R1 is incubated in the cuvette.
6) The sample carousel rotates to the specified aspirating position, and the probe lowers down to aspirate
specified amount of sample.
7) The reaction cuvette with R1 added is carried to the sample dispense position, to which the probe rotates
to dispense sample after aspirating from the sample/reagent carousel.
8) The reaction cuvettes with sample added are carried to the sample mixing position for stirring.
9) For double-reagent tests, the reagent carousel rotates to the R2 position after a fixed period, and the probe
lowers down to aspirate R2.
10) The reaction cuvette is carried to the R2 dispense position. Then rotate the probe with R2 added to the
reaction carousel and dispense R2 into the reaction cuvette;
11) With R2 added, the reaction cuvette rotates to the mixing position for stirring.
12) During each period, the reaction cuvette experiences photometric measurement (absorbance data
collecting) when passing by the photometric unit.
13) The reaction cuvette in which reaction is finished will be washed automatically when passing by the wash
station.
Table 1-1 Functions of system units
Unit Name Functions
Probe unit Performs aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistries and ISE tests.
Performs aspiration and dispensing of reagents for all biochemistry
tests.

Sample/Reagent The outer ring can hold 50 sample containers.

carousel unit
The middle ring supports 40ml and 20ml reagent bottles and can hold
50 sample containers with adapter.
The inner ring supports 20ml reagent bottles.
The sample/reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment which
is constant within 2°C-12°C for 24 hours a day.
The outer and middle rings support barcode scanning.
Reaction Carousel 80 positions are available for plastic cuvettes.
Unit
Mixer Unit Mixes the reaction liquid.
Photometric unit Reversed optics with gratings, supporting 12 wavelength: 340nm,
380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm,
700nm, 740nm, and 800nm
Cuvette Wash 8-phase automatic washing of reaction cuvettes
Station
ISE Unit (Optional) Provides the function of ISE measurement

2 System Performance and Workflow

2.1 Major Specifications
2.1.1 General Specifications
Table 2-1 General Specifications
System Random selection, multi-channel, multi-chemistry, capable to pause test and
adding new tests
System structure Analyzing unit + computer + printer
Sample type Serum, urine, plasma, CSF (cerebrospinal fluid), full blood, etc.
Maximum number of 100 tests (without ISE) or 103 tests with ISE
tests run
simultaneously
Throughput 360 tests/hour (single and double reagents) and maximum of 540 tests/hour
with ISE module
Reaction type Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time; supporting single-/double-reagent tests, and
single-/double-wavelength tests
Reaction time The longest reaction time is 14.75 minutes for single-reagent test, and 9.5
minutes for double-reagent test
Reaction temperature 37±0.3℃
Test type Clinical chemistries, immunoturbidimetry and ion-selective electrode method
Predilution Dilution is conducted in reaction cuvette at the ratio of 3~100
Operation mode Chemistries are defined one by one via the operating software; panels and
calculation tests are supported
Calibration math Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear, Logit-Log 4P, Logit-Log
model 5P,Logit-Log 3P, Spline, Exponential, Polynomial, and Parabola and broken line.
QC Westgard multi rules, cumulative sum check, and twin-plot
Data processing Capable of storing and outputting various types of data and charts, and
calculating among different chemistries.
Dimensions Analyzing unit: 860mm (length) *660mm (depth) *550mm (height)
Cabinet: 860mm (length) *660mm (depth) *650mm (height)
Weight Analyzing unit: 115±15 kg
Cabinet: ≤50 kg
STAT sample Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority
Networking Capable to connect with a LIS (Laboratory Information Management System)
2.2 Sample Specifications

Sample loading
Samples are loaded via sample carousel.
Sample cuvette type
Table 2-2 Sample tube volume and dead volume
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Sample tube Φ14×25mm,0.5ml ( Beckman, ISE test 120μl
not supported)
Sample tube Φ14×25mm,2ml ( Beckman, ISE test not 150μl
supported)

Sample Container Specification Dead Volume

Sample tube Φ12×37mm,2ml ( Hitachi, ISE test not 120μl
supported)
Primary tube/Plastic Φ12×68.5 mm 8mm more over the
tube unacceptable sample
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12×99 mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12.7×75 mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12.7×100 mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ13 X 75 mm 8mm more over the
level height
level height
level height
For the tests of the whole blood(centrifuged),onlyΦ12×68.5mm, Φ12×99mm, Φ12.7×75mm,
Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13×75 mm, Φ13×95 mm, Φ13×100 mmanticoagulation tubes can be used. Thesample height
in the tube should be no higherthan 55mm and the blood cell level should be no lower than 10mm. Microcups
are not allowed. Toensure the clinical performance and avoid the system alarm, EDTA anticoagulation tubes are
recommended.
Sample carousel
One carousel is shared for holding sample and reagent and the outer and middle ring supports bar code
scanning.
Sample positions on sample carousel
The outer ring can hold 50 samples and the middle ring can hold 50 sample with sample position adapter. In
total, up to 100 samples can be placed on the outer and inner ring.
STAT sample
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Sample volume
2μl ~ 35μl, with an increment of 0.1μl
ISE: 70μl for serum and 140μl for urine
Sample probe
One probe is shared for adding sample and reagent with liquid level sense, horizontal and vertical anti-collision,
level tracking and probe clogging detection functions.
Sample probe cleaning
The exterior and interior of the sample probe is washed with carryover rate no more than 0.05%.
Sample input mode (bar code)
Table 2-3 Sample bar code
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code Outer ring 0.19mm~0.5mm
density Middle ring 0.25mm~0.5mm
Data bits 3-27
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum ±5°
inclination angle

Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M

Print Quality Specification.
Width and 2.5-3.0:1
narrowness
2.2.1 Reagent Specifications
Reagent loading
Reagents are loaded through reagent carousel.
Reagent refrigeration
Reagent refrigeration temperature: 2~12℃.
Reagent addition approach
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringe, which is capable of detecting fluid level and checking
reagent volume.
Supported reagent types
R1, R2.
Reagent volume
R1:100μl～200μl,with an increment of 0.5μl and R2:10μl～200μl,with an increment of 0.5μl.
Reagent Carousel
One carousel is shared for holding sample and reagent. The reagents can be placed on the middle ring and
inner ring. All positions on the middle ring support scanning by a built-in reagent bar code reader.
Number and volume of reagent bottle
The reagent positions support Mindray reagent bottles, which include: middle ring 40ml and middle ring 20ml;
inner ring 20 ml.
Reagent carousel positions
Middle ring supports 50 40ml or 20ml reagent bottles and inner ring supports 50 20ml reagent bottles. When
middle ring is used to hold 40ml reagent bottles, 20ml reagent bottles cannot be placed on the inner ring.
Reagent bar code
Table 2-4 Reagent bar code
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN,
Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.25mm~0.5mm
Data bits 13-30
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination angle ±5°
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Width and narrowness 2.5:1
Reagent probe
One probe is shared for adding sample and reagent with liquid level sense, horizontal and vertical anti-collision,
level tracking and probe clogging detection functions.
Reagent probe cleaning
Both interior and exterior of the probe are washed.
Prevention of reagent cross contamination
Users are allowed to perform carryover settings, e.g. washing interior and exterior of reagent probes and
inserting special wash between tests.
2.2.2 Specifications of Reaction System
Table 2-5 Specifications of Reaction System
Optical pathlength of reaction 5mm
cuvette
Material of reaction cuvette 5mm*5mm*29.5mm. Plastic cuvette: Cuvette segments with
10 cuvettes each segment.
Number of reaction cuvettes 80

Mixing method Mixing after sample and R2 are added.

Reaction liquid volume 100μl～360μl；
Optical measurement method Reversed optics with holographic concave flat-field gratings,
and detecting each wavelength through a photodiode
Wavelength 12 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm,
546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm, 800nm
Light source 12v/20W tungsten-halogen lamp
Wavelength accuracy ±2nm
Photometric measurement Measuring through a photodiode
method
Number of wavelengths Supporting one or two wavelengths
simultaneously measured for each
test
Absorbance range 0-3.5A, optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer 0.0001OD
2.2.3 Specifications of Operation Unit

Table 2-6 Specifications of Operation Unit
Display Monitor Screen resolution of 1280×1024
Operating system Supporting Window 10 (64 bit)
Communication interface RS232, compatible with TCP/IP
Printer Supporting three types of printer: inkjet printer, laser (black and white) printer
and stylus printer.
Data input Keyboard, mouse and barcode reader, LIS: HL7, ASTM1394 (TCP/IP or serial
interface)
Data output Display monitor, printer, LIS system
Data storage Hard disk and USB interface
2.2.4 Typical Test Procedure
Wait for Mixer

Add R2
steadiness of performs
Double Reagent to probe
Complete absorbency measurement
lamp and mixing

Chemistries
Startup Initialization Procedure
balance of
Mixer performs mixing
reaction
Shutdown Procedure
Available
Add sample to probe
carousel
Add R1 to probe
chemistries are
Wash Cuvette
Wash Cuvette
temperature finished
Single Reagent
Chemistries
Next test
Figure 2-1 Test flowchart

2.2.5 Startup Procedure

1) The analyzer is powered on.
2) The operating software is run and starts checking the running environment.
3) The software checks the status of the middle-/low- layer units.
4) The software checks the parameters and status of the analyzer, and inquires the key
parameters and status of all the units.
5) The system communicates with the bar code reader, if it is configured.
6) Fluidic Initialization is performed: 1) the pumps and valves are powered off for resetting;
2) the floaters of the water tank, diluted wash solution tank, and high-concentration
waste tank are checked.
7) The system resets all mechanical units.
8) The reaction carousel temperature control is turned on.
9) The lamp is turned off and the dark current and maximum luminance value of the
reaction carousel lamp are inquired. The lamp is turned on (it takes 5 minutes for the
lamp to become steady. When 5 minutes are not reached and the system finishes its
home procedure, the system enters incubation status.
10) The whole unit is reset.
11) Special wash the sample probe.
12) The preheating of cuvette wash solution, cleaning water and reagent is turned on.
13) The reagent carousel is scanned (when the built-in reagent bar code reader is
configured.)
14) The ISE module is initialized, if configured.
15) If the conditions of entering Standby status are met, the system enters into Standby
status.
2.2.6 Shutdown Procedure
1) When the system is in Standby status, it can be shut down.
2) The power of lamp, reaction carousel temperature control and the preheating of cuvette
wash solution, cleaning fluid and reagent are turned off.
3) Pumps and valves are powered off for resetting.
4) 10 cycles of ISE MANT are performed to discharge the ISE waste into the ISE reagent
pack, if ISE module is configured.
5) The database is shut down. If the operation fails, the system gives a warning, and
continues the shutdown after confirmation.
6) The system exits.
2.2.7 Workflow Descriptions
Sequential actions of the probe in each period (adding sample for biochemistry test)
Wash ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate sample -> raise to “home” position
vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> dispense sample -> raise to the
vertical home position -> rotate to wash well -> wash -> go to next period
Sequential actions of the probe in period (dispensing R1 and R2)

Wash ->rotate to reagent carousel->lower into the reagent bottle-> aspirate reagent -> raise to “home” position
vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> dispense reagent -> raise to the
vertical home position -> rotate to wash well -> wash -> go to next period.
Sequential actions of the probe in each period (dispensing ISE sample)

Wash ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate sample -> raise to “home” position
vertically -> Rotate to above the ISE sample injection port -> lower into the ISE sample injection port ->
dispense sample -> raise to the vertical home position -> rotate to wash well -> wash -> go to next period

Sequential actions of the probe in each period (dispensing whole blood sample)
Wash ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate sample->raise to vertical home
position->Rotate to wash well->Lower to the position for special wash -> Special wash the exterior of the probe
-> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> dispense sample->Raise to vertical home
position->rotate to wash well -> wash -> lower to position for special wash ->special wash the exterior of the
probe->Raise to vertical home position -> wash ->go to next period.
Sequential actions of mixer in each period

Sequential actions: Lower to wash well ->wash-> raise to wash well(vertical home position) -> rotate to
reaction carousel->lower to reaction carousel->mixing->raise to above the reaction carousel->go to next period.
2.2.8 Measuring Points
Set the
R1 R1 incubates for S MixS incubation time R2 MixR2 Maximum reaction time of double Reaction end
130 seconds of R2 arbitrarily reagent is over 9.66 min
T1 T11
Maximum reaction time of single reagent is over 9 min 50 seconds
Figure 2-2 Measuring points for BS-360E single-/double-reagent test

3 Moudules and Units

3.1 Shell Assembly
3.1.1 Module Functions
The shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer and is designed for protecting the
internal assemblies. It provides interfaces for each module, and is also a representation of industrial design.
3.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details
The shells assembly consists of the shielding cover, top panel, desk panel, left and right panels, front panel,
doors, middle panel and rear panel.
7 6
8
9.10
5
11
4
12
3
13
14
1
15
17
16.18

21
22
19
20
Figure 3-1 Shells assembly

Table 3-1 List of materials
No FRU No. Part Name Remarks
1 042-020917-00 Front panel(BS-360E)
3 115-045447-00 Reaction desk panel
4 043-008159-00 Auto wash desk panel
5 801-BA80-00218-00 Air spring
6 115-045451-00 Hinge assembly
7 043-006897-00 Sleeve of wash tubes
8 BA10-30-78156 Syringe shield
9 115-045448-00 Shielding cover(silver)
10 115-045665-00 Shielding cover (dark
grey)
11 042-020878-00 Middle panel
12 BA40-20-72908 ISE port plug
13 115-045446-00 Sample/reagent
carousel cover
14 043-008156-00 Sample/reagen dest
panel
15 BA40-20-72907 Screw plug
16 115-045449-00 Left panel(ISE)
17 042-020893-00 ISE cover
18 042-020883-00 Left panel
19 115-045450-00 Right panel
20 042-020896-00 Lamp cover
21 042-020881-00 Top panel
22 042-020882-00 Rear panel
3.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shielding Cover

When to do
Replace the shielding cover when it is damaged.
Tools

Name Code Quantity

Cross screwdriver / 1
Flathead / 1
screwdriver(small)
How to do
1) Switch off the main power of the analyzer to ensure all moving assemblies are not in working status.
2) Open the shielding cover, and use a flathead screwdriver to insert into the gap of circlip and the bulb
on the air spring to push outwards the circlip to the degree that it will not be dropped.
3) Hold the shielding cover and pull out the air spring from the bulb and restore the air spring to its original
position.
4) Use a cross screwdriver to remove the four M4*12 powder screws on the hinge of the shielding cover,
and then remove the shielding cover assembly.
5) To restore the shielding cover assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the reversed order.
Alignment and confirmation
After restoring the shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if the gap is uneven or the
shielding cover interferes with the panels, adjust the hinges.
3.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels
When to do
When the left and right panels need to be removed to repair the internal assemblies
Tools
Name Code Quantity
How to do
1) Unscrew the three screws at the rear of the left (right) panel.
2) Push the left or right panel backward until the panel falls out of the two positioning pins at the front of
the panel. Remove the left or right panel.
3) Install back the left and right panel according to the reversed order above.
When installing back the left and right panel, make sure the hook on the panel inserted into the square holes
on the frame in order to maintain the gap between the left (right) panel and the frame.
3.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel
When to do
When the front panel needs to be removed to repair the internal assemblies
Tools
Name Code Quantity
How to do
1) Remove the left and right panel first.
2) Unscrew the screw before the sample/reagent carousel desk panel.
3) Remove the retaining screws on the front panel.
4) Pull out the front panel.
5) To reinstall the front panel, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.
When reinstalling the front panel and the sample/reagent carousel desk panel, adjust the screws on the front
panel to adjust the gap between them. Removing and Reinstalling Desk Panels
3.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Desk Panels
When to do
When the desk panels need to be removed to repair the internal assemblies (Note: the desk panels include the
sample/reagent carousel desk panel, the reaction carousel desk panel and the auto wash station desk panel)
Tools
Name Code Quantity
How to do
1) Remove the screw plugs of the sample/reagent carousel desk panel, reaction carousel desk panel
and auto wash station desk panel first and then remove the screws.
2) Unscrew the screws of the wash probes to remove the wash probes assembly. Protect the wash

probes from collision and contamination.

3) Unscrew the two screws on the arm of the mixer to remove the mixer arm.
4) Remove the auto wash station desk panel and reaction carousel desk panel. Tilt the panel to remove
it and handle the probe and mixer with caution.
5) Remove the tubes before removing the wash station desk panel.
6) To reinstall the desk panels, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.
When reinstalling the desk panels, tighten the screws after adjusting the clearance.
3.1.7 Replacing Air Spring
When to do
Replace the air spring if it loses elasticity or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver(small)
How to do
1) Open the shielding cover, and use a flathead screwdriver to insert into the gap of circlip and the bulb
on the air spring to push outwards the cir clip to the degree that it will not be dropped.
2) Hold the air spring and pull it out. If the bulb of the air spring is not damaged, keep using it.
3) Install the new air spring (Only air spring cylinder needs to be replaced.)
The cylinder of the air spring should be at the side of the. Open and close the shielding cover several times to
make the air spring cylinder lubricated.
3.1.8 Remove the dust from the fans
When to do
When much dust is accumulated on the fans, or it has been 1 year since the last maintenance
Maintenance Tools
Name Code Quantity
Suction cleaner/ hair / 1
brush
Maintenance Procedure
1) Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position.
2) If the reagent refrigeration fan and PCB fan need cleaning, remove the left panel.
3) If the cooling fans for the whole unit and the power supply need cleaning, remove the rear panel.
4) If the lamp fan needs cleaning, remove the right panel.
5) Manually rotate the fan and remove the dust on it.
6) Install the removed panels.
7) Switch on the analyzing unit power.
Check if the fans work normally.
3.2 Frame Assembly
The frame assembly is a basic unit for installing and supporting the components of the analyzer.

Figure 3-2 Frame assembly

No. FRU Part Name Remarks
1 048-006900-00 Dust screen(BA36)
3.2.3 Replacing Dust Screens
When to do
When the dust screens need cleaning or are damaged
Tools
N/A
Exploded view for installation
See the figure of Frame assembly
How to do
1) Switch off the main power of the analyzer.
2) Grab the handle to pull out the dust screens.
3) Replace or clean dust screens.
4) Restore the dust screens.
Make sure the dust screens are installed in place.
3.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly
3.3.1 Main functions
Reaction carousel assembly is situated at the right front side of the analyzer, including the body of the reaction
carousel, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction carousel chamber, reaction carousel sensor, and the
reaction carousel motor assembly. It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the
reaction cuvette to the specified position, adding sample/reagent to the cuvette, mixing and washing, together
with the sample probe, the mixer and the 4-phase wash probes. It, as well as, provides a constant temperature
for the reaction cuvette for analysis.
Temprature Sensor Wire of Reaction Disk is Honeywell's high-precision temperature sensor.It is a positive

temperature coefficient, the resistance increases with increasing temperature.

temperature Resistance
0°C 1058 Ω
37°C 1140 Ω
100°C 1375 Ω
3.3.2 Locations and FRU details
The reaction carousel assembly is located in the right front side of the instrument.
Hinge assembly
Syringe shield Sleeve of wash tubes
Shielding
cover
Air spring
Middle
panel Auto wash desk
panel
ISE port plut Reaction desk
Sample/reagent panel
carousel cover
Sample/reagentde
sk panel Front panel
Screw plug
ISE cover
Left
panel
Handle
hole panel

Upper cover assembly
Optical
assembly
Reaction carousel Sensor Reaction carousel heat

motor assembly assembly chamber assembly
Figure 3-3 Reaction carousel assembly

Cable of the heater or

Heater 220V 125W Square temperature protection
switch
Reaction carousel
Press plate of the body
upper heater
Cuvette
Reaction carousel temperature
control 60 fan cable M2.5*8 cross countersunk
head screws
M4*16 cross pan head
Reaction carousel temperature
screw with washer
sensor cable
M4*8 cross pan head screw MX20 hexagon socket cap
with washer screws With spring and flat
washer
Bracket of
Fan Reaction
chamber
Silicone
heating film
Thermal Guard 60C
2Lead15.6mm
Press plate of the M3*6 hexagon socket cap

lower heater screws
M4*8 cross pan head

Support column of the combination screws
reaction carousel
Reaction
carousel motor
Coded disk sensor
Figure 3-4 Reaction carousel explosion diagram

No FRU Part Name Remark
1 009-006306-00 Reaction carousel
temperature sensor cable
2 115-006048-00 Motor assembly
3 BA10-20-78144 Temperature control fan
cable
4 Heater cable under reaction
BA10-21-78143
carousel
5 Heater cable above reaction
BA10-21-78142
carousel
6 Temperature protection
BA10-21-78147 switch wire (for reaction
carousel)
7 009-002204-00 Correlative photocoupler (S)
8 M6C-020007--- Synchronous cog belt,
TBN180XL037
3.3.3 Replacing the cables of the reaction carousel cover
When to do
When the temperature of the reaction chamber is abnormal due to the connection problem of the heater cable

or temperature protection switch cable.

Tools
Name Code Quantity

combination screws
M4*8 cross countersunk
head screw
Press plate of
upper heater
Heater 220V 125W
Square
Cable of temperature
protection switch
Plate
Figure 3-5 Replacing reaction carousel cover cables

How to do
1) Switch off the main power of the whole unit.
2) Open the shielding cover. Unscrew the screw on the wash probes assembly with your hand and
remove the wash probes assembly. Take caution not to collide the wash probes. Rotate the probe to
the aspirating reagent position and rotate the mixer to the wash well position. Unscrew all the M4*8
cross pan head screw with washer on the desk panels to remove the reaction carousel desk panel,
auto wash desk panel. Remove the right panel.
3) Use the cross screw to unscrew the four M4*12 cross pan-head combination screws on the reaction
carousel cover. Disconnect the cable of the heater or temperature protection switch cable to remove
the reaction carousel cover.
4) Unscrew the six M4*8 stainless steel cross countersunk head screws on the press plate of the heater
to remove it.
5) Remove the cable of the heater or temperature protection switch cable.
6) If you want to replace the cable of the heater of the reaction carousel, daub evenly a layer of thermal
paste on the heater and proper amount of hot melt adhesive at the outlet of the heater cable to fix the
cable.
7) If you want to replace the cable of the temperature protection switch of the reaction carousel, daub
evenly a layer of thermal paste on the installing slot of the upper plate and proper amount of hot melt
adhesive at the outlet of the cable of temperature protection switch to fix the cable.
8) Restore the components in the reversed order.
After replacing the cable of reaction carousel upper heater or the cable of temperature protection switch,
reconfigure the related sensor parameters on the software and perform the heat insulation performance test.
For sensor parameter configuration, see7.10.1 ;for reaction carousel temperature test, see 7.10.2 ; for reaction
carousel temperature curve, see 7.10.2 .
3.3.4 Replacing the cable of the heat insulation chamber
When to do
When the temperature of the heat insulation chamber is abnormal due to the cable of lower heater, Thermal
Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm, the cable of temperature sensor or the cable of the fan of heat insulation chamber
is damaged or disconnected.

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Reaction carousel cover

M2.5*8 cross countersunk
head screw
screw
Reaction carousel
Reaction carousel temperature temperature sensor cable
control 60 fan cable
M4*8 cross pan head Bracket of temperature
combination screws sensor
M4*20 hexagon socket cap
Fan bracket head screws with spring and
flat washer
Reaction chamber
Thermal Guard 60C

2Lead15.6mm
Silicone
heating film M3*6 hexagon socket cap head
screw
Press plate of
lower heater M4*8 cross pan head
combination screws
Supporting rod
Figure 3-6 Replacing the cable of the heat insulation chamber of reaction carousel
How to do
auto wash desk panel. Remove the right panel.
4) Loosen the cuvette pressing plate and remove the cuvette segments and place them properly.
Unscrew the three M3*12 hexagon socket screws used to fix the reaction carousel body to remove it
as shown below.

Cuvette Press plate of the Reaction carousel

segment cuvette Fan and bracket temperature sensor
cable
M3*12 hexagon
socket cap head Reaction carousel
screw body
Figure 3-7 Removing Reagent carousel body assembly
5) If you want to replace the cable of the reaction carousel temperature sensor, unscrew the M2.5*8
cross countersunk head screws and disconnect connector of the cable of the reaction carousel
temperature sensor. Replace the cable with new one and connect it.
6) If you want to change the temperature control 60 fan cable of the reaction carousel, disconnect the
connector of the fan and unscrew the two M4*8 cross pan head combination screws. Remove the
fan together with its bracket. Replace new fan cable and connect it properly. Note: the side of the
fan with the label must face the bracket of the fan. The cable is extracted from the lower right corner.
7) If you want to replace the silicone heating film of the reaction carousel or Thermal Guard 60C
2Lead15.6mm, unscrew the three M5*10 hexagon socket cap head screws to remove the optical
measurement assembly. Unscrew the three M4*20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and
flat washers used to fix the reaction chamber. Disconnect the cables, the waste overflow tube and the
grounding wire to remove the reaction chamber.
8) If you want to replace Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm, place the reaction chamber upside down
and unscrew the two M3*6 hexagon socket cap screws.
9) If you want to replace the silicone heating film of the reaction carousel, loosen the twelve M4*8 cross
pan head combination screws to remove the heater plate. Daub evenly a layer of thermal paste on the
silicone heating film and small amount of hot melt adhesive at the outlet of the cable to fix it.
10) Restore the components in the reversed order. Note: Align the heat insulation chamber with the drive
shaft of the reaction carousel.
After replacing silicone heating film, Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm and the reaction carousel temperature
sensor cable, reconfigure the related sensor parameters on the software and perform the heat insulation
performance test. For sensor parameter configuration, see7.10.1 Configuration of Sensor Parameters; for
reaction carousel temperature test and reaction carousel temperature curve, see7.10.2 Observe Temperature
Curve.
If replacing the Optical measure assembly, refer to 7.3.2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment to adjust
photoelectric signal collecting position; Refer to 7.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment to adjust photoelectric gain.
3.3.5 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor

When to do
When the Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor failed
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1


Cross pan head Coded disk
screw with Home sensor
sensor
washerM3*6
Mounting
plate
The sensor
installed on the
Sensor left of the
Hexagon socket cap Cross pan head
bracket bracket.
head screws M3*8 screw M3*6
Figure 3-8 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
Note:
Install the sensors according to the identifications on the cable connectors and the instrument connectors:
"RCD--PHO-C" for coder sensor and "RCD--PHO-O" for home position sensor.
Do not tighten the sensor screws with excessive torque force, in order to avoid damaging the sensors.
Make sure to install the home position sensor in the correct position.
How to do
Replacing coder sensor assembly
2) Unscrew the three M4*8 cross pan-head combination screws on the right panel to remove it and then
unscrew the three M4*8 cross pan-head combination screws on the left panel to remove it. Unscrew
the four M4*8 cross pan-head combination screws on the front panel to remove it.
3) Unplug the connector of the reaction carousel coder sensor.
4) Unscrew the two M3*6 cross pan head combination screws on the sensor’s mounting plate and
remove the coder sensor cable with the sensor.
5) Loosen the two cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the coder sensor from the
mounting plate.
6) Fix the new coder sensor on the mounting plate using two M3×6 cross pan head screws.
7) Use two M3*6 cross pan head combination screws to fix the sensor mounting plate to the bracket of
the sensor. Adjust the height of the mounting plate of the sensor to keep the coder in the middle of the
coder sensor, and then tighten the retaining screws of the mounting plate.
8) Connect the connector of the reaction carousel coder sensor.
9) After aligning the sensor assembly, restore the components in the reversed order.
Replacing home position sensor assembly
3) Unplug the connectors of the reaction carousel home position sensor and coder sensor.
4) Loosen the three M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the sensor
assembly, and then remove the sensor assembly. Pay attention not to drop the screws into the
instrument.
5) Unscrew the two M3*6 cross pan head screws on the cables of carousel home position sensor to
remove it from the bracket of the sensor.
6) Fix the new cables of carousel home position sensor onto the sensor bracket using two M3*6 cross
pan head screws.
7) Fix the sensor assembly of the reaction carousel onto the big bottom plate with three M3*8 hexagon
socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Manually rotate the reaction carousel and
check that the zero position stopper of the coded disk does not interfere with the zero position sensor.

8) Connect the home position sensor and the coded disk sensor.
1) Refer to 7.3.2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment to adjust photoelectric signal collecting position.
2) Refer to 7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit to adjust reaction carousel circumferential position,
sample/reagent carousel circumferential position,
3) Refer to 7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel and 7.6.1 Mixer to Horizontal Position
on Reaction Carousel and 7.7.1 Cuvette Wash Station Home to adjust probe and mixer horizontal
position and auto wash horizontal position.
3.3.6 Replacing motor assembly and synchronous belt
When to do
Replace the reaction carousel motor or synchronous belt when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Motor
M4*12hexagon
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washer
Bracket of
motor
M4*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washer
Figure 3-9 Reaction carousel motor assembly
WARNING
During removing and installation, avoid dropping screws and washers into the analyzer.
How to do
Replacing the motor
3) Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M4*10 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer
on the reaction carousel motor assembly, remove the motor assembly and avoid dropping screws into
the analyzer.
4) Fix the motor assembly to the large bottom plate using four M4*10 hexagon socket cap head screws
with spring washer. Tighten the belt and screws and connect the cable of the motor.
Replacing the synchronous belt

auto wash desk panel. Remove the left and right panel. Unscrew the four M4*8 cross pan-head
combination screws on the front panel to remove it.
4) Loosen the cuvette pressing plate and remove the cuvette segments and place them properly.
Unscrew the three M3*12 hexagon socket screws used to fix the reaction carousel body to remove it.
5) Unscrew the three M5*10 hexagon socket cap head screws to remove the optical measurement
assembly. Unscrew the three M3*12 hexagon socket cap head screws used to fix the reaction chamber.
Disconnect the cables to remove the reaction chamber.
6) Disconnect the motor cable and unscrew the four M4*10 hexagon socket head screws on the reaction
carousel motor to remove it.
7) Install a new synchronous belt.
8) Tighten the belt and screws and connect the cable of the motor.
9) Restore the components in the reversed order. Note: Align the heat insulation chamber with the drive
shaft of the reaction carousel.
The belt tension needs to be adjusted to ensure that the tension is the same as before the replacement.
3.3.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette
Refer to 3.9.6 Replacing Reaction Cuvette.
3.4 Sample/Reagent carousel cover assembly
Sample/Reagent carousel assembly is located at the left front of the analyzer, including the carousel body,
refrigeration assembly, drive assembly, motor assembly, coded disk optical coupler and the reagent bar code
reader (Optional). It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reagent bottle or
sample tube to the specified position with sampling assembly. It provides a refrigerating environment, and the
reagents stored in such environment can be kept stable with little volatilization. For details, please refer to the
following contents.
 Load sample/reagent. Place some reagent bottles with reagent and sample tubes with sample on the
carousel. Let the probe aspirate sample and reagent and dispense them into the cuvettes.
 Refrigerating reagent: Provide 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature environment (2-12°C)
to keep the reagent stable with little volatilization.
 Sequential feeding: The drive assembly drives the carousel to carry certain reagent and sample in the
given order to the aspirate position for aspiration.
 Input reagent and sample data automatically: Bar code reader (optional).
Reagent Temperature Sensor: It is a Negative temperature coefficient, the resistance decreases with
increasing temperature.
2°C About 11KΩ
25°C About 5KΩ

Sample/Reagent carousel assembly is located at the left front of the analyzer

Sample/reagent carousel
cover
sample/reagent desk
panel
Bar code
assembly
Left panel
Sample/reagent
carousel
Figure 3-10 Locations of sample/reagent carousel on the instrument

13
1
12
11
2
10
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
Figure 3-11 Sample/Reagent carousel assembly
No FRU Part Name Remarks
1 115-045517-00 Sample/Reagent carousel body
assembly
2 024-000110-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm B3470K
with threads
3 049-000971-00 Square sealing ring
4 009-004605-00 Semi-conductive peltier (long cable)
5 049-001224-00 Square sealing ring
6 024-000920-00 Semi-conductive cooler(BA36)
8 115-045515-00 Sample/Reagent carousel motor
assembly
9 M6C-020007--- Synchronous cog belt, TBN180XL037
10 024-000899-00 FAN 12Vdc 92*92*38mm 110CFM
33.6dB 300mm
11 115-041761-00 Reagent carousel anti-fogging heater
assembly
12 023-001265-00 Bar Code Reader
13 BA20-20-75214 Tube holder 1
3.4.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Body Assembly
When to do
When the sample/reagent carousel body is damaged.
Tools

Name Code Quantity

Medical rubber gloves / 1 pair
Sample/reagent Spring
carousel body screw
Figure 3-12 Sample/Reagent carousel body assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Rotate the probe to reaction carousel and remove the sample/reagent
carousel cover.
3) Unscrew the two spring screws to remove the sample/reagent carousel body.
4) Align the new sample/reagent carousel body with the positioning dowel and tighten the spring screws.
5) Install the sample/reagent carousel cover and close the shielding cover.
N/A
3.4.4 Replacing Reagent Temperature Sensor
When to do
When the temperature sensor fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1

Sample/reagent carousel
body assembly
M3*10 hexagon
socket cap head screw
with spring washer
Shaft sleeve Screw plug

washer
M4*25 hexagon
socket screw
Reagent
refrigeration
compartment
Temperature sensor
cylinder
Temperature
sensor
Figure 3-13 Reagent temperature sensor assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover and remove the sample/reagent carousel cover. Remove the left panel, right
panel, front panel and sample/reagent desk panel. Protect the probe from being collided during the
dismantling.
4) Disconnect the drain tube from the reagent compartment. Unplug the connector of the temperature
sensor and the cooler. If bar code reader is configured, remove it.
5) Remove the three M3*10 screws (hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers) and
the shaft sleeve.
6) Remove the screw plugs and remove the four M4*25 hexagon socket cap screws used to fix the
reagent refrigeration compartment with the hexagon wrench. Remove the refrigeration compartment
together with the refrigeration module.
7) Clear the sealing glue in the temperature sensor mounting hole and remove the temperature sensor
and its pad.
8) Mount the pad on the new temperature sensor and install it into the reagent refrigeration compartment.
Use the sealing glue to plug up the mounting hole.
9) Restore the instrument according to the reversed order above.
Note
When using the sealing glue to plug up the mounting hole of the temperature sensor, make sure
sufficient glue is used to fill up the mounting hole. Wipe off the excessive glue.
1) Re-align Probe to outer ring, middle ring and inner ring positions,see 7.5.1 ~7.5.5 .
2) Re-align barcode scanning position,see 7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.5 Replacing cooler and sealing ring
When to do

When the cooler failed

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1
Sample/reagent
carousel body
M3*10 hexagon socket
cap head screws with
Shaft sleeve spring and flat washers
Screw plug Antiwear pad

M4*25 hexagon
socket screw
chamber
Square sealing ring Square sealing ring
Refrigeration board
Aluminum block
M3*6 hexagon socket M4*12cross pan head
cap head screws with combination screws
spring washer Heat insulation plate
Heat insulation plate
combination screws
Square sealing ring
Square sealing ring
combination screws Cooler
Cooler Radiator
Radiator
combination screws
combination screws
Figure 3-14 Removing cooler and sealing ring
How to do
2) Open the shielding cover and remove the sample/reagent carousel cover. Remove the left panel, front
panel and sample/reagent desk panel. Protect the probe from being collided during the dismantling.
sensor. If bar code reader is configured, remove it.
the shaft sleeve.
7) Remove the four M4*12 stainless steel cross pan head combination screws of the cooler you want to
change. Clear the sealing glue at the cable and around the radiator and remove the radiator.
8) If you want to replace one cooler, unscrew the four M4*12 stainless steel cross pan head combination
screws of the cooler to remove it. Route the cable of the new cooler through the hole of the heat

insulation plate. Fix the heat insulation plate and daub heat conductive paste at the two ends of the
cooler. Install the cooler in place. Pay attention to the orientation of the cooler. Connect the cable and
daub sealing glue around the heat insulation plate and the cable routing hole. Tighten the screws of
the radiator with torque 9~10kgf and daub the sealing glue around the radiator. Restore the
instrument according to the reversed order of step 2~7.
9) If you want to replace the two coolers, remove the fixing plate of the cables of the cooler. Remove the
coolers after arranging the cables. Replace them with new coolers. Daub the heat conductive paste
at the two ends of the cooler and install them in place. Pay attention to the orientation of the cooler.
Arrange the cables and fix them with the removed cable fixing plate. Route the cable of the cooler
through the holes of the radiator. Use torque 11.5~12kgf to tighten the screws and daub sealing glue
around the radiators. Restore the instrument according to the reversed order of step 2~7.
Note
When using the sealing glue, daub sufficient sealing glue evenly.
1) Re-align Probe to outer ring, middle ring and inner ring positions,see 7.5.1 ~7.5.5 .
2) Re-align barcode scanning position,see7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.6 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
When to do
When the Home position sensor and coded disk sensor of the reagent carousel failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
M3*6 cross pan head screw M3*6cross pan
with washer head screw
Sensor mounting plate Coded disk
optical coupler
M3*6 Hexagon socket
cap screw with washer
M3*6cross
pan head
M3*6 hexagon socket cap head
screw
screw with spring and flat
Bracket of the washers
optical coupler Home position sensor
Figure 3-15 Removing Correlative optical coupler wire (S)

How to do
2) Remove left panel, right panel and front panel.
3) Mark a line at the installing position of the mixer bracket on the big bottom plate. Unscrew the three
M5*25 screws used to fix the mixer assembly. Rotate the mixer to a position convenient for removing
the coded disk optical coupler.
4) Unscrew the three M3*6 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers of the coded
disk optical coupler. Remove the coded disk optical coupler and its connector.
5) Loosen the two M3*6 cross pan head combination screws on the optical coupler mounting plate, and
then remove the optical coupler mounting plate together with the coded optical coupler.
6) Loosen the two M3*6 cross pan head screws on the coded disk optical coupler, and remove it from
the mounting plate.
7) Fix the coded disk optical coupler on the mounting plate using two M3*6 cross pan head screws.
8) Use two M3*6 cross pan head combination screws to fix the mounting plate with coded disk optical

coupler onto the bracket and do not tighten the screws.

9) Loosen the two M3*6 cross pan head screws to remove the home position sensor from the bracket.
10) Fix the new home position sensor on the bracket with two M3*6 cross pan head screws.
11) Use three M3*6 hexagon socket cap head screws to fix the coded disk optical coupler onto the big
bottom plate. Fix the bracket of the optical coupler. Adjust the sensor mounting plate to make the
coded disk lie in the middle of the coded disk optical coupler, and then tighten the screws on the
mounting plate.
12) Plug the connectors of the reagent carousel home position sensor and coded disk optical coupler.
Note:
 When fixing the mixer assembly, align its position with the marked line.
 When replacing only the coded disk optical coupler, skip step 9-10.
 When replacing only the reagent carousel home position sensor, skip step 5-8.
After the sample/reagent carousel home sensor and coded disk sensor, refer to 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 to align
sample/reagent carousel circumferential position.
Refer to 7.5.3 ~7.5.5 to align probe to horizontal position on the sample/reagent carouse.
Refer to7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment to align bar code scanning position.
3.4.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly
When to do
When motor failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
M3*20 hexagon / 1
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washers
Sample/reagent
body assembly

screws with spring washer
Shaft Screw plug

sleeve M4*25 hexagon socket cap head
screw
Antiwear pad
compartment
Air vent
M4*8 cross pan head

combination screw
Coded Disk synchronous belt

M4*10 hexagon socket cap M3*20 hexagon socket
sensor assembly
screw Motor head screw
Figure 3-16 Removing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly

How to do
dismantling.
the shaft sleeve.
7) Unscrew the eight M4*8 cross pan head combination screws to remove the air vent.
8) Mark a line at the place where the mounting plate of the motor aligns with big bottom plate (orientated
toward motor assembly tensioning. Remove the four M4*10 hexagon socket cap screws used to fix
the sample/reagent carousel motor assembly. Remove the sample/reagent carousel motor assembly.
9) Install new sample/reagent carousel motor and sleeve the synchronous belt.
10) Use one M3*20 hexagon socket cap screws with spring and flat washer to install into the hole of the
motor mounting plate. Tension the belt to the marked line and tighten the retaining screws. Remove
the M3*20 hexagon screw.
11) Install the air vent. Tighten the screws when the air vent aligns with the line marked before the
sample/reagent carousel motor assembly was removed.
12) Mount the reagent refrigeration compartment along with the refrigeration module onto the air vent, and
adjust the reagent refrigeration compartment’s position until its mounting holes aligns with those of the
air vent. Use the glue gun to plug up the reagent refrigeration compartment’s mounting holes with
sealing glue. Mount the four antiwear pads back onto the four M4*25 hexagon socket cap screws, fix
the reagent refrigeration compartment, and then install the screw plugs.
13) Restore the instrument according to the reversed order of Steps 2~6.
Note
Note: Do not mistaken the direction of the motor.
1) Align the position before fixing the air vent.
2) Re-align Probe to outer ring, middle ring and inner ring positions,see 7.5.3 7.5.5 .
3) Re-align barcode scanning position,see 7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.8 Replacing the synchronous belt
When to do
When it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1
M3*20 hexagon / 1
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washers

Sample/reagent carousel body

screws with spring washers
Screw plug
Shaft sleeve
M4*25 hexagon
Anti-wear pad
Reagent
refrigeration
chamber
Air vent
M4*8 cross pan

head combination
screw
Coded Disk sensor Synchronous belt

M4*10 hexagon
assembly M3*20 Hexagon socket head
socket cap screw Motor
screw hole
Figure 3-17 Removing synchronous belt

How to do
dismantling.
the shaft sleeve.
7) Mark a line at the place where the mounting plate of the motor aligns with big bottom plate (orientated
toward motor assembly tensioning. Loosen the four M4*10 hexagon socket cap screws used to fix the
sample/reagent carousel motor assembly until the motor assembly can be moved. Do not remove the
screws.
8) Remove the synchronous belt.
9) Sleeve the new synchronous belt onto the drive shaft and the pulleys.
10) Use one M3*20 hexagon socket cap screws with spring and flat washer to install into the hole of the
motor mounting plate. Tension the belt to the marked line and tighten the retaining screws. Remove
the M3*20 hexagon screw.
11) Mount the reagent refrigeration compartment along with the refrigeration module onto the air vent, and
adjust the reagent refrigeration compartment’s position until its mounting holes aligns with those of the
air vent. Use the glue gun to plug up the reagent refrigeration compartment’s mounting holes with
sealing glue. Mount the four antiwear pads back onto the four M4*25 hexagon socket cap screws, fix
the reagent refrigeration compartment, and then install the screw plugs.
12) Restore the instrument according to the reversed order of Steps 2~5.

3.4.9 Replacing cooling fan of reagent refrigeration
When to do
When cooling fan failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
M4*45 cross
pan head screw Φ92 Fan net
with the flat shield Cooling fan of reagent
washer refrigeration
Figure 3-18 Replacing cooling fan of the reagent refrigeration assembly

How to do
2) Remove left panel, right panel and front panel.
3) Disconnect the connectors.
4) Unscrew the four M4*45 cross pan head screw with the flat washer of the fan. Remove the fan net
shield and the fan.
5) Install the new fan and note the installing direction. Arrange the cables and connect the connector.
6) Install the front panel, left panel and right panel.
After powering on the instrument, check that the cooling fan is blowing wind outwards,
3.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader
When to do
When the bar code reader failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1


Bracket of the bar code reader spring and flat washer
Bar code
reader
Figure 3-19 Removing bar code reader

How to do
dismantling.
3) Disconnect the connector of the bar code reader.
4) Remove two M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with flat washer. Remove the bar code reader.
5) Install the new bar code reader. Tighten the screws and connect the cable of the barcode reader.
6) Power on the instrument. Align the bar code scanning position with BA24-J03 BA24 bar code light
beam alignment tool according to the alignment steps on the software. Tighten the screws after the
bar code light beam is aligned.
7) Install back the panels.
Re-align barcode scanning position,see7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.
3.4.11 Replacing Reagent Anti-fogging Heating Assembly
When to do
Replace the anti-fogging heater assembly when the glass is damaged or the assembly does not work.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

M2*8 cross pan head screw Anti-fogging device

Reagent Anti-fogging
mounting plate
Heating Assembly Antifogging
Bracket of Dust shield and Heater M3*8 cross pan
bar code sponge head screw
Aluminum
reader
Temperature plate
switch
Mounting
plate
M3*8 hexagon
socket cap head
screws with
spring and flat
washer Press plat of switch
Bar code Rubber
reader M3*6 cross pan head M3*12 cross pan head pad
Glass
screw screw window
Figure 3-20 Replace the anti-fogging heater assembly

How to do
dismantling.
3) Remove two M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with flat washer. Remove the bar code reader
mounting plate with the bracket and bar coder reader.
4) Remove the four M3*6 cross pan head screws. Remove the anti-dust screen.
5) Disconnect the connector of the temperature switch and the anti-fogging heater. Remove the four
M3*8 cross pan head screw to remove the reagent anti-fogging heater.
6) Remove one M3*12 hexagon socket cap screws to remove the press plate of the switch, temperature
protection switch and anti-fogging heater.
7) Remove the four M2*8 cross pan head screws to remove the aluminum plate and the damaged glass
window. Clear the glass scraps on the pad. If necessary, change the pad.
8) Place the new glass window on the silicone pad in the slot of fixing plate of the anti-fogging device.
Ensure that the glass is not cracked or dirty.
9) Install the aluminum plate in place with four M2*8 cross pan head screw.
10) Daub a layer of heat conductive glue on the anti-fogging heater and the aluminum plate and install
them in place.
11) Daub a layer of heat conductive glue on the contact surfaces of the temperature switch (if damaged,
change it) and anti-fogging heater. Install the press plate of the switch with one M3*12 hexagon socket
cap screws.
12) Use four M3*8 cross pan head screws to fix the anti-fogging assembly into the reagent refrigeration
compartment.
13) Connect the cables of the temperature switch and anti-fogging heater. Use four M3*6 cross pan head
screws to fix the anti-dust screen with the sponge onto the fixing plate of the anti-fogging device.
14) Fix the bar code reader mounting plate on the frame and tighten the screws on the bar code reader
and its bracket.
15) Power on the instrument. Align the bar code scanning position with BA24-J03 BA24 bar code light
beam alignment tool according to the alignment steps on the software. Tighten the screws after the
bar code light beam is aligned.
Re-align barcode scanning position,see7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment.

3.5 Probe assembly

The probe assembly consists of probe drive assembly, arm assembly and the probe. The probe assembly can
move in horizontal and vertical direction, featuring level detection, vertical obstruction detection and clog
detection. The probe assembly has other functions, such as limiting of mechanical position, self-lock during
power interruption, etc.
Horizontal direction: Probe moving to wash well→aspirating sample position→reaction carousel/ISE aspirating
position→wash well→aspirating reagent position→dispensing reagent position on the reaction carousel→wash
well.
Vertical direction: The probe moves in vertical direction among the positions of reagent bottle, sample tube,
cuvette, wash well and ISE sample injection port.
Reagent Preheating temperature sensor: It is a Negative temperature coefficient, the resistance decreases
with increasing temperature.
2°C About 11KΩ
25°C About 5KΩ

Probe assembly
Figure 3-21 Locations of probe assembly on the instrument

4 7
3
9
1
10
11
12
Figure 3-22 Probe movement assembly

Table 3-5 List of FRU materials
2 115-037085-00 Sample probe assembly for
HbA1c test
3 033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring
4 115-037552-00 Reagent preheating
assembly
5 043-008228-00 Reagent probe arm
cover(DS193)
6 044-000995-00 170 rotor
7 051-002479-00 Level sense board PCBA
8 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw
(M3×6)
9 BA30-10-06619 Synchronous belt.
B123MXL6.4
10 115-045522-00 Horizontal motor assembly
11 115-045520-00 Probe drive assembly
12 115-045521-00 Vertical motor assembly
3.5.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement

When to do
When the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement failed.

Tools
Name Code Quantity
M3*6cross pan
head screw
M3*6 cross pan

head screw Horizontal
optical coupler
Horizontal sensor Horizontal sensor

bracket bracket
Horizontal movement Vertical optical
optical coupler coupler
M3*6 cross pan
head screw
Figure 3-23 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement
How to do
remove the wash probes assembly. Take caution not to collide the wash probes. Unscrew all the M4*8
cross pan head screw with washer on the desk panels. Remove the cover of the sample/reagent
carousel, sample/reagent desk panel, reaction carousel desk panel and auto wash desk panel.
3) When replacing the vertical movement optical coupler, disconnect the cable and remove the M3*6
cross pan head screw to remove the optical coupler. Replace it with new optical coupler, fix it and
connect the cable.
4) When replacing the horizontal movement optical coupler, disconnect the cable, remove one M3*6
cross pan head screw to remove the bracket and then remove one M3*6 screw to remove the
horizontal movement optical coupler. Replace it with new optical coupler and fix the optical coupler
and its bracket with M3*6 screws. Connect the cable.
N/A
3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws
When to do
When probe assembly is damaged or anti-collision spring failed or cosmetic defect of the powder screw occurs.

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Reagent probe arm

cover((DS193)
Spring guide
post
Anti- Hardened powder

collision screw(M3*6)
spring
Probe
Figure 3-24 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover.
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover (DS193). At this time,
you can replace the hardened powder screw.
4) Use Flathead screwdriver to remove the spring guide post and anti-collision spring. At this time, you
can replace the anti-collision spring.
5) Disconnect the cable of the anti-collision sensor and the wash tubes.
6) Remove the probe assembly and replace it with new one. Connect the cable and tubes.
7) Restore the instrument in the reversed order of step 2~4.
N/A
3.5.5 Replacing Reagent Preheating Assembly
When to do
When Reagent Preheating Assembly failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Reagent probe arm cover

(DS193)
Reagent
Preheating
Assembly
Heat
insulation
pad
M3*6
cross pan
head
M3*8 screw
cross pan
head
screw
Hardened powder
screw(M3*6)
Figure 3-25 Replacing Reagent preheating assembly

How to do
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover (DS193).
4) Remove the cable of reagent preheating assembly. Remove the connector of the wash tubes from the
probe.
5) Remove one M3*8 cross pan head screw and one M3*6 cross pan head screw. Remove the two
heating insulation pad. Lay down the reagent preheating assembly. Remove the cover of the reagent
preheating assembly and then remove the wash tube.
6) Install new reagent preheating assembly and route the wash tube.
7) Install the two heating insulation pads and fix the reagent preheating assembly with one M3*8 and one
M3*6 cross pan head screw.
8) Connect the cable and the wash tube.
9) Use the sealing glue to seal the inlet and outlet of the wash tube and the cable.
N/A
3.5.6 Replacing level sense board
When to do
When level sense board failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Reagent probe arm

cover(DS193)
Level sense
board
M3*6 cross pan

head screw
Hardened power
screws(M3X6)
Figure 3-26 Removing level sense board

How to do
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover (DS193).
4) Disconnect the connector of the level sense board.
5) Remove the two M3*6 cross pan head screws to remove the level sense board.
6) Replace it with new one and restore the instrument.
N/A
3.5.7 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt
When to do
When horizontal rotational synchronous belt failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
M3*8 hexagon
socket cap screw
Figure 3-27 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. .Unscrew all the M4*8 cross pan head screw with washer on the desk panels.
Remove the cover of the sample/reagent carousel, sample/reagent desk panel, reaction carousel desk
panel and auto wash desk panel.
3) Mark a curve receptively along the flat washer of the two M3*8 hexagon socket cap screws used to fix
the outside of the motor.
4) Loosen the four M3*8 hexagon socket cap screws and remove the synchronous belt.
5) Sleeve the new synchronous belt onto the two pulleys.
6) Move the motor till the flat washers of the two screws at the outside of the motor match the marked
curve. Tighten the four screws.
3.5.8 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
When Horizontal Motor Assembly failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
M3*8 hexagon
socket cap screw
Figure 3-28 Replacing Horizontal motor assembly

How to do
panel and auto wash desk panel.
4) Disconnect the cable of the motor. Remove the four M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring
and flat washers to remove the horizontal motor.
5) Pretighten the four M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers of the new
horizontal motor. Move the motor till the flat washers of the two screws at the outside of the motor
match the marked curve. Tigthen the four screws and connect the cable of the motor.
N/A
3.5.9 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly
When to do
When vertical Motor Assembly failed
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1

Probe movement
assembly
Synchronous
belt
Fixing plate B
spring and flat washer
Fixing plate A Vertical motor
M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screw
Figure 3-29 Replacing vertical motor assembly

How to do
panel and auto wash desk panel. Protect the probe from being collided during the dismantling.
3) Disconnect the connectors of the vertical and horizontal motor. Disconnect the connector of the optical
coupler.
4) Remove the three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Disconnect
the cables and remove the probe assembly.
5) Mark a line at the place where the upper surfaces of fixing plate A and B contact the bracket. Remove
the three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to remove the fixing plate A
and B.Remove the synchronous belt from the pulley and finally remove the motor.
6) Install new motor and sleeve the synchronous belt onto the pulley. Connect the motor with its fixing
plate A and B with three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers and move the
motor till the fixing plates align with the line. Tighten the screws to fix the motor.
Refer to 7.5.1 ~7.5.9 to align the positions: probe to reaction carousel, wash well, sample/reagent carousel and
ISE sample injection port.
3.5.10 Replacing Probe Drive Assembly
When to do
When Probe Drive Assembly failed
Tools

Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Reagent probe arm

cover (DS193)
M4*16 hexagon
socket cap head
screws with
spring washer
Probe arm
assembly
Hardened powder
screws(M3X6)
Probe drive
assembly
M5*25 hexagon
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washer
Figure 3-30 Replacing probe drive assembly

How to do
panel and auto wash desk panel. Protect the probe from being collided during the dismantling.
3) Remove the cables and wash tubes and their sleeve.
coupler.
5) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover.
6) Remove two M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to remove the probe arm.
Remove the cable from the precision shaft. Do not collide the probe.
7) Unscrew the three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers to remove
the probe drive assembly.
8) Install the new probe drive assembly and fix it with three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with
spring and flat washers.
9) Route the cable and tube from the top of the precision shaft. Use two M4*16 hexagon socket cap head
screws with spring washers to pretighten the arm assembly on the precision shaft.

10) Sleeve the cable and the tube and connect the cable with the PCBA. Connect the tube.
11) Connect the cables of the motor and the optical coupler.
12) Refer to 7.5.1 ~7.5.9 to align the positions: probe to reaction carousel, wash well, sample/reagent
carousel and ISE sample injection port. Tighten two M4*16 hexagon socket cap screws to fix the arm
assembly. Use two hardened powder screws (M3*6) to install the arm cover.
Refer to 7.5.1 ~7.5.9 to align the positions: probe to reaction carousel, wash well, sample/reagent carousel and
ISE sample injection port.
3.6 Mixer Assembly
Mixer assembly consists of drive assembly and arm assembly. The mixer can move in horizontal and vertical
direction and mix the reaction liquid after sample is dispensed and after the reagent is dispensed.
Horizontal direction: mixer can move to wash well and reaction carousel.
Vertical direction: The mixer moves in vertical direction among the positions of cuvette and wash well.
Mixer is located at the front of the instrument.
Mixer assembly
Figure 3-31 Locations of mixer assembly on the instrument

9
2
1
10
Figure 3-32 Mixer movement assembly

1 009-002204-00 Correlative photocoupler
(S)
2 BA30-10-06619 Synchronous belt.
B123MXL6.4
3 115-045522-00 Horizontal motor
assembly
4 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw
(M3×6)
5 BA31-20-41651 Mixer
6 BA30-10-15052 DC motor WRF-130CH
7 043-008229-00 Mixer arm cover(DS193)
8 044-000332-00 100mm mixer arm base
9 115-036665-00 Mixer drive assembly
10 115-045521-00 Vertical motor assembly
3.6.3 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement
When to do
When the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement failed
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Cross screwdriver / each respectively
(long and short)
Adjustable wrench / 1

Diagonal pliers / 1
Wash well and its bracket
M3*6 Cross pan

head screw
Mixer assembly
Horizontal
optical coupler
bracket
M3*6 cross pan

head screw
Vertical optical coupler
M5*25 hexagon M3*6 Cross pan

socket cap head head screw
screw
Figure 3-33 Replacing the optical coupler of horizontal and vertical movement
Replacement steps:
panel and auto wash desk panel. Protect the mixer from being collided during the dismantling.
When replacing the vertical movement optical coupler, remove the left panel, right panel and front
panel.
3) When replacing the horizontal movement optical coupler, disconnect the cable, remove one M3*6
cross pan head screw to remove the bracket and then remove one M3*6 screw to remove the
horizontal movement optical coupler. Replace it with new optical coupler and fix the optical coupler
and its bracket with M3*6 screws. Connect the cable.
4) When replacing the vertical movement optical coupler, mark a line at the bracket of the wash well
before removing it. Disconnect the cables of the optical coupler, horizontal and vertical motor.
5) Draw a line at the place where the mixer assembly contacts with the big bottom plate. Remove the
three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers at the bottom of the mixer
assembly. Remove the mixer assembly.
6) Remove the M3*6 cross pan head screw to remove the vertical movement optical coupler. Replace it
with new one, fix it and connect the cable.
7) Use three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers to fix the mixer onto
the big bottom plate. The bracket must align with the marked line.
8) Install the wash well bracket on the mixer. The bracket must align with the marked line. Connect the
optical coupler and the cable.
Refer to 7.6.3 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position to align mixer rotary to wash well.
3.6.4 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt
When to do
When horizontal rotational synchronous belt failed

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

head screws with spring
and flat washer
Horizontal motor
assembly
Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
Figure 3-34 Replacing horizontal rotational synchronous belt

Replacement steps:
panel, auto wash desk panel and sample/reagent desk panel. Protect the mixer from being collided
during the dismantling.
4) Loosen the four M3*8 hexagon socket cap screws and remove the synchronous belt.
5) Sleeve the new synchronous belt onto the two pulleys.
6) Move the motor till the flat washers of the two screws at the outside of the motor match the marked
curve. Tigthen the four screws.
Refer to 7.6.1 and 7.6.3 to align Reagent Mixer Rotary to Cuvette and mixer rotary to wash well.
3.6.5 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
When Horizontal Motor Assembly failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1


head screws with spring
and flat washer
Horizontal motor
Horizontal
rotational
synchronous belt
Figure 3-35 Replacing horizontal motor assembly

Replacement steps:
panel and auto wash desk panel. Protect the probe and mixer from being collided during the
dismantling.
4) Disconnect the cable of the motor. Remove the four M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring
and flat washers to remove the horizontal motor.
5) Pretighten the four M3*8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers of the new
horizontal motor. Move the motor till the flat washers of the two screws at the outside of the motor
match the marked curve. Tigthen the four screws and connect the cable of the motor.
3.6.6 Replacing DC motor, mixer and powder screws
When to do
When DC motor failed, mixer is damaged or twisted or cosmetic defect of the powder screw occurs.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver / each respectively
(big and small)

Mixer arm cover
DC motor
M2*4 cross pan

head screw
with the flat
washer
Retaining nut
Mixer
Hexagon socket cap

screws(M3*6)
Figure 3-36 Replacing DC motor, mixer and powder screws

Replacement steps:
panel and auto wash desk panel. Protect the probe and mixer from being collided during the
dismantling. If necessary, remove the left panel, right panel and front panel.
3) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the mixer arm cover. At this time, you can
replace the hardened powder screw.
4) Unscrew the retaining nut to remove the mixer. At this time, you can replace it with new mixer.
5) Disconnect the cable of the motor. Remove two M2*4 cross countersunk head screws. Remove the
DC motor and replace it with new one. Use two M2*4 cross countersunk head screws and flat washer.
Connect the cable of the motor.
6) Install the mixer. Tighten the retaining nut and install the mixer arm cover.
3.6.7 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly
When to do
When vertical Motor Assembly failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1

Vertical
Probe movement
motor
assembly
Synchronous
belt
Motor fixing
plate B
M5*25 hexagon
socket cap head
screw
Motor fixing M4*16hexagon socket cap
plate A head screws with spring and
flat washer
Figure 3-37 Replacing vertical motor assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Unscrew all the M4*8 cross pan head screw with washer on the desk panels.
panel, auto wash desk panel, left panel, right panel and front panel. Remove the bracket of the wash
well together with the wash well. Protect the mixer from being collided during the dismantling.
coupler.
4) Remove the three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Disconnect
the cables and remove the mixer assembly.
5) Mark a line at the place where the upper surfaces of fixing plate A and B contact the bracket. Remove
the three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to remove the fixing plate A
and B.Remove the synchronous belt from the pulley and finally remove the motor.
6) Install new motor and sleeve the synchronous belt onto the pulley. Connect the motor with its fixing
plate A and B with three M4*16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers and move the
motor till the fixing plates align with the line. Tighten the screws to fix the motor.
Refer to 7.6.1 ~ 7.6.3 to align positions: Mixer Rotary to Cuvette and mixer rotary to wash well.
3.6.8 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly
When to do
When mixer Drive Assembly failed
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1


Mixer arm cover
Mixer arm
assembly
Hardened powder
screw(M3*6)
M3*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washer
M5*25 hexagon
socket cap head Mixer drive
screws with spring unit
and flat washer
Figure 3-38 Exploded view of mixer drive assembly

Replacement steps:
panel, auto wash desk panel, left panel, right panel and front panel. Remove the bracket of the wash
well together with the wash well. Protect the mixer from being collided during the dismantling.
3) Remove the cable in the precision shaft and disconnect the cables and connectors.
4) Disconnect the connectors of the vertical and horizontal motor. Disconnect the connector of the two
optical couplers.
5) Remove the two hardened powder screws (M3*6) and the probe arm cover.
6) Remove two M3*10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to remove the mixer arm.
Remove the cable from the precision shaft. Do not collide the mixer.
7) Unscrew the three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers to remove
the mixer drive assembly.
8) Install the new mixer drive assembly and fix it with three M5*25 hexagon socket cap head screws with
spring and flat washers.
9) Route the cable from the top of the precision shaft. Use two M3*10 hexagon socket cap head screws
with spring washers to pretighten the arm assembly on the precision shaft.
10) Connect the cables.
11) Connect the cables of the motor and the optical coupler.
12) Refer to 7.6.1 ~ 7.6.3 to align the positions: mixer to reaction carousel and wash well. Tighten two
M3*10 hexagon socket cap screws to fix the arm assembly. Use two hardened powder screws (M3*6)
to install the arm cover.
Refer to 7.6.1 ~ 7.6.3 to align positions: Mixer Rotary to Cuvette and mixer rotary to wash well.

3.7 Cuvette Wash Station

The cuvette wash unit, located in the rear right of the whole unit, consists of the wash probes assembly and
wash probe drive assembly. It provides 4-phase auto wash for non-disposable reaction cuvettes so that they
can be used repeatedly without influencing the test effects. The first three phase wash probes inject wash
solution to wash the cuvettes and the fourth phase probe wipes the cuvettes.
Auto wash station
Auto wash desk

panel
Figure 3-39 Location of the cuvette wash assembly

Wash probes assembly

Knurled screw
BA48 Wash
Wash probes
Station optical
coupler PCBA
Wipe block
Wash probe
drive assembly
OPtical coupler
wire (S)
Figure 3-40 Cuvette wash assembly

1 115-045543-00 Wash probes assembly
2 051-001147-00 BA48 wash station
photocoupler PCBA
3 115-045542-01 Wash probe drive
assembly
4 009-002204-00 Photocoupler (S) Zero position
photocoupler
5 BA38-30-88154 Wash-phase probe
assembly
6 BA40-30-61934 Wipe-phase probe
assembly
7 041-001845-00 Wipe block
8 024-000908-00 Motor
9 041-031404-00 Wash probe drive For
conversion board maintenance of
analyzers
purchased
before EIT010
took effect only

10 041-031405-00 Support pole For

maintenance of
analyzers
purchased
before EIT010
took effect only
3.7.3 Replacing Wash Probes Assembly
When to do
Replace the wash probes when they are bent or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Wash probes assembly
Knurled screw
Wash support
plate
Figure 3-41 Wash probe

How to do
Remove the cover of the sample/reagent carousel and auto wash desk panel.
3) Unplug the cable connector of the BA48 wash station photocoupler.
4) Unplug the tubes and cables on the wash probes assembly, and manually loosen the knurled screw
to remove the wash probes assembly.
5) Install the new wash probes assembly, manually tighten the knurled screw, and restore the tubes and
cables according to their numbers.
Note:
Reinstall the tubes and cables on the wash probes assembly according to the number marking.
Check the wash probes' vertical position in reaction cuvettes according to 7.7.2 Cuvette Wash Station Height.
3.7.4 Replacing Wash Station
When to do

Replace the wash station photocoupler when it is damaged.

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 3-42 Wash station photocoupler

How to do
Remove the cover of the sample/reagent carousel and auto wash desk panel.
3) Unplug the cable connector of the wash station photocoupler.
4) Remove the M2.5*4 cross pan head screw to remove the anchor plate.
5) Remove the M2.5*4 cross pan head screw to remove the optical coupler of the wash station.
6) Replace it with new one and tighten the M2.5*4 cross pan head screw.
N/A
3.7.5 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Assembly
When to do
Replace the wash probe drive assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Knurled screw Wash probes assembly

screw with washer
Position
adjusting washer
Position adjusting
plate
Wash probe drive

assembly
115-045542-01
M4*12 hexagon
with washer
Support pole
041-031405-00
M4*12 hexagon
with washer
Wash probe drive

conversion panel
041-031404-00
Figure 3-43 Wash probe drive assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Loosen the knurled screw on the wash probes assembly with your hand and
cross pan head screws with washers on the desk panels to remove the reaction carousel desk panel
and auto wash desk panel. Loosen the three M4*8 cross pan head screws holding the right panel to
remove the right panel.
3) Unplug the connectors of the zero position photocoupler and the motor. Unscrew the four M4*12
hexagon socket screws with washers to remove the wash probe drive assembly (115-045542-01).
4) Mount a new wash probe drive assembly (115-045542-01) and fix it with four M4*12 hexagon socket
screws with washers. Plug back the connectors of the zero position photocoupler and the motor.
5) Restore the components according to the reversed order of Steps 1 and 2.
Check the wash probes' vertical and horizontal positions in reaction cuvettes according to 7.7.1 and 7.7.2 .
3.7.6 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Motor
When to do
When the wash probe drive motor is damaged
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Knurled screw Wash probes assembly

cap head screw with
washer
Position
adjusting washer
Position adjusting
plate
Wash probe drive

assembly
115-045542-01
M3*8 cross pan head

combination screw
M3*5 retaining screw
M3*8 cross pan

M4*12 hexagon head combination
socket cap head screw screw
with washer
Damper
pad
Support pole
Motor
Figure 3-44 Wash probe drive assembly

How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Loosen the knurled screw on the wash probes assembly with your hand to
cross pan head screws with washers on the desk panels to remove the reaction carousel desk panel
and auto wash desk panel. Loosen the three M4*8 cross pan head screws holding the right panel to
remove the right panel.
3) Unplug the connectors of the zero position photocoupler and the motor. Unscrew the four M4*12
hexagon socket screws and washers to remove the wash probe drive assembly (115-045542-01).
4) Unscrew the two M3*8 cross pan head screws holding the damper pad. Loosen the two M3*5 retaining
screws holding the screw rod to remove the motor and the damper pad. Then the two M3*8 cross pan
head screws holding the motor to remove it.
5) Fix the new motor and damper pad with two M3*8 cross pan head screws, and mount it onto the
wash motor bracket with two more M3*8 cross pan head screws. The motor axis must reach the bottom
of the lead screw hole. Apply a moderate amount of thread glue to tighten the two M3*5 retaining
screws, one of which is against the flat position on the motor axis. Make sure the outlet of the damper
pad and the motor is in the right direction so that the entire mechanism can move smoothly.
6) Restore the components according to the reversed order of Steps 1-3.


Check the wash probes' vertical and horizontal positions in reaction cuvettes according to 7.7.1 7.7.2 .
3.7.7 Replacing Zero Position Photocoupler
When to do
Replace the zero position photocoupler on the wash probe drive assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
M3*6 cross
pan head
screw
Zero position
photocoupler
Figure 3-45 Zero position photocoupler on the wash probe drive assembly
How to do
2) Open the shielding cover. Unscrew the screw on the wash probes assembly with your hand to remove
the wash probes assembly. Take caution not to collide the wash probes. Rotate the probe to the
aspirating reagent position and rotate the mixer to the wash well position. Unscrew all the M4*8 cross
pan head screw with washer on the desk panels to remove the reaction carousel desk panel, auto
wash desk panel.
3) Unplug the connector of the zero position photocoupler.
4) Remove the M3*6 cross pan head screw to remove the zero position optical coupler. Replace it with
new one and fix it with one M3*6 cross pan head screw.
N/A
3.8 Syringe Assembly
Syringe assembly consists of one sampling syringe and two wash syringes, of which 2.5ml syringe is used to
inject the wash solution and 10ml syringe is used to inject the cleaning fluid.


M4*8 cross
pan head
combination
screw
Syringe
M3*12
hexagon
socket cap
head screws
with spring
and flat
washer
2.5ml wash
syringe
M3*12hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and 10ml wash
flat washer syringe
Figure 3-46 Location of the syringe assemblies
1 115-045455-00 Probe syringe assembly
2 115-045444-00 2.5ml Wash syringe assembly
3 115-045917-00 10ml Wash syringe assembly
3.8.3 Replacing 2.5ml syringe and 10ml syringe
When to do
When the syringe functions abnormally.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
See Figure 3-46 Location of the syringe assemblies.
How to do
2) Remove the rear panel and unplug the tubes and cables. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the four
M3*12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washer. Remove the 2.5ml or 10ml wash
syringe.
3) Install the new wash syringe.
4) Connect the tubes and cables. Install back the rear panel.
3.8.4 Replacing probe syringe assembly
When to do
When the probe syringe functions abnormally.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1


See Figure 3-46 Location of the syringe assemblies.
How to do
2) Remove the shell assembly (see Figure 3-1 Shells assembly), unscrew the tubes from the syringe’s
T piece, and unplug the motor cables. Use the cross screw driver to remove the three M4*8 cross pan
head combination screws. Then remove the probe syringe.
3) Install the new probe syringe.
4) Reconnect the tubes to the syringe’s T piece and plug the motor cables. Install back the shell assembly.
5) Check the bubble state and the position of the probe syringe. See 9.3.2 for more information about
probe syringe replacement.
3.9 Photometer Unit
3.9.1 Functions and Parameters
The mature concave gratings light-splitting technology of Mindray's BS series is adopted, which can not only
simplify the optical design to compact the optical structure, but also eliminate the stray light. A combined light
passing through the entrance slit projects on the PDA (Photodiode Array) via the concave flat-field gratings.
One or multiple light-activated elements on different positions receive the monochromatic light at certain
wavelength. During operation, the photometric system controlled by the computer receives the electric signals
produced by the light-activated elements of corresponding wavelength and then converts them into absorbance.
In case the spectrum is defined, the absorbance at multiple wavelengths can be calculated quickly.
Table 3-9 Technical Parameters
Optical system reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings, with each
wavelength detected by a Photodiode array.
Wavelength 12 wavelengths, 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm, and 800nm
Wavelength accuracy ±2nm
Light source 12V/20W, tungsten-halogen lamp, transmitting light through fiber bundle
Minimum reaction volume 100μL
Absorbance range 0-3.5A, 10mm light pathlength
Cuvette Light pathlength of cuvette:5mm
Number of cuvettes: 80 cuvettes, 5mm*5mm*29.5mm
Cuvette material plastic
Table 3-10 Terms of Optics

AD value the value converted from photoelectric signal (voltage) through AD converter.
Water blank the AD value of a cuvette measured when the wash station dispenses water in phase 6.
Water blank is the base point for calculation absorbance, that is, the 0 point of
absorbance.
Cuvette blank means the water blank of phase 6 is less than the light intensity low limit. This alarm is
out of range used to monitor the energy level of the optical system to ensure normal signal-to-noise
ratio.
Cuvette blank means the relative change of continuous phase-6 water blanks for 10 cuvettes is greater
out of range than 3% comparing with the history data. This alarm is used to prevent light fluctuation
(10X) or erroneous result due to cuvette overflowing and to remind the operator of this
phenomenon.
3.9.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly

The instrument applies the holographic concave flat-field gratings and PDA for photometric measurement. See
the figure below. The front lens converges the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the reaction
cuvette via the fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the reaction cuvette and then converges at the

entrance slit via the lens group 2. The gratings divide the light beam from the entrance slit and then converge
them to the slit array. Finally the PDA behind the slit array converts the light signals into electric signals and
then outputs them.
PDA Slit array Filter

Lens cuvette
Optical
Lamp Lens
fibre
Grating
Slit
assembly
Figure 3-47 Photometer light path
Optical
measurement
assembly
Light source
assembly
Figure 3-48 Locations of light source assembly and optical measurement assembly
The optical measurement assembly consists of the light-splitting assembly and the pillars.
1 115-038466-00 20W lamp assembly(FRU)
2 801-BA40-00167-00 fiber bundle
3 115-045439-00 BA36 Cuvette (Surface
processed)
4 115-041267-00 Light-splitting assembly
(BA36)

5 115-041271-00 PDA assembly(BA36)

6 801-BA80-00136-00 Cable of lamp housing fan
3.9.3 Replacing Lamp
When to do
Replace the lamp when an alarm is triggered indicating that the lamp has insufficient intensity, or not turned on,
or has been used for over 2000 hours,or used more than 6 months,
or has cuvette blank out of range (10X).
Tools
N/A
Optical fibre
801-BA40-00167-00
Nut of Cable
terminal(Manually
tightened)
M3 socket set
screw
20W
Lamp(FRU)115- Retaining screw
038466-00
Figure 3-49 Exploded view of lamp and fiber bundle for installation
Note:
Replace the lamp according to the instructions on the screen.
Please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly) after turning off the lamp to avoid
injury.
Do not touch the bulb when installing the new lamp. In case of touching, please clean the bulb with
fibre cloth or ethanol-moistened gauze.
How to do
1) Select Utility > Maintenance > Maintenance > Biochemistry Maintenance.
2) Choose Replace Lamp. The maintenance guide window pops up. Select Continue.
3) Make sure that the lamp has cooled down for 5 minutes, and then select Continue.
4) Open the small door at the right panel.
5) Loosen the nuts on the cable terminals, and then remove the O-ring connectors from the terminals.
6) Loosen the retaining screw on the left side of the lamp.
7) Remove the lamp from the lamp housing.

CAUTION
Do not hold the lamp by its bulb to prevent contamination and damage.
8) Install the new lamp, and the retaining screw, O-ring connectors, cable terminal nuts and lamp cover plate
in the reversed order.
9) Select Done. Perform the Photometer Check procedure to ensure the system power is normal.
Refer to 7.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment to adjust the Photoelectric Gain.
3.9.4 Replacing Fiber Bundle
When to do
Replace the fiber bundle when it is broken or the light intensity is insufficient.
Tools
Hexagon wrench
How to do
1) Switch off the power supply of the whole unit.
2) Unscrew the screws on the right panel to remove it.
3) According to the figure above, use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 socket set screws with cup
point on the light source assembly and pull out the small end of the optical fibre.
4) Loosen the Light-splitting assembly from the pillars and push it about 50mm toward the rear panel.
5) Remove the M3 socket set screws with cup point used to fix the optical fibre bundle. Pull out the optical
fibre bundle.
6) Remove the optical fibre bundle from the heat insulation chamber of reaction carousel.
7) Replace the optical fibre bundle. Note: first insert the optical fibre bundle into the Light-splitting
assembly and then push the Light-splitting assembly forward to fix it on the three pillars.
Precautions:
1)Do not bend the fiber bundle too much (less than R60mm for the best) during removing. When leaving the
factory, the fiber bundle is fixed in the middle by a cable tie on the heat insulation chamber earthing wire. You
can also directly cutting off the cable tie and use a new one in the spare parts kit instead.
2)Protect the exposed optical part on the head of the fiber bundle from scratching and contamination.
3)There are washers on each post used to adjust the height of the optical axis. Keep them properly and do not
drop them while removing the optical assembly.

M3 socket
set screws
Adjusting
iber bundle801-
washer
BA40-00167-00
Figure 3-50 Exploded view of fiber bundle on optical measurement assembly for installation
Refer to 7.3.2 7.3.3 to adjust the photoelectric signal collecting position and photoelectric gain.
3.9.5 Replacing Light-splitting Assembly

When to do
Replace the light-splitting assembly when it is impaired in functioning or its performance cannot meet the
requirements.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and hexagon wrench
How to do
2) Remove the wash station.
3) Remove the right panel and rear panel.
4) Refer to Figure 3-50 Exploded view of fiber bundle on optical measurement assembly for installation
and use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 socket set screws with cup point on the light source
assembly.
5) Remove the desk panels of reaction carousel and wash station.
6) Remove the upper cover of he heat insulation chamber and remove the reaction carousel assembly.
7) Remove the stopper of the heat insulation chamber on the optical measurement assembly.
8) Loosen the three socket cap head screws on the optical measurement assembly to remove it.
9) Install the new optical measurement assembly following the above steps reversely. Note to avoid
bending the fiber bundle with bending radius less than 60mm.

M3*6 hexagon socket M5*10 hexagon socket

cap head screw cap head screw with
spring and flat washer
Light-splitting
assembly (BA36)
115-041267-00
Adjusting
washer
Pillar
Figure 3-51 Exploded view of optical measurement assembly for installation

Precautions:
1)Do not bend the fiber bundle too much (less than R60mm for the best) during removing. When leaving the
factory, the fiber bundle is fixed in the middle by a cable tie on the heat insulation chamber earthing wire. You
can also directly cutting off the cable tie and use a new one in the spare parts kit instead.
2)Protect the exposed optical part on the head of the fiber bundle from scratching and contamination.
3)There are washers on each post used to adjust the height of the optical axis. Keep them properly and do not
drop them while removing the optical assembly.
Refer to 7.3.2 7.3.3 to adjust the photoelectric signal collecting position and photoelectric gain.
3.9.6 Replacing Reaction Cuvette
When to do
Replacing cuvettes is performed as needed or as required. Replace a cuvette if,
 It is detected abnormal through the Cuvette Check procedure.
 It is overflowing.
 Scratches or cracks are found on the optical surface of the cuvette.
 Every three months
WARNING
While installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid scratching them. Do not touch the optical
surface of the reaction cuvettes. If the optical surface is polluted, the obtained absorbance may be inaccurate.
Wear gloves free of fibre and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes.
Biohazards
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process.
Tools

Cross screw driver, Fiber-free gloves, dry cloth or gauze, reaction cuvettes, and concentrated wash solution
manufactured by our company
How to do
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance.
2) Choose Replace Cuvette.
3) Open the cuvette replacement cover.
4) When Continue is clicked, the maintenance procedure starts.
5) Input the number of the cuvette segment on the popup window. The input range is 1~8.
6) Select Replace.
7) Push open the replacement window. Loosen the screw on the press plate with screw driver or your hand
and toggle the press plate to the right side. Take out the cuvettes.
8) Install new cuvettes and install back the press plate and tighten the screw.
If you want to replace multiple cuvette segments, you can turn off the power of the instrument and rotate
the reaction carousel with your hand to replace the cuvettes.
9) After the cuvettes are replaced, close the replacement window.
10) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-Biochemistry Maintenance and then select Cuvette Check. Check
the new cuvettes. Note: if Cuvette Check is not performed, the new cuvettes may not be used due to too
large water blank or alarm "Water blank out of range (10X)" may be given.
3.9.7 Photometer Lens Maintenance
When to do
The lens of the photometer is contaminated or the maintenance time is over 1 year.
Materials required
Lens cleaning paper, cotton swabs and ethanol
Note:
When moving the sample/reagent probe and mixer, do not bend or collide with them.
Do not leave the cotton tissue on the lens.
How to do
2) Loosen the nuts on the wash station, remove it and put in a clear box.
3) Remove the desk panels of reaction carousel and wash station.
4) Remove the upper cover of the heat insulation chamber and remove the reaction carousel assembly.
5) Use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to wipe the exposed lens of the front and rear lens assembly.
The location of the lens is indicated in the figure below.
Figure 3-52 Location of lens

6) Restore the analyzer.
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance -> Cuvette Check. If the dirty
cuvettes are found, replace them. If Cuvette Check is not performed, water blank may become large after the
lens are wiped, which may trigger the alarm "Water blank out of range (10X)".
3.10 ISE Unit (Optional)
The ISE module is an optional module for the fully-automated chemistry analyzer and designed to measure the

concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and diluted urine. The sample volume for measurement is:
70µl for serum and plasma, 140µl for urine diluted at the ratio of 1:9 (1 for urine and 9 for diluent).
Work principle
The ISE Module measures sodium, potassium, lithium and chloride in biological fluids,
using ion selective electrode technology. The flow-through of each electrode uses selective membrane
tubing, specially formulated to be sensitive to corresponding ions. The potential of each electrode is
Measured relative to a fixed, stable voltage established by the double-junction silver/silver chloride
Reference electrode. an ion selective electrode develops a voltage that varies with the concentration
of the ion to which it responds.
The relationship between the voltage and the concentration can be expressed by Nernst equation
ENa ERef
ENa  ERe f  S log  Na
Na
Ref
Two-points Calibration
→factor S
Figure 3-53 ISE Work principle
Calibrator Calibrator
B A
Pump Pump Pump ISE
Waste tank B A W
Figure 3-54 Fluidic system of ISE Unit

Two-points calibration
1) Adding Calibrant A
2) Locating
3) Draining
4) Adding Calibrant B
5) Locating
6) Draining
One-point Calibration（serum sample test）
1) Adding serum sample
2) Locating
3) Draining
4) Adding Calibrant A
5) Locating
6) Draining

Parameters
Table 3-12 ISE Parameters
Item Features
Sample Serum,Plasma,Urine
Sample volume Serum, plasma 70uL, diluted urine 140uL
(10-fold dilution)
Method Direct method
Time 35s/cycle
Speed 100Test/hour
Power 24VDC ，1A
Communication RS232C
Maximum ambient 32℃
temperature
composition
ISE module
There are five kinds of electrodes with Na+, K+, Cl-, reference and spacer electrodes. The sample is added by
the addition port of the ISE module, and the sample is analyzed and measured.
Spacer

Figure 3-55 ISE module

Peristaltic pump
–Pump W:Draining the wasted liquid, and locating the liquid in the tubing
–Pump A：Controlling adding calibrator A.
–Pump B：Controlling adding calibrator B.
Reagent module
The reagent module integrates calibrator A, calibrator B, waste container, and a chip used for monitoring reagent
inventory. It provides reagent for sample analysis and stores the liquid waste herein.Calibrant A:Two point and
single-point calibration，Pump calibration，Bubble calibration, Washing after each test
–Calibrant A: Two point and single-point calibration，Pump calibration，Bubble calibration,
Washing after each test.
–Calibrant B:Two point and single-point calibration for urine sample.
–waste container,：storage waste.
Figure 3-56 Peristaltic pump and Reagent module

Auxiliary reagent
–Cleaning solution:It is used once every 50 samples to prevent protein buildup 100uL of
cleaning solution will be used.
–Urine Diluent: It is used for urine samples. Urine samples must be diluted to perform
urine measurement: 1 part urine specimen to 9 parts Urine Diluent
Urine diluent
Cleaning solution

Figure 3-57 Cleaning solution and Urine diluent
3.10.2 Structure and FRU List
SP3.5*8 screw
ISE shielding box
ISE module
ISE shield
M4*8 screw
Figure 3-58 Exploded view for installation of ISE module
Pump bracket
Pump
M2.5*6 screw
M2.5*6 screw
Figure 3-59 Exploded view for installation of pump module

Figure 3-60 Exploded view for installation of reagent module

1 115-004626-00 K electrode
2 115-004627-00 Na electrode
3 115-004630-00 Cl electrode
4 115-004625-00 Reference electrode
5 115-004628-00 Spacer
6 BA34-10-63657 Main control board of the ISE
module
7 BA34-10-63659 Pre-amplification board of the ISE
module
8 BA34-10-63658 Compression plate
9 801-BA34-00104-00 ISE module bubble detector
10 801-BA34-00103-00 Sample tube of ISE module
11 BA34-10-63663 O ring of ISE module(3)
12 BA34-10-63668 O ring of ISE electrode
13 082-000684-00 Peristaltic Pump
14 801-BA34-00105-00 The peristaltic pump tube(3 pcs)
15 BA34-10-63666 ISE waste tube connector
16 BA34-10-63667 Tube connector of ISE (4)
17 801-BA34-00106-00 ISE module plastic tube for A ,B and
W liquid
18 BA34-10-63812 ISE module wand
3.10.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes
When to do
If the sample contains insoluble substances like fibrin or other substances, they can be accumulated in the
waste tube after long time use, causing clogging of the waste tube.
Maintenance Tools
Name Code Quantity
Unclogging tool for ISE 115-023372-00 1
WARNING
Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause equipment damage.

Biohazards
Note
Excessive bleach and DI water flushed into the ISE reagent pack waste bag may cause waste bag over
expansion and clog the Cal A & Cal B reagent flow.
To prevent this problem, connect to an old used-up reagent pack or use the connector of the used-up reagent.
How to do
1) Ensure the analyzer is in idle (standby) status. Open the ISE window on the right side panel of
the analyzer.
2) Ensure the analyzer is in idle (standby) status. Open the ISE window on the right side panel of
the analyzer.
3) Connect the waste tube fitting to a syringe and unclogging tool with 5mL of undiluted household
bleach.
4) Press the wand release button to remove the wand from the current in use ISE reagent pack and
keep it in a save place. Engage the wand to an old used-up reagent pack.
5) Inject bleach into the ISE waste tube and soak the tube for 5 minutes. Discharge the waste into
the reagent pack.
Note: When the bleach cannot be injected into the ISE pack, remove the wand and push down to open the
waste valve manually with a sharp object, and then inject again. If bleach can go through this time, the waste
bag was clogged and cannot be used. If bleach still cannot be injected, replacing the ISE wand is recommended.
6) Repeat this step with 5mL of DI water without the 5 minutes of soaking time.
7) Remove the wand from the old use-up pack and re-install it back to the current in use ISE pack.
Re-install the waste tube fitting back to the ISE electrode housing right angle adapter and waste
peri-pump tube back to the pump bracket. Re-install the housing cover.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully unclogged.
3.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube
When to do
Replace the pump tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for a half year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, pump tube.
Precautions:
Biohazards
How to do
1) Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right side analyzer
panel.
2) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-ISE-Remove Reagent Pack.
3) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube.
4) Select Pump Tube.
5) Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly connected; otherwise
ISE module failure may occur.
6) Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7) Install back the right side panel.
8) Record the maintenance log.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
3.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube
When to do
Replace the calibrator tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for over one year.
Maintenance Tools

Cross screwdriver, calibrator tube

Precautions:
Biohazards
How to do
1) Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right side analyzer
panel.
2) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-ISE-Remove Reagent Pack.
3) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube.
4) Select Calibrator Tube.
5) Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly connected; otherwise
ISE module failure may occur.
6) Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7) Install back the right side panel.
8) Record the maintenance log.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
3.10.6 Replacing ISE electrode
ISE electrodes are consumables and have a limited life span. When used for a long period or after measuring
a large number of samples, the ISE electrodes may have their performance degraded and should be replaced
immediately.
Purpose
To replace the ISE electrodes to ensure the optimal measurement performance.
When to do
 Reference electrode: Every 6 months
Other electrodes:
When 10,000 ISE tests are performed.
When the ISE electrodes are used for 6 months since installation.
 When calibration fails or quality control is abnormal as the result of degraded electrode performance.
Materials required
Reference electrode, ISE electrode
System status
Make sure that the status of the ISE module is Standby or Stopped
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
 Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles.
NOTE
 After performing this procedure, recalibrate the ISE electrodes prior to starting analysis.
How to do
1) To remove the electrodes
a) Select Utility > Maintenance > Maintenance > ISE Maintenance.
b) Choose Replace Electrode.
c) Select desired electrodes, and enter the lot number and expiration date.
d) Select Add and then select OK.
e) Select Continue.
f) Open the ISE side door and remove the cover of the shielding box.
g) Open the electrode case, take out the electrode, remove the tapes around its inside, and then
use clean tissue to wipe it.

NOTE
 Take out the insert from the reference electrode, and ensure no crystallized salt exists in and around it. If
needed, clean the electrode with warm water.
 Make sure the red ball of the reference electrode floats on the internal fluid. Make sure the O rings of all
electrodes remain intact.
h) Remove all electrodes from the ISE module.
2) To install the new electrodes
a) To install a new reference electrode:
Place the reference electrode at the bottom of the ISE module and make the rear part of the electrode contact
closely with the internal wall of the ISE module.
Loosen the compressor and ensure the electrodes are fixed tightly.
b) Install other electrodes in the order of Cl, K, Na, and spacer from bottom to top.
c) If the O ring is lost, install a new one. There are two more O rings in each electrode case.
d) Check if the electrode positions are correct:
 The Na, K and Cl electrodes are of the same size and shape. Ensure that the electrodes are inserted in
the correct order.
 If one of the electrodes cannot be easily pushed into the housing, check the electrode first and then repeat
the installation process.
 Check if the 5 electrodes are relatively on the same straight line; otherwise, liquid cannot flow through the
electrode tubes smoothly.
e) Select Continue. The system primes the tubes with calibrators A and B.
f) Select Done.
g) Restore the cover of the shielding box and close the side door of the ISE module.
h) Run ISE calibration.
i) If the calibration fails, perform the following operations:
 Run ISE calibration for multiple times so that the electrodes can get steady quickly.
 Or, drip little serum sample in the electrode channel, and leave it for 10-30 minutes, and then run calibration
again.
NOTE
 The new electrode can be calibrated successfully only after certain time period.
3.10.7 Removing reagent pack(ISE)

When powering off the analyzer for a long time, or storing the electrodes, or replacing the electrode tubes,
remove the reagent pack first.
When to do
Perform this maintenance procedure when powering off the analyzer for a long time (over 3 days), or storing
the electrodes, or replacing the electrode tubes
System status
How to do
1) Select Utility > Maintenance > ISE Maintenance, and choose Remove Reagent Pack.
2) Remove the tube of pump A and then reinstall the tube by switching the connectors of
the tube.
3) Handle pump B in the same way.
4) Select Continue. The system executes purge A and B each for 30 times.
5) Restore the reversed pump tubes.
6) Install the three red caps on the tube connectors of the reagent pack, and keep the
reagent pack at room temperature away from sunshine.
7) Select Done.
3.10.8 Storing electrodes(ISE)
Before the analyzer is powered off for a long time or after the reagent pack is removed, the ISE electrodes
cannot be moistened by regular prime, and may be damaged due to lack of water. It is necessary to store the

electrodes properly before powering off the analyzer for a long period.
Purpose
To store the electrodes separately to prevent them from being damaged due to lack of water while the analyzer
is powered off.
Materials required
Electrode cases and tapes
When to do
Perform this procedure when the analyzer is going to be powered off for over 3 days. If it will be powered off for
no more than 3 days, prime the ISE electrodes to protect them from being damaged.
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process
note
Make sure that the storage temperature is below 40℃.
How to do
1) Remove the reagent pack,see 3.10.7 Removing reagent pack(ISE).
2) Open the ISE side door and remove the cover of the shielding box.
3) Remove all electrodes from the ISE module.
4) To save the reference electrode:
a) Put back the insert to the cell of the reference electrode and prevent the crystallized salt
from clogging the cell.
b) Store the electrode in an electrode case at the room temperature in a sun-shielding place.
5) To save the Na, K and Cl electrodes:
a) Take out a little calibrator A from the reagent pack, inject it into the cell of the electrode and
seal it with tape. Make sure proper amount of calibrator is injected into the cell of the
electrode.
b) Store the capped electrodes in an electrode case at the room temperature in a sun-shielding
place.
6) Restore the cover of the shielding box and close the side door of the ISE module.
3.10.9 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack
Reagent pack as one part of the ISE module should be installed as instructed by this manual. You should
install reagent pack while the analyzer is powered off, and then check the reagent inventory and prime the ISE
module with Calibrator A and B. If the reagent pack is not properly installed, error may be produced in inventory
calculation, and the actual volume may differ from that displayed on the screen.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack
less than the displayed one.
1) When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE module is in failure status, the reagent pack is changed, without
recovering the module failure or checking the inventory immediately.
Operation explanation: When the ISE module is in Stopped status, the software will stop writing volume
information into the reagent pack chip. However, the analyzer will automatically execute the sip action of the
ISE module during startup to consume certain amount of reagent. Therefore, when the reagent pack is replaced,
but the ISE module is not restored or the screen display refreshed, the software will not calculate the reagent
consumption volume until reading the new reagent pack. At this moment, the actual reagent volume =
displayed volume - consumption of Sip after replacing the reagent pack, which means that the actual reagent
volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.
2) When the analyzer is powered on but the software is closed or the computer is shut down, the reagent
pack is changed.
Operation explanation: During shutdown, the analyzer will automatically execute the sip action of the ISE
module to consume certain amount of reagent. When the analyzer is started up, the software will detect a new
reagent pack and zero the consumption that is not written into the reagent pack chip, and then display the

volume read from the reagent pack chip. At this moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume -
consumption of Sip after replacing the reagent pack, which means that the actual reagent volume is less than
the displayed volume on the screen.
pack is switched to another analyzer and then installed back after use.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the reagent pack is normal.
If the reagent pack is installed on the current instrument after being used on another one, the analyzer, when
started up, will detect that the recorded reagent volume on the chip is less than the original one, and the software
will zero the reagent consumption of Sip during shutdown and display the read volume on the screen. At this
moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume - consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent
pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.
1) The ISE module is de-configured, but the reagent pack is still on the instrument.
Operation explanation: Though the ISE module is de-configured, the original reagent pack information is not
cleared from the database. When the ISE module is configured again with the same reagent pack, the Sip
period without ISE module will be included in calculation of the reagent consumption.
Note:
 In condition 1, restore the ISE module and check the reagent inventory immediately to minimize or eliminate
the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer, remove the reagent
pack and then run the operating software. After the startup procedure is complete, re-install the reagent
pack and inquire the reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 4, remove the reagent pack and then de-configure the ISE module.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack
more than the displayed one.
1) When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE reagent pack is changed, without checking the inventory
immediately.
Operation explanation: The analyzer will automatically refresh the ISE reagent consumption, by subtracting
the consumption of calibrator A or B from the known volume (of the original reagent pack) and writing it into the
reagent pack chip, when calibrator A or B is consumed for 1%. The written volume is based on the original
reagent pack before replacement, and the volume of a used reagent pack is often less than that of a new one.
So the volume recorded on the chip of the new reagent pack is less than the actual volume, and the actual
volume is greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
pack is removed for storage, and re-installed before the operating software is run.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the reagent pack is normal.
If the reagent pack is loaded before the analyzer is started up, the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the
reagent volume recorded on the chip is same as that recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by
mistake the reagent consumption of sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed.) Therefore, after
calculating the reagent consumption, the software will write the new volume information onto the chip and
display it on the screen. At this moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip
during shutdown (with reagent pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is greater than the
displayed volume on the screen.
3) The analyzer is powered off after the operating software is closed, and it is powered on again before the
operating software is run.
Operation explanation: When closed normally, the operating software cannot detect if the ISE module is
working. When powered on before the software is run, the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the reagent
volume recorded on the chip is same as that recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by mistake
the reagent consumption of sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed because the ISE module is
not working while the analyzer is powered off.) Therefore, after calculating the reagent consumption, the
software will write the new volume information onto the chip and display it on the screen. At this moment, the
actual reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent pack installed),
which means that the actual reagent volume is greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
Note:
 In condition 1, inquire the ISE reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer, remove the reagent
pack and then run the operating software. After the startup procedure is complete, re-install the reagent
pack and inquire the reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.

4 Hardware Circuits
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functions of the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs) used on theBS-360E.
4.2 Harzards
Note:
While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your hands or other objects.
Before removing a circuit board, disconnect the instrument from the (AC) power supply. Please wear a pair of
anti-static gloves or take other measures to prevent static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.
4.3 Summary of PCBAs

The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the BS-360E Chemistry Analyzer and briefly
describes their functions.
Table 4-1 Summary of PCBAs
PCBA（PCB） Functions ID
Main board The main control board is the control center #1
115-048858- of the instrument. It is mainly used to fulfill
Main board(open system) the following tasks: 1) communicating with a
00
computer through the RS232 serial port to
115-048859- Main board(Close System 3 transmit data and instructions; 2)
00 User-defined) communicating with the smart modules,
including the ISE module, through the
115-048860- Main board(Close System 5 extended serial ports to transmit data and
00 User-defined) instructions; and 3) controlling digital
115-048861- Main board(Close System 0 potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric
00 User-defined) data collection of the AD collection board
and receiving the photoelectric data.
Power driver board The power drive board drives and controls #2
051-002896-00 the sample/reagent probe, mixer,
sample/reagent carousel, reaction carousel,
wash station and wash syringe and other
related components.
Integration Liquid Detecting Board The board detects the level of samples and #3
051-002479-00 reagents, and detect/convert the signals of
the vertical obstruct detection sensor.
Pre-amplifying AD board The pre-amplification board functions the #4
optics-electricity and AD conversions of the
signals of the discrete photodiode array. At
the same time TTL serial port is provided to
communicate with main control board.
DC/DC board It is used to convert the 12V power supply #5
051-002900-00 of the whole unit, outputting the A12V, A5V
digital, D12V/E12V analog, C12V power,
B24V power, and the B12V power for partial
coolers.
AC Driver Board It drives the reaction carousel, AC heater of ＃6
051-002872-00 the wash solution and cleaning fluid.
Sample Probe Clogging Detection Board It detects the clog and empty aspiration of #7
801-BA40-00016-00 the probe.
ISE power PCBA It is used for powering the ISE module. #8
The locations of the PCBA on the instrument.

Sample Probe Clogging

Detection Board DC-DC board
Power driver
board
AC Driver
Board
ISE power
PCBA
Main board
Figure 4-1 Locations of the PCBA on the instrument 1
Integration
Liquid Detecting
Board
Power supply
assembly
Pre-amplifying AD
board
Figure 4-2 Locations of the PCBA on the instrument 2
4.4 Functions of PCBA

4.4.1 Control Structure
The BS-360E Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit (computer), and
output unit (printer).
The analyzing unit (analyzer) is composed of the temperature control system, reaction system (including ISE
module), photometric system, sample/reagent handling system, mixer system, and cuvette wash station.
The control diagram is as follows:

Optical System
Photoelectric signal
Control signal
Temperature
control signal
Temperature control
PC RS232 Hardware System
system
Control signal
Control signal
Position signal
Drive and execute

system
Figure 4-3 General functions

The hardware system has the following functions:
 Communicating with a computer through the serial port, and receiving/sending commands, responses, and
data.
 Controlling data collection of the photometric system.
 Controlling movement and status signal collection of execution units.
 Controlling working and temperature control signal collection of the temperature control system.
4.4.2 Main Board
Functions and Principles
 Communicating with computer through the serial port to transmit data and instructions and update its
application program.
 Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the extended serial ports to
transmit data and instructions.
 Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection of the AD collection board
and receiving the photoelectric data.
 Detecting position signal and horizontal obstruct signal.
 Detecting level sense signal and vertical obstruct signal through the interface for the level sense board.
The figure below shows the relation between the main board and other PCBAs.
AC Drive
Board
Power supply
AC /DC terminal
DC/DC Power
Power supply
module
Power drive
Main board
board
Pre-amplifying
AD board
Figure 4-4 Relation between main board and other PCBAs

The functional diagram of the control board is as shown below.

Bus Drive clock/direction signal

Injection unit
TTL Serial
Port Probe wash pump valve signal
Location sensor
Bus
Drive clock/direction signal
Level floater Mixer Unit
TTL Serial
Wash pump valve signal
Port
Bus
Reaction Unit Drive clock/direction signal
PC TTL Serial
Port
FPGA Drive clock/direction signal
Bus
Cuvette Wash Unit
TTL Serial
Wash pump valve signal
Port
Bus Reaction carousel heater control signal

Temperature
Control signal of deionized water heater
TTL Serial
Control Unit
Control signal of wash solution heater
Port
Bus Main Control Unit
Main Board
Figure 4-5 Functional diagram of main board
Description
PCB
The PCB layout of the main board is as shown below.

Figure 4-6 Main board PCB

Connectors
The main board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J2): 6-pin, providing +12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Value
1 +5V 4.75~5.25V
2 GND /
3 / /
4 / /
5 12V 11.4~-12.6V
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:
 Serial port (J7) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
 Drive signal interface (J1):40 PIN, TTL used to transmit control signal to power drive board.
 Clog detection signal interface (J3):12 PIN, TTL used to transmit the control and communication signal to
probe clog detection board.
 Refrigeration unit communication interface (J4) on the power drive board: 12 PIN, TTL used to transmit
control and communication signal to the Refrigeration unit of the power drive board.

 Connector (J39) for Pre-amplifying AD board: DB25, used for communication with the AD collection board
and providing power supply for it.
 Connector (J6) for ISE module: 8-pin, RS232, used for communication with the ISE module.
 Connector (J5) for bar code reader: 8-pin, RS232, used for communication with the bar code reader.
 Connector for optical coupler (J12):36 PIN, used for the input of the sensors of moving parts.
 Connector for optical coupler (J13):36 PIN, used for the input of the sensors of moving parts.
 Connector for optical coupler (J14):10 PIN, used for the input of the liquid floater sensor.
 Connector of temperature sensor (J18):4PIN, used for the input of temperature sensor of the reaction
carousel.
 Connector of temperature sensor (J21):4PIN, used for the input of temperature sensor of cleaning fluid.
 Connector of temperature sensor (J22):4PIN, used for the input of temperature sensor of wash solution.
 Connector of temperature sensor (J23):4PIN, used for the input of temperature sensor of reagent
preheating.
 Connector of the liquid level detection board (J11):4PIN, used for the signal input of liquid level detection
board and anti-collision signal.
Connectors for debugging:
 JTAG connector (J8): 10-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Indicators
The main board contains the following indicators.
 +12V power supply (D8): green It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating that the
+12V power supply has been connected.
 +5V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating that
the +5V power supply has been connected.
 +3.3V power (D9): green It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating that the +3.3V
power supply has been connected.
 D19: orange FPGA configuration indicator. On indicates FPGA is successfully configured.
 D14: Green FPGA working status indicator. LED is flashing every second, indicating FPGA works
normally.
 D23: green When communication with the lower layer unit is interrupted, the indicator is lit.
Test points
In the following positions of the main board can signal tests be performed.
 12V: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
 5V: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 4.75 - 5.25V.
 VDD: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major digital circuits of the PCBA.
Normal range:2.97~3.63V
 2.5V:+2.5V power supply.It is secondary power supply used to download the FPGA.Normal
range:2.25~2.75V
 1.2V: +1.2V power supply.It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA core.Normal
range:1.14~1.26V
Installation Methods and Precautions

Steps:
1) Before replacing, you need to confirm the closed channel configuration of the current main board of
the instrument.
2) Before replacing the main board, you need to back up the unit parameters in advance. Refer to 6.7.3
Unit parameter Backup.
3) Power off,and remove the back cover.
4) Disconnect all the connectors on the main board (it is recommended to take pictures before
disconnecting to avoid subsequent wiring errors)
5) Replace the new main board and connect all the connectors.
6) Need to brush the control system software after replacement, refer to 6.4.3 Upgrading Control System.
7) After brushing the control system software, you need to confirm the parameters. If there is any change,
you need to configure the parameters according to Section 6.7.4 Parameter Configuration.
Note
 Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of anti-static
gloves or wrist straps.

 Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
 Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly.
 Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
 It requires great force to plug/unplug the J1,J12~J13 connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
 After connecting J39 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.
 Save the parameters before removing the PCBA in order to load the parameters after the PCBA is removed.
4.4.3 Power driver board

 It is used to control the step motor, DC motor and Valve.
 It receives the signal from the main control board through the connector for the control board.
 It control and drive the wash station, syringe, sample/reagent carousel, sample/reagent probe, mixer,
reaction carousel valve.
The functional diagram of the power drive board is as shown below.
The PCB layout of the power drive board is as shown below.

Power drive board

Bus Drive clock/direction signal
Sampling unit
TTLserial Probe washing pump/valve signal Probe vertical motor
Location port
Probe horizontal motor
sensor
Probe syringe motor
Bus
Liquid level Pump/valve signal Motor
floater Mixer unit
TTLserial Mixer control signal drive
port MCU_1 DRV8188
Bus
Reaction unit Drive clock/direction signal
PC TTLserial Wash syringe motor
port
Bus
Auto wash unit
FPGA TTLserial Wash pump/valve signal
Pump/valve Pump/valve
port drive
DC motor
mixer
drive
Rgt
Bus
Heater control signal preheating heater
Temperature drive
TTLserial control unit TTLserial port
port NTC（Reagent
Refrigeration
MCU_2 sensor）
Bus Main control unit MOSFET

Current of the cooler
Cooler
MOSFET Cooler
MOSFET Cooler
Main board
Figure 4-7 Power drive board

Figure 4-8 Power drive board PCB

Connectors:
The power drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J17): 8-pin, providing 24V, 12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
1 +24V 23.5~26V
2 +24V 23.5~26V
3 +5V 4.75~5.25V
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
5 GND /
6 GND /
7 GND /
8 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:
 Connector for the control signals of main control board (J20):40PIN, TTL used to transmit the control signal.
 Communication connector (J34) for the communication between the reagent refrigeration and main control
board.
Connectors for drive and control:
 Connector for pump/valve drive (J6):8 PIN, used to drive sample/reagent probe interior pump and valve,
exterior wash valve and phase 2 and 3 aspirating pump.
 Connector for pump/valve drive (J9):8 PIN, used to drive phase 1 and 4 waste pump, cleaning fluid injection
valve and mixer exterior valve.
 Connector for pump/valve drive (J28):20 PIN, used to drive SV01 inlet valve, SV06 wash solution injection
valve and SV07 injection valve.
 Reaction carousel motor drive connector (J15):4PIN used to drive reaction carousel motor.
 Sample/Reagent carousel motor drive connector (J25): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent carousel
motor.
 Sample/Reagent horizontal motor connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent horizontal
motor.
 Sample/Reagent vertical motor connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent vertical motor.
 Sample/reagent syringe motor drive connector (J8): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent syringe
motor.
 Cleaning fluid syringe motor drive connector (J7): 4-pin, used for driving the cleaning fluid syringe motor.
 Wash solution syringe motor drive connector (J12): 4-pin, used for driving the wash solution syringe motor.
 Wash station motor drive connector (J4): 4-pin, used for driving the wash station motor.
 Sample/reagent mixer horizontal motor connector (J10): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent
horizontal motor.
 Sample/reagent mixer vertical motor connector (J14): 4-pin, used for driving the sample/reagent vertical
motor.
 Mixer motor drive connector (J22): 2-pin, used for driving mixer motor.
 Reagent preheating drive connector (J24): 2-pin, used for driving the reagent heater.
Indicators
The power drive board contains the following indicators.
 +12V power supply indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating
that the +12V power supply has been connected.
 +3.3V power supply indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating
that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.
 Refrigeration 5V power (D55): green it is lit when system power switch is turned on, indicating that the 5V
power supply has been connected.
 Refrigeration 3.3V power (D54): green It is lit when system power switch is turned on, indicating that the
3.3V power supply has been connected.
 Refrigeration unit working indicator (D62): yellow. When the power of the whole unit is turned on, the
indicator flashes indicating refrigeration unit functions normally.
 Indicator (D63) when reagent compartment temperature is higher than the target range: red. When the
reagent compartment temperature is higher than the target range.
 Indicator (D65) when reagent compartment temperature is within the target range: green. When the

reagent compartment temperature is within the target range.

 Indicator (D64) when reagent compartment temperature is lower than the target range: yellow. When the
reagent compartment temperature is lower than the target range.
 Cooler 1 working indicator (D56): green. When cooler 1 starts working.
Test points
In the following positions of the power drive board can signal tests be performed?
 VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range:11.4~12.6V
 VBB: 24V power supply input. Normal range:23.5~26V
 VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range:4.75~5.25V
 RR5V: Refrigeration 5V power. Normal range:4.75~5.25V
Note
 It requires great force to plug/unplug the J20 and J17 connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
4.4.4 Pre-amplifying AD board

 Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.
 Adjusting gains of 12 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.
 Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 12 channel signals at different time.
 Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter and then outputting the
signals.
The figure below shows the relation between the pre-amplification AD board and other PCBAs.
Pre-amplifying
AD board
Main board
The functional diagram of the pre-amplification AD board is as shown below.
Gain adjustment of single

analog signal
Main board
ADC
Description
PCB
The PCB layout of the pre-amplification AD board is as shown below.


D3
J3
J2
Figure 4-9 PCB Preamplifying AD PCB

Connectors
The pre-amplification AD board includes the following connectors.
Power and communication connector (J3):9 PIN, used to provide +12V power for pre-amplification AD board
and communication with the main control board.
1 +12V 11.4~12.6V
2 GND /
3 TXD /
4 RXD /
5 RST 4.5～5.5V


6 GND /
7 BUSY /
8 TRIG /
9 ISP 4.5～5.5V
Indicators
The pre-amplification AD board contains the following indicators.
 PCB working indicator (D3): orange It is lit when the PCB works normally.
Note
 It requires great force to plug/unplug J1 connector. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging
the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
 After connecting P1 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.
Since encapsulated inside the Optical measurement assembly, the preamplifier AD board should be maintained
together with the Optical measurement assembly rather than maintained independently.
4.4.5 Integration Liquid Detecting Board
 Detecting the reagent and sample levels capable of detecting the fluid level steadily and reliably, especially
allowing the probe to correctly detect the fluid level inside reaction cuvettes.
 Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board when the probe contacts the fluid level.
 Capable of detecting obstruct in vertical direction and outputting the signal to the main control board.
The functional diagram of the level sense board is as shown below.
Vertical
collision
circuit
Dual
tube Capacity Connect
probe Main
detection CPU or
Board
chip circuit
Figure 4-10 Functional diagram of level sense board

Description
PCB
The top layer of the level sense board is as shown below.

Figure 4-11 Level detection board PCB

Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the sample/reagent probe with related circuit.
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitor signal input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply for the level sense board
and output the level sense signal and vertical obstruction signal.
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruction obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
signal output when vertical obstruction happens.
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal output detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output
when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
Serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between the level sense board
and the control drive board.
Pin No. Signal
1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
 Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and vice
versa.
 Vertical obstruction indicator (D1): red. It is extinguished when no vertical obstruction occurs, and vice
versa.
 Level detection system working indicator (D2): yellow. When level detection system works normally, it is
flashing. If strong obstruction signal is detected, the indicator is constantly lit.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
 LEVEL: level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails
to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output when the probe detects the fluid level.
 GND: grounding terminal of the level sense board.
 5V:5V power for the level detection board. Normal range: 4.75~5.25V.
 3.3V:3.3V power for the level detection board. Normal range: 2.97~3.63V.

 RAM: vertical obstruction signal output. Normal condition: High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when vertical obstruction happens.
Note
 Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.
 It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging
4.4.6 AC Drive Board

 It receives the control signal from the main control board for the heater.
 The control signals drive SSR(solid state relay) to open or close in order to drive the reaction carousel and
AC heaters of cleaning fluid and wash solution.
The functional diagram of the AC drive board is as shown below.
Control signal Reaction carousel

SSR
heater
Control signal
SSR Cleaning fluid heater
Control signal SSR Wash solution heater
AC drive board
Figure 4-12 Functional diagram of AC drive board

Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the AC drive board is as shown below.

Figure 4-13 PCB layout of AC drive board

Connectors
The AC drive board contains the following connectors.
AC input connector (J1):3 PIN, used for the AC input of 220V
Pin No. Signal
1 L
2 NC
3 N
Control signal input connector of the AC drive board (J2):8 PIN, used for the control signal input of AC drive
board.
1 VCC 4.5~5.5V
2 NC /
3 NC /
4 Input of control signal of wash solution Turn on when input is
heater 0.
5 Input of control signal of upper and Turn on when input is
lower heaters of reaction carousel. 0.
6 Input of control signal of cleaning fluid Turn on when input is
heater 0.
7 / /
8 / /
Drive output connector of upper and lower heaters of reaction carousel (J6):2 PIN used for the signal output of
AC drive board.
Pin No. Signal
1 L
2 N
Drive output connector of lower heater of reaction carousel on the AC drive board (J9):2 PIN used for the signal
output of AC drive board.

Pin No. Signal

1 L
2 N
Drive output connector of wash solution heater on the AC drive board (J7):2 PIN used for the signal output of
AC drive board.
Pin No. Signal
1 L
2 N
Drive output connector of cleaning fluid heater on the AC drive board (J5):2 PIN used for the signal output of
AC drive board.
Pin No. Signal
1 L
2 N
Indicators
The AC drive board contains the following indicators.
 Working indicator of cleaning fluid heater (D2): green. It is lit when cleaning fluid heater is turned on.
 Working indicator of reaction carousel heater (D4): green. It is lit when reaction carousel heater is turned
on.
 Working indicator of wash solution heater (D5): green. It is lit when wash solution heater is turned on.
Note
 Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.
 It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging
4.4.7 Clog Detection Board(Optional)

 Collecting pressure by connecting with the pressure sensor.
 Checking for clogs and empty aspirate under the control of the sample control drive board.
 Sending debugging information to the debugging computer.
The figure below shows the location of the clog detection board in the hardware system.
Probe clog
Sensor Main board
detection board
PC(for debugging
only)
The circuit diagram of the clog detection board is as shown below.

Probe clog detection

Constant board Power supply
current drive
IO Main board
Compensation Single Serial port
Differential Differential Secondary ADC and
Sensor and primary analog
analog signal analog amplification MCU
amplification signal Serial port
signal PC
Description
PCB layout
Figure 4-14 PCB layout of Clog Detection Board

Connectors
Pressure sensor connector (J1): connected with the pressure sensor.
Pin No. Description Test Methods
1 Positive end input of pressure sensor /
2 Positive end of power supply /
4 Negative end input of pressure sensor /
5 Gain adjustment resistance /
6 Gain adjustment resistance

Clog detection board control connector (J2): connected with the main board and used for communicating control
signals during clog detection process.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when
the PCBA is working normally.
3 Confirmed clog signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
when no clog signal is detected.
6 Interruption control signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
when the system status is Standby.
7 Interruption enable signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
8 Ground /
Clog detection board communication connector (J3): connected with the main board and used for serial port
communication between the clog detection board and the sample probe unit.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when
the PCBA is working normally.
3 Serial port input signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
4 Serial port output signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
5 Online-downloading The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
enable signal when the system status is Standby.
6 Reset signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
7 Ground /
8 Ground /
Clog detection board debugging connector (J4): connected with the serial port of a computer and used for
debugging the clog detection system. This connector is temporarily not used.
1 +12V power supply /
2 -12V power supply (reserved) /
3 Serial port input signal /
4 Serial port output signal /
5 Ground /
Switches and jumpers

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that the MCU is downloading
something. The jumper must be disconnected when the PCBA is working normally.
Indicators and test points
Indicators
 Clog signal indicator (D3): red. It is lit when the PCBA outputs a clog signal.
 Empty aspirate signal indicator (D4): It is lit when the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal. ·
 Possible clog signal indicator (D5): It is lit when the PCBA outputs a possible clog signal.
 +5V power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the +5V power supply is working normally.
 +12V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is working normally.
Test points
 +12V power supply (VPP): The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working

normally.
 -12V power supply (VEE): reserved test point.
 Ground (GND): This test point is connected with the grounding terminal of the PCBA.
 Pressure sensor output signal (ANALOG): It is an analog signal amplified by the pressure sensor. When
the pressure sensor is connected to the air, the voltage at this point lies between 0.8-1.3V.
 Clog signal (CLOG_Y): It is a test point of clog signal output. When the PCBA outputs a clog signal, indicator
D3 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no clog signal, indicator
D3 will be extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
 Empty aspirate signal (NO_SAM):When the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be lit
and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no empty aspirate signal, indicator
D4 will be extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
 Debugging test point (TEST): used for test during debugging.
Note
 Insert connectors J2 and J3 tightly into the PCBA. When inserting connector J1, you will hear a click, which
means that the connector is inserted in place into its slot.
4.5 Power Supply System

4.5.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit
N
Power supply
AC drive board
E
yellow- Shell L
green grounding
Main switch
ISE module
N V+ DC/DC power Main control

N
board board
L V-
V+
Power drive Lamp
L V+ board
V-
AC/DC power
V-
module
Figure 4-15 Power supply system of the whole unit
Power Supply System

The power supply adopts the purchased AD/DC power module (600W). DC/DC module is designed for the
voltage requirements of the circuits to output power for lamp, DC power for control boards and power for
refrigeration unit. The figure below shows the composition of the module.

A12V/2A Lamp
Pre-amplifying
AD collection
5V/4A Main board 12V board
Level sense
board
AC/DC DCDC Probe clog
12V
power Power 12V/5A detection
board
module board
Power drive
24V/6A board
Power
12V/11A
conversion ISE module
board
Figure 4-16 Power Supply System
4.5.2 Performance Indices

Power supply input
 AC voltage input: 220-240V, 220/230V, and 110/115V.
 AC voltage frequency: 50/60±1Hz
 AC input power: 1300VA
Power supply output

No Name Rated Output Usage Control Description
1 5V 5V/4A 5V digital Controlled by analyzer
power switch
2 12V 12V/2A Light source Controlled by operating
software
3 12V 12V/19A Reagent Refrigeration Controlled by main
power switch
4 12V 12V/5A 12V drive Controlled by analyzer
power switch
5 24V 24V/6A 24V drive and heater Controlled by analyzer
power switch
Notes:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the operating software while
the main power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzer power switch
with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzer power switch
is turned on, and vice versa.
4.5.3 DCDC power supply board
The PCB layout of the DCDC power supply board is shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-17 Layout of DCDC power supply board

Indication of voltage outputs:
LED Indication Status Controlled By
D12V_IN When indicator D12V_IN is lit, Controlled by main power
AC/DC module has output. switch
LAMP When indicator LAMP is lit, Controlled by operating
lamp 12V voltage is output. software

LED Indication Status Controlled By

5V When indicator 5V is lit, 5V Controlled by analyzer
voltage is output. power switch
12V When indicator 12V is lit, lamp Controlled by analyzer
12V voltage is output. power switch
24V When indicator 24V is lit, 24V Controlled by analyzer
voltage is output. power switch
Notes:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled to turn on or off by the operating
software while the main power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzer power switch
with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzer power switch
is turned on, and vice versa.
Output connectors:
No. Connectors Pins PIN
J1 Power input connector 1 12V
2 GND
J2 Connector of analyzing 1 12V
unit power switch 2 GND
3 Control signal
J3 Connector for main 1 5V
control board power 2 NC
supply output
3 12V
4 GND
5 NC
6 GND
J4 Connector for input of 1 GND
lamp control signal 2 Lamp sleep control.0 for
sleep
3 GND
4 Lamp turn-on control. 0
stands for turning on the
lamp.
5 NC
6 NC
J5 Connector for lamp 1 LAMP_V+
power output 2 LAMP_V-
J6 Connector for ISE power 1 GND
output 2 NC
3 12V
J7 Connector for power 1 24V
drive board output 2 24V
3 5V
4 12V

No. Connectors Pins PIN

5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
4.5.4 Replacing Power swich and fuse
Replacing Main Power Switch
1) Turn off the power, remove the cable, and remove the back cover of the instrument
2) Disassemble the two screws on the fixing bracket shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-18 Main Power Switch position

3) Disconnect the power cord from the main power switch. Note that the line and switch are marked. To
avoid errors, it is recommended to take a picture.
4) Replace the main power switch.
5) Connect the wire, pay attention to the corresponding, can not be connected wrong, the joint should be
tightly inserted, can not be loose. If the metal piece is loose, refer to the middle picture in the figure
below and squeeze the metal piece slightly.
6) Connect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.
7) After the power-on test is normal (the main switch will light), restore and replace the bracket and the
rear case.

Figure 4-19 Replace the main power switch
Replacing rocker switch

1) Turn off the power.
2) Remove the left side panel.
Figure 4-20 rocker switch Position

3) Remove the two screws that secure the switch support plate o. Take the picture for the switch wiring.

Figure 4-21 The rocker switch wiring

4) Remove the rocker switch wiring.
5) Remove the switch from the bracket and replace it with a new one.
6) Wiring in order, note: there are corresponding signs on the wire and switch (1a, 1b, etc.), please
connect accordingly, and compare according to the picture, not connected.
7) Replace the bracket.
8) After the power-on test is normal (the switch will light),replacing the shell.
Rocker switch to DC-DC power board connection line
Figure 4-22 Rocker switch to DC-DC power board connection J2
Replacing the fuse

The socket of the power supply is one with the fuse. To replace the fuse:
1) Use a flathead screwdriver to remove the cover of the fuse base.

Open with a
flathead screwdriver
Figure 4-23 Replacing the fuse 1
2) Insert the fuse into its base. Note: The fuse for model with 220V power supply is
010-000003-00; the fuse for model with 110V power supply is 010-000082-00.
Press into
the slot

3) Push the fuse base into the power socket.
Insert the fuse

into the slot

体外诊断全球术支持部
4.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REV ECN DESCRIPTION DRAW CHECHK APPR DATE
D D
AC drive
board
Power input
terminal
DC/DC AC /DC
power Power
module module
C C
ISE power Power drive

Main board
board board
pre-
amplification AD
board
B B
APPROVALS DATE
DESIGN MINDRAY
CHECK
A TITLE A
CHECK Main unit wiring diagram
File： Bytes： CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting CHECK
herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made of DWG NO. BA36/BA37 REV 1.0
Date： Time： this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents
contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics
R&D
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003
Co.,Ltd.
CHIEF ENG. SHEET 1 OF 5 SIZE A4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
protection switch of
protection switch of
reaction carousel
upper heater of
reaction carousel
Temperature
protection switch
upper heater of
reaction carousel
protection switch
of cleaning fluid
reaction carousel
protection switch
Upper heater of
Temperature
Lower heater of
of wash solution
of lower heater
Temperature
Cleaning fluid
Wash solution
Temperature
Temperature
of reaction
carousel
heater
heater
D 009-007706-00 D
1
009-008089-00
1 2 1 2 1 2
2
J16 J5 J7 J6
3
009-007683-00
4
5 220VCTRL1 6 blue
L 009-008112-00
brown L
E
Shell
5 yellowgr
5
6
6 220VCTRL2 4 red
8 220VCTRL3 6
AC drive board een grounding
7 33
8 34
5 black
33 VCC 1 blue 7 （051-002872-00） Light N Power
socket
Main power
switch
N blue
8
N light
blue
L brown
brow L
009-007677-00
Light
blue
9 LAMPCTRL 1 yellow
n
10
5 1
9
10LAMP_SLEEP 3 black 12Vout red

15
12
6 2
N
7 GND 2 black
L
V+ V+
15 GND 4 black 7 3 12Vout red
V+ AC/DC Power supply
Main board 8 4 12Vout red
module
C V+ C
9 12V- black
10 V- V- （022-000285-00 ）
11 12 12V- black
V-
12V- black
V-
DC/DC Power supply
009-007678-00
J2 12GND 6
009-007680-00
6 blue
board
4 1
4 1 GND 4 4 black （051-002900-00）
12V 3 3 yellow 5 2
5 2
5V 1 1 red 6 3
6 3
Power drive 1 12V red

1
board 5V 3 009-007681-00 J31
J17 3 red
2 6
2 12V red
2
Power
GND 7 7 black
2 6 12V 4 4 yellow
drive
3 GND black 1
12GND 8 8 blue 1 5 3 board
1 5 B
B 24V 1 1 orange 4 GND black 2
3 4 4
24V 2 2 orange
3 4
GND 6 6 white
7 8
GND 5 5 white
7 8
ISE Module
3 yellow
M32:Lamp 1 12V
3 ISE Power PCBA 1 1 24V
009-007682-00 2 2
2 black black 2 2 GND
12VGND 1 1 2
1 blueGND
1 red 2 3
1 red J2
LAMP12V J1
009-007704-00
3
2
1
1
3
2
12Vout
009-007679-00
GND
blue C
black
MINDRAY
+
NO
A
analyzing
Switch of
A
TITLE: Power supply wiring diagram
unit
File： Bytes：
DWG NO. BA36/BA37 REV 1
Date： Time：
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 5 SIZE A4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROBE
C31: Probe
GND
1black
2red
D
D
1blac
2red
k
BNC BNC BNC
Power drive
J20
1 2
Probe clog detection board
J1
Sensor of diluted wash
board
High conc. Waste

Reagent carousel
Level sense board PCBA
DI water sensor
Probe Power drive board
solution （051-002479-00） J2 J3
12 11
18 17
28 27
32 31
38 37
42 41
22 21
48 47
14 13
16 15
20 19
24 23
26 25
30 29
34 33
36 35
40 39
44 43
46 45
50 49
button
sensor
1
3
5
7
9
J2 J34 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 9
2
4
6
8
4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10
4 NC
5 NC
7 NC
6 NC
2 NC
3 NC
2
1
1
3
2
8
7
3
3
7
6
5
6
1
4
39 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR3
40 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR3
009-007715-00
009-008100-00
31 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR2
27 DIR_RESERVED_MOTOR1
009-007684-00
009-008097-00
009-007713-00
11 VALVE_WASH_INJECT1
12 VALVE_WASH_INJECT2
CLOT_YES white 6
INTEN purple
GND black
RXD orange
GND black
PSEN brown
RST brown
TXD dark brown
INT green
38 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR2
37 CLK_SYR_MOTOR2
36 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR1
35 CLK_SYR_MOTOR1
VPP red
2 yellowLEVEL1
10 PUMP_FILL_OUT
13 PREHEAT_REAG
16 PWR_PV_WASH1
17 PWR_PV_WASH2
4 red LEVEL2
25 CLK_ WASH_UP
3
45 CLK_FILL_SYR
9 VAVLE_FILL_IN
44 DIR_ FILL _UP

24 DIR_WASH_UP
43 CLK_FILL_UP
8 PUMP_FILL_IN
46 DIR_FILL_SYR
32 CLK_STIR_UP
41 CLK_FILL_R
33 DIR_STIR_UP
15 LAMP_CTRL
42 DIR_FILL_R
22 CLK_STIR_R
28 CLK_FILL_T
23 DIR_ STIR_R
29 DIR_FIIL_T
20 REAC-CLK
21 REAC-DIR
18 RELAY_T
14 STIR_DC
blueGND
whiteGN
19 GND
50 VCC
34 GND
47 GND
48 VCC
49 VCC
1 GND
D
12
1
3
4 NC
5 NC
7 NC
6 NC
3 NC
2 NC
11
2
5
1
4
8
9
NC
6
NC
3
2
4
8
7
5
6
J14 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10 12
12 11
18 17
28 27
32 31
38 37
42 41
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22 21
48 47
2 3 4
14 13
16 15
20 19
24 23
26 25
30 29
34 33
36 35
40 39
44 43
46 45
50 49
1
1
3
5
7
9
J1
C J4 1 3 5 7 9 11 C
1 3 5 7 9 11
2
4
6
8
4
J11
J3
Main control board

（051-002979-00）
J39
J5 J6 J7
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 J18 J23
J22 J21
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10
J12 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 1 3 5 7 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 9
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3red
2black
3 PRTD_T1
2 PRTD_REF
1 SHIELD
1 SHIELD
009-007685-00
SENSOR
SENSOR
SHIELD
SHIELD
1red VCC 1
009-007685-00 BA10-20-78117 BA34-20-63652
+ 4white 1red 1
REF
REF
PHO_REAC_T 2 VCC
Home sensor of reaction C 2black +
009-006306-00
4white PHO_FILL_T 2
009-007706-00
carousel - GND 3 Home sensor of C
1 NC NC 1
E 3green GND 4 sample/reagent carousel - 2black GND 3 3
PC COM
1red VCC 5 3green GND 4 RXD 2 1
E
009-007688-00
+ 4white 1red
009-007688-00
6 VCC 5 2 TXD 3 NC
Coded disk sensor of reaction C 2black PHO_REAC_TCGND Coded disk sensor of + 4white PHO_FILL_TC 6 009-000880-00
2
009-007690-00
carousel - 7 C 4 NC NC 4
2black
8 AD_START 20
sample/reagent carousel GND 7
E 3green GND 8 - 1 VCC red 1 RXD232
black 2
VCC 9
+ 1red E 3green GND 8 ISE module 5 GND 5 3
red 3
1red VCC 9
1 +12V 1
C4whitePHO_FILTER_MOTOR 10
9 ISP 22
TXD232
2 GND 5
blac
7 BUSY 18
+
5 RST 21
red
3 TXD 19
4 RXD 6
Probe horizontal 2 RXD green 3 6 NC NC 6
4white PHO_WASH_UP 10
k
11
1
anti-collision sensor - 2black GND C 3 TXD blue 2 4 B
B E 3green GND 12 Idle - 2black GND 11 8 RTS 7 NC
1red
+ 4white
VCC 13 E 3green GND 12 5 GND black 4 5
1red VCC 13 7 CTS 8 Temperature
C 2black PHO_FILL_UPGND 14
preheating sensor
Home sensor of probe vertical + GND
Reagent barcode
- 15 4whitePHO_WASH_SUCKSYR 14 6 RTS white 10 9 NC sensor of
2
3
1
2
3
motor C 6
M29:reagent
E 3green GND 16 Idle - 2black GND 15
7 CTS yellow 6 NC reaction
+ 1red VCC 17
18
E 3green
1red
GND 16
17 8 TRIG orange 9 7
C 4whitePHO_FILL_R
VCC carousel
reader
Home sensor of probe rotation + ISP_RESET
Temperature sensor cable
Temperature sensor cable

motor - 2black GND 19 C 4white PHO_WASH_EJECT 18 6 7 8 9
20 Wash station anti-collision 2black 9 NC NC 5 8
E 3green
1red
GND - GND
NC J3
+ 4white VCC 21 E 3green GND 20 4 NC NC 7
22 1red VCC 21 9
Of cleaning fluid
Home sensor of probe syringe C 2black PHO_FILL_SYR + 1 2 3 4 5
of wash solution
NC 8 NC
motor - GND 23 C 4white PHO_RESERVED1 22
Home position of wash station 2black GND 23 10
E 3green GND 24 -
3green GND 24
NC 11
NC AD collection
+ VCC 25 E NC 12
Home sensor of mixer vertical C 4white PHO_STIR_UP 26 + VCC 25 SHIELD board
- 2black GND 27 4white PHO_RESERVED2 26 NC 13
motor Home position of cleaning C
E 3green GND 28 - 2black GND 27
1red VCC 29 fluid syringe 3green GND 28 NC 14
Home sensor of mixer rotation + 4white E 1red VCC 29
C 2black PHO_STIR_R 30 Home position of wash + NC 15
motor GND 31 4white PHO_RESERVED3 30
- solution syringe C 2black GND 31
E 3green GND 32 -
3green GND 32
33 NC E
34 NC 33 NC
34 NC
MINDRAY A
A
TITLE: Main control board wiring
File： Bytes：
DWG NO. BA36 REV 1

Date： Time：
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

SHEET 3 OF 5 SIZE A2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1P01：Interior pump
SV06：Wash solution
1
SV05：Cleaning
2
2
2
1SV02：Interior valve
SV07：Wash solution
1
21
2
Phase 3 aspirating
M19:Mixer DC
SV01：Inlet valve
preheating block
dispensing valve
dispensing valve
dispensing valve
aspirating pump
M29:Reagent
aspirating pump
P02：phase 2
SV03： Probe
exterior valve
SV04：Mixer
exterior valve
P04: phase 4
motor
P03：
pump
fluid
D - D
+
2
1
1
2
009-007693-00
1blue009-007706-00
009-007694-00
009-007695-00
1blue009-007716-00
2red
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2red
8
7
5
4
2
1
5
4
2
1
009-007686-00 1 2 1 2 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
6 6white 4white
1
J22 J24
4 4yellow 3yellow J9 009-007715-00
1 black
J6 J28
4 d3 2
1 2
1 2
J8
3 3blue 2blue 2e 3 4
r
1 GND 1GND
1red 3 4 2 NC 2 NC
1 1red 5 6
3 NC 3 NC
5 6 4 NC 4 NC
5 NC 5 NC 7 8
C 7 8 6 NC 6 NC C
6white 4white 9 4
1
7 NC 7 NC
6 8 PUMP_FILL_IN 8
9 4
4yellow 3yellow 9 VAVLE_FILL_IN 9 11 12
2
4
J13
10 PUMP_FILL_OUT 10
11 12 11 VALVE_WASH_INJECT1 11
12 13 14
3 3blue 2blue 12 VALVE_WASH_INJECT2
3
13 14 13 PREHEAT_REAG 13
1red 14 STIR_DC 14 15 16
1 1red 15 16 15 LAMP_CTRL 15
4
16 CLK_WASH_SYR 37 17 18
17 DIR_WASH_SYR 38
17 18
Main control board

18 RELAY_T 18 19 20
19 GND 19
19 20 20 REAC-CLK 20 J40
4white 21 22
6 6white
1
Power drive board 21 REAC-DIR 21

（051-002896-00） 21 22 22 CLK_STIR_R 22
3yellow 23 24
4 5yellow
23 DIR_ STIR_R 23
2
J20 23 24 24 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR1 24
J7
25 DIR_RESERVED_MOTOR1 25 25 26
3 2blue 2blue 26 CLK_WASH_UP 26
3
25 26 27 DIR_WASH_UP 27
28 CLK_FILL_T 28 27 28
1 1red 1red 27 28 29 DIR_FIIL_T 29
4
30 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR2 30 29 30
29 30 31 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR2 31
32 CLK_STIR_UP 32 31 32
6white 4white 31 32 33 DIR_STIR_UP 33
1
6 34 GND 34 33 34
35 CLK_SYR_MOTOR1 35
4yellow 3yellow 33 34 36 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR1 36
4
2
37 CLK_RESERVED_MOTO4 16 35 36
J5
3blue 2blue 35 36 38 DIR_RESERVED_MOTO4 17

3 39 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR3 39 37 38
3
37 38 40 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR3 40
B 1 1red 1red 41 CLK_FILL_R 41 39 40 B
4
42 DIR_FILL_R 42
39 40 43 CLK_FILL_UP 43
44 DIR_ FILL _UP 44 41 42
41 42 45 CLK_FILL_SYR 45
46 DIR_FILL_SYR 46 43 44
1
6 6white 4white 43 44 47 GND 47

48 VCC 48 45 46
3yellow 49 VCC 49
4yellow
2
45 46
J11
4 50 VCC 47 48
2blue 47 48
3
3 3blue 49 50
1 1red 1red 49 50
4
J12 J15 J4 J10 J16 J14

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
4white
3yellow
3yellow
4white
3yellow
1red
1red
4white
2blue
1red
4white
3yellow
4white
3yellow
2blue
3yellow
1red
2blue
4white
1red
1red
2blue
2blue
2blue
MINDRAY
4yellow
6white
4yellow
6white
4yellow
4yellow
3blue
4 4yellow
4yellow
6white
6white
6white
6white
3 3blue
3 3blue
3blue
3 3blue
3blue
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1red
1 1red
1 1red
A A
6
4
3
6
4
6
4
6
4
3
1
6
TITLE:
6
4
3
Power drive board wiring I
File： Bytes：
DWG NO. BA36 REV 1
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Anti-fogging
Anti-fogging temperature
Semi conductor Semi conductor Semi conductor switch
heater
cooler cooler cooler
Thermistor
BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633
BA40- M07-00062S-
3001-21-07100 --
D D
2 green
1 black
3 white
2 black
2 black
1 red
4 red
2 black
2 black
1 red
1 red
Air butt
1 red
009-007709-00
009-007707-00
009-007708-00
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
Control
control
control
VCC
VCC
VCC
1 black
1 black
3 black
2 red
2 red
1 black
2black
2 black
6red
7red
1 red
5red
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
1 2
1 2 3 4 J39
J38
J32
C C
Power drive board

（051-002896-00）
J35 J36
J37
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
B B
3 black
1 black
5 black
1 black
3 black
1 black
4 red
2 red
6 red
2 red
4 red
2 red
009-007710-00
009-007712-00
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
009-007711-00
GND 1 red
GND 1 red
GND 1 red
VCC2 black
VCC2 black
VCC2 black
2 black
2 black
2 black
2 black
2 black
1 red
1 red
1 red
1 red
1 red
Reagent refrigeration fan Whole unit cooling fan Reaction carousel fan Reaction carousel fan Reaction carousel fan Lamp fan
Reagent refrigeration fan Reaction carousel fan
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Power drive board wiring II

File： Bytes：
DWG NO. BA36 REV 1
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5 Fluidic system
5.1 Overview
The major function of the fluidic system is:
 To provide deionized water for washing interior/exterior of probe and mixer.
 To provide deionized water and wash solution for washing cuvettes.
 The DI water tank provides DI water for the system and the wash solution tank provides wash solution.
 The high concentration waste tank holds the high concentration waste liquid.
 This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the hydropneumatic system.
5.2 Fluidic Diagram
See A.7Fluidic Diagram.
Fluidic Port Panel

Diluted High
DI water Low conc.Low conc. conc.
wash
inlet Waste Waste Waste
solution
outlet 1 outlet 2 outlet
inlet High
Low level level
floater of floater
Low level floater of
diluted wash
of DI water high
solution
conc.
waste
FL02 FL03
FL01
DI water tank Diluted wash solution Low conc. waste tank High conc. waste tank
Figure 5-1 Fluidic Port Panel

Table 5-1 The length of the tube and Identification.

If no tolerance is given for the tube, when the length of the tube is ≤100mm, the tolerance is ±5mm; when it
is >100mm, the tolerance is ±10mm.
Tube Code Material description Length(mm)
indicator
D04 082-002374-00 Tube.3.2*6.4mm TPU Polyether 150
D08 M6G-020049--- Plastic tube.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mmX100M 170
D09 0040-10-32301 Tube.PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD 2000
D11 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 120
D12 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 90
D14 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 110
D18 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
D19 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
D20 M90-000026--- Tube.PTFE,1/32"IDX1/16"OD 350
D27 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
D28 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
D29 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
D30 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
ZZ04 082-002374-00 Tube.3.2*6.4mm TPU Polyether 600

ZZ06 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
ZZ07 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
ZZ09 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube 80
ZZ10 3001-10-07069 Tube.1/16"X1/8",ND-100-65,Tygon 740
W01 082-000384-00 Tube.Φ9.525XΦ15.875 natural color PVC.55~60 250

degrees.
degrees.
degrees.
degrees.
degrees.
degrees.
degrees.
W09 082-002375-00 Tube.1.6*3.2mm TPU Polyether 400
ZQ01 3001-10-07069 Tube.1/16"X1/8",ND-100-65,Tygon 400
ZQ02 082-000314-00 Tube ND-100-65,1/8"X1/4",Tygon 260
ZQ03 082-000314-00 Tube ND-100-65,1/8"X1/4",Tygon 510

5.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System

The hydropneumatic system is composed of the probe wash module, cuvette wash station, and water
supply/drainage module. See the figures below:
Hydropneumatic
System
Probe and Mixer Cuvette Wash Inlet/outlet

Wash Module Module module
Reaction cuvette
Reaction cuvette
Waste drainage
Mixer cleaning
Probe Wash
dispensing
aspiration
Inlet
Figure 5-2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System
5.3.1 Probe wash module
The probe/mixer wash module consists of one probe, one mixer, two syringes and one diaphragm pump, of
which probe syringe SY03 is 500ul;probe exterior wash syringe SY01 is 10ml;probe interior wash and mixer
wash shares one diaphragm pump P01.
This module is used for fixed-quantity sampling and probe/mixer cleaning.
 Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through the syringe SY03, wash valve SV02 and probe NS with the aim
of delivering fixed amount of reagent and sample.
 Probe interior wash and mixer wash shares one diaphragm pump P01 with the cooperations of the probe
interior wash valve SV02 and mixer wash valve SV04.
 Probe exterior wash uses 10ml syringe SY01.Valve SV03 is turned on or off to control wash operations.
SV01 controls the aspirating and dispensing of the syringe and the wash syringe controls the amount of
the wash solution.
The schematic diagram of the probe wash module is as shown below.

Figure 5-3 Schematic diagram of probe wash module
5.3.2 Cuvette Wash Module

The cuvette wash unit is divided into dispensing module and aspirating module, which cooperate with each
other to clean the reaction cuvettes for 8 phases, making repeated use of cuvettes possible.
Dispensing moduleAuto wash syringe SY02 (2.5ml) provides diluted wash solution for phase 1 wash probe.

Wash syringe SY01 (10ml) provides DI water for phase 2-3 wash probes. No liquid is injected for phase 4 wash
probe.
The wash solution for phase 1 wash probe is obtained through manual dilution with ratio 1:9(one portion of
concentrated wash solution and nine portions of DI water.) The dispensing and aspirating operations are
controlled by solenoid valve. The dispensing volumes for phase 1-3 are same.
Aspirating module: A diaphragm pump is used to aspirate the waste fluid and wipe the cuvettes after cleaning.
High-concentration waste is generated during phase 1 and low-concentration waste during phase 2-4. Wipe
blocks are provided to absorb the remaining wash solution inside cuvettes during phase 4.
The wash station lowers to the cuvettes and the waste pump is turned on to aspirate the waste in the cuvette
and then the dispensing module injects the diluted wash solution and DI water. The cuvettes are washed
repeatedly for two times.
The schematic diagram of the module is as shown below.
Figure 5-4 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit
5.3.3 Inlet/outlet module

The water supply/drainage module includes the water supply part and waste drainage part.
The DI water tank is connected to the DI water interface and the DI water is delivered by the pump and syringe
to other units.
The wash solution tank is connected to the diluted wash solution interface and the wash solution is delivered by
the wash syringe to phase one wash.
Low level floater sensors are equipped for the DI water tank and wash solution tank. When the liquid is
insufficient, the analyzer gives an alarm.
Filter is equipped for the DI and wash solution tube.
The drainage module allows discharging high-/low-concentration waste separately. The high-concentration
waste is discharged into the high-concentration waste through the waste pump. The low-concentration waste is
discharged by gravity or by a pump into a low-concentration waste tank or a sewer which complies with the local
regulations.
The liquid level detection is provided for the high concentration waste tank. When the waste tank is full, the

analyzer gives an alarm.

The high concentrated waste comes from the waste of phase 1 wash.
Low-concentration waste comes from the following sources:
 Probe interior and exterior wash
 Mixer wash
 Phase 2-4 wash
 Condensate water of the reagent carousels
 The overflowing liquid when abnormality occurs.
The first three are the major sources and account for over 99% of low-concentration waste.
The fluidic diagram of the module is as shown below.
Figure 5-5 Fluidic diagram of water supply/drainage module
5.3.4 Interfaces for fluid connection

The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument contains 8 external interfaces, as shown in the figure below.
Where,
 Three fluidic outlets. High concentration waste outlet, low concentration waste outlet 1 and low
concentration waste outlet 2.
 Two fluidic inlets. Used to connect the DI water tank and Diluted wash solution tank.
 Three liquid level sensor interfaces. Interface of liquid level sensor of high concentration waste, interface
of liquid level sensor of DI water and interface of liquid level sensor of diluted wash solution.

No. Name
1. DI water
2. Wash solution
5 6 7 8 3.
4.
High conc. waste
Low conc. waste 1
5. Liquid level sensor of DI
water
6. Sensor of diluted wash
1 2 3 4 7.
solution
Sensor of high conc. waste
8 Low conc. Waste 2
Figure 5-6 External fluidic interfaces of the instrument

Optional modules
If the probe clog module is configured, the probe interior wash tube should be adjusted. The probe clog
detection sensor is installed between the tube of interior wash valve SV02 and probe syringe SY03. When the
probe clog detection sensor is equipped, D08 tube is shortened about 50mm and one end of the D08 tube is
connected to SY03 Three-way connector and one end connected to the outlet of the probe clog detection sensor.
At the same time, one tube D34 and its adapter are added. One end of the tube is connected to the inlet of the
probe clog detection sensor and another end connected to the outlet of the interior wash valve.
5.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions
5.4.1 Fluidic Initialization
The specific procedure is described below:
1) All pumps and valves are powered off and restored to the initial status.
2) Check the status of the floater sensors of the DI water tank, diluted wash solution tank and high
concentration waste tank. If related alarm is removed, the system moves to the next step. If not, the
system gives out the alarm and the fluidic initialization fails.
3) Perform the interior and exterior cleaning and priming of the mixer.
4) Syringe SY01 is reset and then syringe SY02 is reset.
Notes:
The fluidic initialization is one part of the startup, system recovery and system wakeup procedure.
5.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components
This section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic components, and provides
schematic diagrams and pictures of components for service engineers to refer.
5.5.1 Overview
When an alarm is displayed on the operating software, you can analyze the instrument status and finally locate
the failure source, and if necessary, replace the failed part or component. Generally, service engineers are not
recommended to remove the electric devices, such as pumps, solenoid valves, clog detection device, syringes,
etc. Only when both hardware and software are confirmed normal but the Hydropneumatic alarm still remains
are service engineers suggested to remove the relevant device and then analyze or replace it.
Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and solenoid valves of the
Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the analyzer power switch and main power switch have
been placed to the OFF position.
Table 5-2 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components
Name Quantity
Cross screwdriver 1
Hexagon screwdriver 1
Flathead screwdriver 1
Cable tie Several
Diagonal pliers 1

Tube cutter 1
5.5.2 Probe and mixer wash module
Cuvette wash
Syringe
station
Fluidic
interface
Mixer wash Probe wash

Mixer Probe
well well
Figure 5-7 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe and mixer wash module-front view

Cuvette Wash Preheating Wash valve Probe interior wash valve

Clog detection sensor Mixer wash valve
Assembly assembly
Cleaning fluid Wash solution Probe/mixer wash

syringe syringe pump Cuvette wash pump
Figure 5-8 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe wash module-rear view
No. FRU Part Name Remarks
1 082-000430-00 Syringe 500μl (ZDV) Probe Syringe
2 009-000448-00 Probe interior wash return valve cable probe interior wash
valve
3 082-002273-00 Valve LVMK21-6J cable probe exterior wash
valve
4 009-000448-00 Probe interior wash return valve cable mixer wash valve
5 082-002373-00 LVMK three-way valve cleaning fluid inlet
valve
6 BA30-21-15311 KNF diaphragm pump assembly probe interior wash
pump(mixer wash
pump)
7 115-045917-00 10ml Wash syringe assembly wash syringe
8 M6G-020049--- Tube.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mmX100M sampling tube
9 0040-10-32301 Tube.PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD sampling tube
10 M90-000026--- Tube.PTFE,1/32"IDX1/16"OD mixer wash
restriction tube
11 082-002374-00 Tube.3.2*6.4mm TPU Polyether Wash Tube
12 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube Wash Tube
13 043-000556-00 Wash well shell Probe wash well
14 BA10-20-77752 Wash well (mould MR77752) mixer wash well
15 115-037085-00 BA24 Sample probe assembly for probe
HbA1c test
16 BA31-20-41651 Mixer FRU/Mixer
Removing/Reinstalling Wash Syringe Assembly

When to do
Analyze or replace the wash syringe when it has abnormal sound, worse precision, leaking, or other failures.
How to do


2) Open the rear panel.
3) Disconnect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4) Remove the tube from the barbed connector of the syringe. Take caution not to spill the liquid onto
other parts.
5) Remove the four M3*12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer and remove the syringe.
Installation Procedure
1) Install the four M3*12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer and do not miss the shock
pad.
2) Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
3) Connect the cables of the motor and the sensor.
4) Power on the analyzer and use service account to log on the software. Select Utility -> Maintenance
-> Maintenance -> Engineer -> Clear. Clear the using count of the syringe.
Connector of wash
Connector of cleaning
solution syringe tube
fluid syringe tube
Screw
Wash solution syringe
Cleaning fluid syringe
Figure 5-9 Replacing wash syringe.
Removing/Installing Solenoid Valves

When to do
When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and then analyzed or replaced.
Removing Steps
3) Disconnect the solenoid valve’s power cord connector.
4) Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes to
prevent them from being confused.
5) Remove the tube of the solenoid valve. Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
6) Remove the screw of the bracket of the solenoid valve and remove the valve with its bracket. Take out
the valve body.
1) Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and outlet tubes, and then
tighten the tube clamps or straps. For the severely twisted tube, cut about 5mm off its end.
2) Install the screws of the solenoid valve and its bracket.

3) Make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative ends.
Verification steps
Refer to 7.9 Hydropneumatic Unit.
Screw of bracket
Cuvette wash solution

valve
Bracket
Cleaning fluid valve-

Probe interior wash
phase 2
valve
Cleaning fluid valve-

phase 3
Mixer wash valve
Probe exterior valve
Figure 5-10 Details of wash solenoid valve assembly
Note
 The tubes must be connected in correct order otherwise the analyzer may not work normally. Do not
confuse the inlet tube with the outlet tube.
 Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
 The positive and negative of the cable of the solenoid valve must be correctly connected.
 After replacement or reparation, conduct fluidic prime in case the air bubbles in the tube affect the
performance of the analyzer.
Replacing probe interior wash pump

When to do
When probe interior wash pump fails such as no water or insufficient water coming out, leakage or abnormal
noise.
Removing Steps
3) Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.
4) Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from being confused.
5) Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings or place a container under it to prevent liquid
from entering the instrument.
6) Remove the screws of the pump and its bracket to remove the pump body.
1) Connect the tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube clamps. For the severely twisted
tube, cut about 5mm off its end.
2) Install the pump on its bracket and fix the bracket.
3) Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps

Note
 The tubes must be connected in correct order otherwise the analyzer may not work normally. Take caution
not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
 Make sure that the power cord of the pump is connected to the correct positive and negative ends. After
replacement or reparation, conduct fluidic prime in case the air bubbles in the tube affect the performance
of the analyzer.
bracket
screw
Phase 4 waste
pump
Phase 2/3 waste
pump
Phase 1 waste
pump
Probe interior
wash/mixer wash
pump
Figure 5-11 Structure of pump

5.5.3 Cuvette Wash Module

See Figure 5-6 External fluidic interfaces of the instrument and Figure 5-7 Assembly drawing of whole unit -
- Probe and mixer wash module-front view
No. FRU FRU name Remarks
1 082-002426-00 NMP830 diaphragm pump Cuvette wash waste pump
2 082-002273-00 Valve LVMK21-6J cable cleaning fluid injection valve
3 082-002273-00 Valve LVMK21-6J cable wash solution injection
valve
4 115-045444-00 2.5ml Wash syringe assembly wash solution syringe
5 115-045714-00 Auto wash heating assembly-
BA36(220V)
6 115-045715-00 Auto wash heating assembly-
BA36(110V)
7 043-000422-00 filter
8 BA38-30-88154 Wash phase probe assembly
9 BA40-30-61934 Wipe phase probe assembly
10 041-001845-00 Wipe block
12 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32",tube Wash Tube
14 3001-10-07069 Tube.1/16"X1/8",ND-100-65,Tygon Wash Tube
Removing/Reinstalling Wash Syringe Assembly

See Figure 5-9 Replacing wash syringe.
When to do
Analyze or replace the wash syringe when it has abnormal sound, worse precision, leaking, or other failures.
Removing Steps
3) Disconnect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4) Remove the tube from the barbed connector of the syringe. Take caution not to spill the liquid onto
other parts.
5) Remove the four M3*12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer and remove the syringe.
1) Install the four M3*12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer and do not miss the shock
pad.
2) Insert the tube deeply into the connector of the syringe and use the cable tie to fix the tube on the joint.
Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
3) Connect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4) Power on the analyzer, log on the software with service user account, and then select Utility ->
Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Engineer -> Clear.
Verification steps
Refer to7.9 Hydropneumatic Unit.
Replacing Waste Pump

See Figure 5-11 Structure of pump.
When to do
When waste pump fails such as no liquid or insufficient liquid aspirated, leakage or abnormal noise.
Removing Steps
3) Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.
4) Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from being confused.

1) Connect the tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube clamps or cable tie. For the
severely twisted tube, cut about 5mm off its end.
2) Install the pump on its bracket and fix the bracket.
3) Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps
Note
 The tubes must be connected in correct order otherwise the analyzer may not work normally. Take caution
not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
 Make sure that the power cord of the pump is connected to the correct positive and negative ends.
 After replacement or reparation, conduct fluidic prime in case the air bubbles in the tube affect the
performance of the analyzer.
Removing/Reinstalling Cuvette Wash Preheating Assembly

When to do
 The heater is damaged.
 The temperature sensor is damaged.
 The temperature protection switch is damaged.
 The canister has leaks.
 The connectors are leaking.
Removing Steps
3) Mark the connection modes of the following parts: inlet/outlet tubes, heaters, sensors and temperature
protection switches for wash solution and deionized water.
4) Disconnect the connectors of the heater, sensor and protection switch.
5) Loosen the two hexagon socket head screws fixing the cuvette wash preheating assembly.
6) Apply cable tie on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
7) Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes. Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts. Because
the tube connection is very tight, exercise caution not to damage the connector.
1) Prepare a new wash preheating assembly.
2) Connect the connectors according to the marks.
3) Connect the tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube clamps or cable tie. For the
severely twisted tube, cut about 5mm off its end.
4) Use two M4*8 hexagon socket head screws to fix the preheating assembly.
5) Check if the configurations are complete.
6) Restore the instrument.
7) Connect the power supply and perform fluidic prime before starting test.
Verification steps
Note
 Cleaning fluid temperature Sensor and Wash solution temperature Sensor:Negative temperature
coefficient, the resistance decreases with increasing temperature.
2°C About 11KΩ
25°C About 5KΩ
 Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.
 Connect the connectors of the tubes and cables correctly otherwise the components or the instrument may
be damaged.

 After the tubes are connected, make sure the tubes are tightly connected to the deep of the connector.
 After the washing preheater is replaced, prime it first otherwise the instrument may not work normally.
Wash solution Wash solution Wash solution heater

Wash solution inlet
outlet Heating sensor
Heating
temperature
switch
Heating
temperature
switch Of
cleaning fluid
Cleaning fluid Cleaning fluid

Cleaning fluid heater
inlet screw outlet
Heating sensor
Figure 5-12 Structure of cuvette wash preheating assembly
Removing/Reinstalling Filter
When to do
 The filter used for more than 1 year.
 The filter damage.
Removing Steps
1) There are one filter respectively on the cleaning fluid and wash solution inlet tubes. The filters are
installed on the tubes between the fluidic interfaces and the DI water tank and wash solution tank.
2) Disconnect the tubes at the two ends of the filter and remove the filter.
1) Install the new filter and fix it with clamp or cable tie. For the severely twisted tube, cut about 5mm off
its end. Make sure the tubes are tightly connected to the deep of the connector.
2) After the filter is replaced, prime it first otherwise the instrument may not work normally.
Verification steps
Figure 5-13 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Acetabular filter
Removing/Reinstalling Wash Probes Assembly

When to do
When fluid overflows the cuvettes or the dispensed cleaning fluid is less than the normal volume, probably a
wash probe is clogged and needs to be removed and unclogged.
Removing Steps

1) Manually loosen the retaining screws on the wash station.See Figure 3-41 Wash probe.
2) Remove the wash station with tubes not connected, put the wash probes in a container.
3) Inject cleaning fluid and wash solution to find the place where the probe is clogged.
4) Use a needle to unclog the probe.
1) Align the locating holes on the wash station with the stop studs on the bracket, and then slightly tighten
the retaining screws.
2) Lower the wash probes assembly, use an alignment tool or visually check the phase 4 wipe block in
the cuvette. The wipe block must not contact the interior of the cuvette.
3) After finishing the second step, completely tighten the retaining screws on the wash station.
Verification steps
Note
 Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and cuvettes.
5.5.4 External Modules

Cap assembly of External high-concentration waste tank
The cap assembly of external high-concentration waste tank contains one FRU.
Table 5-5 High-concentration waste tank cap assembly FRU

1 115-037348-00 waste cap module
Cap assembly of the external diluted wash solution tank

The cap assembly of external diluted wash solution tank contains one FRU.
Table 5-6 Cap assembly of the diluted wash solution tank FRU

1 115-037347-00 washing barrel cap module
Cap assembly of DI water tank

The cap assembly of external DI water tank contains one FRU.
Table 5-7 Cap assembly of DI water tank FRU

1 115-037347-00 washing barrel cap module
10L water tank

The waste tank and diluted wash solution tank and DI water tank contains one FRU.
Table 5-8 10L water tank FRU

1 043-002159-00 10L water tank

6 Software
6.1 Software Installation
6.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package
The installation package of the operating software contains three folders: Setup, SetupGuide, and Thirdparty.
Figure 6-1 Folders in operating software installation package

Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file setup.exe and the KillBsLog tool that can end the
Bslog service.
Figure 6-2 Setup folder

Bslog: a service run automatically when the operating software is started, and used to record the logs of the
software. When started, the software checks if the service is started, and if it is not started, the software gives
an alarm indicating startup failure. When logging on the software, you are allowed to end this process, and this
action will not be recorded in the logs.
SetupGuide folder: includes the software installation and upgrading guide.
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former contains the installation
program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running environment assembly of SQL; while the latter is
database software.
6.1.2 Analyzer Software Version Information
The software version can be viewed from the software package. Open the Setup folder in the software package,
right-click the ModVersion.dll file to select Properties, and view the software version in Version of the Details
tab page.

Figure 6-3 View Software Version
6.1.3 Folder Structure

The default installation path of the operating software is: D:\Mindray\BS360
After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
Figure 6-4 BS360 folder

The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:

Figure 6-5 OperationSoft folder

Important folders include:
AbsData stores reaction curve files.
AlarmFile stores alarm log messages.
Database database file, which contains all parameters, test results,
calibration and QC data, etc.
BA80_DATA.MDF:database storage file
BA80_LOG.LDF: database boot file
The Backup folder contains BA80.bak, a database backup,see
Figure 6-37 Database location
ExceptionLog records address segment for error analysis when the software
collapses abnormally. (Note: There are two ExceptLog files, and the
other one is in Instrument_1 folder.)
Help online help in .chm format.
Instrument_1 log file.
PrintTemplate Print template
Item Mindray's chemistry parameter file.
Language Software Language
LOG records software upgrading information. (last upgrading
information record)
Workstation.exe the shortcut of execution program of the analyzer.
Logs RMS (Remote Management System) logs. Not used temporarily.
6.1.4 Log Files

The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action information of the software and
analyzer, which includes but not limited to the following:
 Keyboard input

 Error log, operation log and maintenance log of the software

 Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer
 Action instructions of the analyzer
 Floater and photocoupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Photoelectric data (real-time)
 ……
Separate log files are produced every day and stored in the following addresses:
1) In the WorkstationLOG folder of D:\Mindray\ BS360\OperationSoft.
2) In the InstrumentLOG folder of D:\Mindray\ BS360\OperationSoft\Instrument_1
The folder structure is shown below:
Figure 6-6 InstrumentLOG folder

Important folders include:
Perio the water blank data.
Lislog LIS communication data.
RPC (short form of Remote Procedure Call)
basic control command data.
ISEAdapterSrv ISE command and test data.
Workdata Instrument work instruction record
6.2 Computer Settings

6.2.1 Computer Requirements (for International Customers)
CPU At least Intel Dual Core, 2.6GHz
Memory At least 2GB for each RAM
Network Adapter If you are going to connect the computer with the LIS or Internet, you should
prepare another network adapter (Intel gigabit network adapter)
Serial Port The computer should provide an RS232 serial port, which is used to connect it
with the analyzer.

USB USB2.0 and above, no less than 2

Other built-in speakers (instrument alarm sound prompt)
Operating System Microsoft Window 10 (64 bit)
6.2.2 Hard disk defragment
Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating software of the instrument in the D drive. Make
sure that the C drive is over 30G and D drive over 100G, and the disk file system is of NTFS format. Deselect
the two options at the bottom of the disk properties window: “Compress drive to save disk space” and “Allow
Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching”.
Figure 6-7 Hard disk defragment
6.2.3 Application Software

Except for the operating system, other application software must not be installed or reserved on the computer.
If anti-virus application has been installed, remove the automatic scheduled scanning and add Workstation (BS-
360E) and BSLOG to the trust list.
6.2.4 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby
To remove the screen saver and system standby, select None in the Screen saver pull-down list box of the
Screen Saver Settings window, and then select Change power settings -> Change plan settings to go to the
Edit plan settings window. Perform the settings as shown in the figures below.

Figure 6-8 Remove screen saver

Select None in the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep pull-down list boxes.
Figure 6-9 Standby settings
6.2.5 Disable Automatic Synchronization with Internet Time Server

Double click the time icon on the lower-right corner of the task bar. The Date and Time Properties window is
displayed.

Figure 6-10 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server-1

Select the Internet Time tab, and then deselect the checkbox in front of Synchronize with an Internet time server.
Figure 6-11 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server-2
6.2.6 Turn off Automatic Updates

Turn off the automatic updates on the Windows Update window.

Figure 6-12 Turn off the automatic updates
6.2.7 Resolution Setting

Determine whether the screen resolution is 1280*1024.
Procedure:
On the PC desktop, right-click and select Display > Advanced display setting, set the resolution to 1280*1024,
and click OK, as shown in the following figure:
Figure 6-13 Set Resolution
6.2.8 Confirmation of Administrator Permission and UAC

1. Confirming that the current account is the Administrator
1) Open the command prompt. Enter windows+X, and click Command Prompt (Administrator) (A), shown
as the following figure.

Figure 6-14 Open Command Prompt

2) Enter the net user administrator /active:yes command to activate the administrator account (pay
attention to the space in the command), and press Enter. The "Command(s) completed successfully"
is displayed, as shown in the following figure:
Figure6-15 Enter command to Activate the Administrator Account

2. Logging in using the administrator account
Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete, click Log Off to enter the login screen, and click Administrator to enter the OS using
the Administrator account.
3. Modifying UAC setting
1) Enter regedit to run the registry, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 6-16 Run Registry

2) Find the EnableLUA item (0 indicates to disable UAC) in the following path of the
registry.[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System
]
3) Check the EnableLUA item. If the value is 1, change it to 0 (0 indicates to disable UAC).
6.2.9 SQL Version Check
Check the database version in the installation software directory and confirm that the database software is not
installed in the computer. If there is, refer to 6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling.
6.2.10 Check the installation.
On the Customize Format window, ensure that the decimal point "." has been chosen in the Decimal symbol
pull-down list box.
Note: Customize Format is configured according to the actual conditions of the countries which purchase the
analyzer. For example, the decimal point in Spain is "," so "," should be set as the decimal point (".") in this
country.
Figure 6-17 Special character setting

6.2.11 Firewall Whitelist Setting

Add the program of the operating software into the whitelist to ensure that the instrument and PC communicate
normally and avoid instrument disconnection.
Set relevant program to Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall. Specific operation is
as follows:
1) Choose Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and click Allow programs to communicate through
Windows Firewall.
2) In the program list, select the program with operating software, and tick it.
6.3 Installation of Operating Software
6.3.1 Preparation before Installation
1) Download the corresponding version of the software on the TDP.
2) Complete the computer settings, refer to 6.2 Computer Settings.
6.3.2 Software Installation
Please refer to the “UpgradeGuide_EN” in the “SetupGuide” folder of the installation package,see Figure 6-1
Folders in operating software installation package ,which will be updated with the software update.
The following are the detailed installation steps:
1) Run setup.exe in the Setup folder.
Note:If it is the first time the software has been installed, the system will prompt you to reboot the computer.
The SQL Server will be installed automatically after the computer is rebooted.
If the software has been installed and is uninstalled, the PC will not restart.
2) Click Next to enter the installation screen.
Figure 6-18 Installation Wizard Screen

3) The following screen is displayed. Wait for the third-party program to install. Then, the PC will
automatically restart.

Figure 6-19 Installing SQL Software

Note: During database installation, the DOS dialog box is displayed. Do not close this dialog box. It will
automatically disappear after the database is installed. It takes about 20 minutes to install the database. As
shown in the following figure:
Figure 6-20 DOS Dialog Box During SQL Installation

Note: If the DOS dialog box is closed by mistake, the installation fails. Follow the steps below to handle
the problem:
 Uninstall the SQL database, and reinstall the software. (For details about database uninstalling,
see section 6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling )
 If the installation fails again, restore the system, and reinstall the software.
3) Select the path for installing the software.
Select the path for installing the software, and click Next, as shown in the following figure:

Figure 6-21 Select a Path to Install the Software

4) Wait till the language selection window pops up.
Figure 6-22 Software installing

5) Choose a language that is used to display the software screens and printed reports, and then select
Next.

Figure 6-23 Select Language for the Operating Software

6) Select Finish. The installation is complete.
Figure 6-24 Installation Finished Screen

7) Confirm the configuration file,refer to 6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file.
6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file
Note:
1) After the installation is complete, the default serial port connecting the analyzer is COM1. If the
software can not be run due to the serial port configuration, please refer to 3).
2) The configuration file is located in the installation directory by default. If the path has been changed

during software installation, find the configuration file in the new directory.
3) The serial port in the configuration file should be set as the one used by the instrument.
Step 1: Open the configuration file COMMUNICATION_USE.INI in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\ BS360\OperationSoft\COMMUNICATION_USE.INI
Step 2: Check if the configurations in the COMMUNICATION_USE.INI file are the same with the following
examples. If they are different, change them according to relevant instructions.
[INSTRUMENTS]
HasTestInstrumentsNum=1
; Note: Number of Instrument
HasSDM=0
; Note: Is SDM configured
IsUseInstrument1=1
IsUseInstrument2=1
IsUseInstrument3=1
IsUseInstrument4=1
NameOfInstrument1 = 36
NameOfInstrument4 =36
[SAMPRACK_COMM_USE]
SAMPRACK_COMM_TYPE=SERIALPORT
SAMPRACK_COMM_NAME=SIM
; Note: Serial port of SDM
[BAUDRATE_SEC]
Baudrate=38400
; Note: Baud rate of SDM
[Demo]
ComPort=COM1
Step 3: Open the configuration file InstrServerConfig.ini in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\ BS360 \OperationSoft\Instrument_1\ InstrServerConfig.ini
Step 4: Check if the configurations in the InstrServerConfig.ini file are the same with the following examples. If
they are different, change them according to relevant instructions.
[INSTR]
INSTRNO=1
SERVER_IP=127.0.0.1
SERVER_PORT=7001
CLIENT_IP=127.0.0.1
CLIENT_PORT=8001
[SERIALPORT]
COMPORT=COM1
; Note: Serial port
BAUDRATE=38400
; Note: Baud rate
6.4 Software Upgrading
The software upgrade is divided into two parts, operating software upgrades and control system upgrades.
Please refer to the “UpgradeGuide_EN” in the “SetupGuide” folder of the installation package,see Figure 6-1
Folders in operating software installation package ,which will be updated with the software update.
Note:After the upgrade is complete, be sure to turn off the analyzer's power and restart to configure the
instrument parameters
6.4.1 Preparation before Upgrading
Check the software version
Enter the current operating software system on the operating computer to confirm the current software version
information, as follows:
Steps:
Enter the main screen of the operating software, select Utility > System Setup > Instrument Setup > Software
Version, and confirm the current software version information.

Figure 6-25 Operating Software Version
LIS Setting backup

If the customer uses the LIS, the LIS setup information needs to be backed up.
Steps:
1) Select Utility > System Setup > LIS Setup.

Figure 6-26 Host Communication Parameters window

Note: Take pictures of this LIS setting interface, Channel number content also needs to take full. Make sure no
Settings related are lost.
2) If the customer uses TCP/IP for LIS connection, you need to take a screenshot of the operating
computer network settings.
In the lower right corner of the desktop taskbar, right click, pop up "Network Settings", select the
network settings used by the LIS, screenshot IP settings information
Figure 6-27 IP setting information
Data Backup
Upgrading the software may result in database loss, so please make a backup before upgrading. Please refer
to 6.7.1 Data backup.
Backup system parameters

During the process of upgrading the control system, the unit parameters may change, so you need to back up
in advance,refer to 6.7.3 Unit parameter .
6.4.2 Upgrading of Operating Software
1) Use the engineer username and password to quit the operating software to the desktop.
2) Access the Windows Task Manager window.Workstation.exe 、 BsLog.exe 、 BsLog1.exe 、
Instrument.exe Check if relevant processes of the Workstation and Upgrade have been ended. If
not, select the process and click End Process.
The processes include:
Workstation.exe, BsLog.exe,BsLog1.exe,Instrument.exe .

Figure 6-28 Task Manager Window

3) Select programs on the menu on the lower right corner;Then select programs and features and
double click the BS360 program to remove it.
4) Reboot the computer.
5) Install the new operating software.Refer to 6.3.2 Software Installation.
6) After finishing the installation, do not reboot the computer or run the BS-360E operating software.
Please executive upgrade control system upgrade.
6.4.3 Upgrading Control System
1) Confirm again that the instrument unit parameters have been backed up, refer to 6.7.3 Unit
parameter Backup.
2) Re-confirm that the new version of the software has been installed, the instrument's main power
switch and analysis unit power switch are turned on.
3) Run the upgrading tool UpgradeEntry:
D:\Mindray\BS360\UpgradeTool\UpgradeEntry.exe
Figure 6-29 Screen of UpgradeEntry

4) Select a serial port used for the analyzer from "Uart name". The default setting is COM1. Note: If
the service engineer changes the serial port during instrument installation, the acutal one used
for PC communication should prevail. Select the target units to write the program. "All Units"

should be selected when the first time to upgrade.
Figure 6-30 UpgradeEntry 1

5) The burning file is under the installation directory and the default installation
directory :D:\Mindray\BS360\AnalyzeSoft. Any burning file can be selected when the "All Unit"
selected.

6) The control units will be download from the "Main Unit" After "Start" button clicked.


7) Click the "Exit" button when the upgrade completed.
Figure 6-33 Upgrade completed
8) Power off, and power it on again after 10 seconds.

9) 10 seconds later, Reboot the computer to run the operating software.
10) Check according to 6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading.
6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading
1) Refer to 6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file, Confirm that the configuration file has no errors,
otherwise modify it.
2) Check the software version information after entering the software to check whether the upgrade
is successful,refer to Figure 6-25 Operating Software Version.
3) Check whether the database information is lost. If it is lost, refer to Section 6.7.2 Database
Recovery.
4) Check if the LIS connection is normal. If it is abnormal, refer to LIS Setting backup content for
restoration
5) Check whether the unit parameters are consistent with the backup. If not, please refer to 6.7.4
Parameter Configuration for parameter configuration restoration.
6) If an alarm message appears: unmatched operating software version,refer to 10.2.4 Unmatched
Operating Software VersionA22039.
6.5 Software startup process and autostart settings
6.5.1 Normal Startup Procedure
The normal startup procedure of the operating software is as follows:
1) The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the Bslog.exe program is
run.

2) Sqlserver is started, and it will exit if an error indicating database initialization failure occurs.
3) The software process is started.
4) Enter the username and password.
5) The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. (If handshake fails, an alarm is given
prompting the unit is abnormal.)
6.5.2 Software antostart settings
Normally, with the startup of Windows, the software will start automatically. If there are special circumstances
that must prohibit the program from running automatically, you can modify the computer startup items:
How to do:
1) Switch to the desktop using the service user account, Right click the task bar and select Task Manager.
Figure 6-34 Change Startup Item Configuration
2) Select Startup and the CL-1000i（Here is the CL-1000i as an example. The actual display is workstation）
icon. The screen is shown as follows:

Figure6-35 Task manager window

3) Deselect the checkbox to the left of "CL1000i" to disable auto startup of the operating software.
Note: To restore auto startup, repeat steps 1 to 3 and select the "CL1000i" checkbox.
6.6 Software and SQL Database Uninstallation
6.6.1 Remove the software
1) End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
2) Find the Workstation program on the Control Panel window and uninstall it.
6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling
1) Select Start menu > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Functions on the computer
desktop, and uninstall SQL Server.
2) Then delete the "Microsoft SQL Server" folder generated during installation, run the registry, enter
regedit in Start > Run, enter the registry editor, and delete the following contents in the registry:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\MicrosoftSQLServeHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFT
WARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server (note that you must delete the entire Microsoft SQL Server
folder).
3) Enter regedit in the bottom left corner of the computer Start > Run, enter the registry editor, and then
search
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager,
Find the PendingFileRenameOperations value and delete all the data in it.

Figure 6-36 Delete the Database

4) After the SQL database is uninstalled, the operating software can be executed again. The software
automatically installs the SQL data during the installation process.

6.7 Data backup and recovery

6.7.1 Data backup
To back up the data
1) First exit the operating software.
2) enter it again to refresh the database.
The database is in the Database folder under the installation directory. You can choose to back it up in the
following two ways:
1) Use the engineer account to exit the operating software, enter the installation directory, find and copy
the entire Database folder to the computer E drive. File default path:
D:\Mindray\BS360\OperationSoft\DataBase\
2) Use the engineer account to exit the operating software, enter the installation directory, copy the
BA80.bak file in the Backup folder under Database to the computer E disk. File default path:
D:\Mindray\BS360\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup
240Pro
Figure 6-37 Database location
6.7.2 Database Recovery

To recover the database, first find the storage location of the local disk where the database to be restored is
located. It is recommended to back up the current data.
1) If you copy the entire Database folder, copy and paste directly to D:\Mindray\BS360\OperationSoft\
2) If you are copying the BA80.bak file, you need to copy and paste the file into this directory.
D:\Mindray\BS360\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup, please delete the two files BA80_DATA, BA80_LOG,
and then restart the software.
6.7.3 Unit parameter Backup
1) Run the operating software. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameter Configuration, select a unit
from the drop down list of "Unit Parameter" to inquire parameters, and then click Save. Repeat this
step for other units.

Figure 6-38 Parameter Configuration window

2) Click Save ,the Save as dialog box is displayed. Select a partition, and create a new folder named in
the format of "Instrument SN + Unit Parameter Backup", and name the unit to be stored.
6.7.4 Parameter Configuration
Parameter configuration requires the use of R&D user name and password, user name superstar,
password, please consult TS
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameter Configuration, select the unit of the required
configuration parameters in the “Unit Parameter” drop-down list, click Search, the following
interface appears: (to the reaction l unit For example)

Figure 6-39 Parameter Configuration 1

2) If only one parameter needs to be configured, for example, modify the position 3 parameter shown
in the figure above, double-click the parameter value, change it to “800”, click “Configure”, and
then search the unit again to see if the modification is successful. If this is not successful, repeat
this step.
Figure 6-40 Parameter Configuration

If the instrument has an alarm message
Then the setting parameters are out of range and new setting parameters need to be replaced.
3) If you need to recover by backup parameters, take the following steps: (taking the reaction unit
as an example)Select reaction unit in the unit parameter. 1→Click Search 2→Click Load
3→Select the backup parameter path in the pop-up box→Select the reaction unit parameter
→Click to open . At this time, the parameters have been imported to the current interface,click
,complete parameter configuration.

4) Select the corresponding unit to search and check whether the parameters are configured
successfully. If not, repeat the above operation
6.8 Demo Software Setup
If you want to enter the software in Demo mode, first exit the operating software and add a command in the
start program of WorkStation.exe. To do so, create a shortcut for WorkStation.exe on the desktop, right-click on
the icon and select Properties; then modify the Target field in the pop-up window by adding three space-
separated running parameters (“-Demo”, “MCUDemo”, and “-ISEDemo”) after “WorkStation.exe”, as indicated
in the figure below. When this is done, you can launch the operating software in Demo mode.
Note: If there is no serial port on the computer, you need to install the virtual serial port software. You can run
the demo software after adding the COM1 port. Otherwise, the software will report an error and cannot enter.

Figure 6-41 Demo Setup

7 Alignment
7.1 Basic Operation
7.1.1 Utility - Maintenance
Table 7-1 Utility - Maintenance
No Description
1, 2 Maintenance and Diagnostics: used to maintain and diagnose the
system at user end.
3 Alignment: used to align all mechanical positions, and the
hydropneumatic, pyrology and ISE units.
4 Parameters: used to inquire and configure parameters, and to
export parameters of each unit.
5 SPT: provides basic performance tests for the system, including
photometer test, precision test (dye), precision test (weight),
cuvette residue test, and carryover test.
6 Export parameters: Export alignment parameters of the
mechanical positions.
Figure 7-1 Maintenance screen
Note
Before replacing the main control board, you must export the alignment parameters to a local folder on the
Parameter Configuration window.After finishing the replacement, import the parameters to the software.
Otherwise, the system, when started up, will give an alarm indicating key parameters not configured and cannot
be restored. Also change the parameter of fluidic prime status.

7.1.2 Alignment fixtures

Fixture package code: 115-048339-00
Note: This code contains all the alignment fixtures in the table below.
Table 7-2 Alignment fixtures
No Code Name Image/Precision Quantity

1 BA24-J04 BA24 cuvette alignment 2
fixture
2 BA10-J16 Reagent bottle center 3

alignment fixture
3 BA48-J10 Sample position 3

alignment tool
4 BA60-J07 Pseudo probe 1
5 BA80-J20-001 Feeler gauge 1
6 BA48-J16 Mixer alignment lever 1
7 BA24-J05 BA24 mixer horizontal 1

position alignment
cuvette
8 BA40-J76 Mixer wash well 1

alignment fixture

No Code Name Image/Precision Quantity

9 898-000321- Pseudo cuvette for auto 1
00 wash station alignment
10 BA48-J12 Sample probe wash well 1

alignment tool
11 BA24-J03 Reagent carousel bar 1

code reader alignment
tool
12 / Clearance gauge 0.5mm~0.8mm 1

7.1.3 Mechanical Reset
Alignment methods and procedure:
1 Install the pseudo probe (BA60-J07), and block the collision sensor with folded thick
paper.
2 Access the Alignment window and select Mech Reset to reset the mechanical parts of
the system.

7.2 Alignment Procedure

Start
Install operating
Preparations Power on Log on
software
Alignment of photoelectric
Photoelectric
photoelectric signal collecting
Gain
unit position
Alignment of Bar Code

Bar Code
Bar code Reader Position
Stability Test
unit(Optional) Adjustment
Reaction Carousel Sample/Reagent Sample/Reagent Sample/Reagent

Alignment of
Circumferential Carousel Outer Ring Carousel Middle Ring Carousel Inner Ring
Sample/Reagent
Position Circumferential Circumferential Circumferential
Carousel
Adjustment Position Position Position
Mixer to Horizontal Mixer Height. Make Mixer to

Alignment of
Position on sure the sample Horizontal
mixer mixing position
Reaction Carousel Wash Position
Probe to Horizontal Probe to horizontal

Probe to Horizontal Probe to horizontal position
Alignment of position on sample/
and Vertical Positions Position on Reaction on sample/reagent carousel
reagent carousel middle
mixer Carousel outer ring
on Wash Well ring
Probe to Vertical Probe to horizontal

Probe Rotary to ISE position on sample/
Limit Position in Probe Cuvette Height reagent carousel inner
(Optional)
Reagent Bottle ring
Probe Rotary to SIC

Height (Optional)
Alignment of Cuvette Wash Station Cuvette Wash Station

wash station Home Height
Preparations
Alignment of Floater/valve Fluidic
before Syringe Check
fluidic unit check Prime
Alignment
Reaction
Alignment of Reaction Temp Wash Solution Reagent
Carousel
Pyrology Unit Sensors Tempe Curve refrigeration test
Heating
End
Figure 7-2 Alignment Procedure
7.3 Photometric Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Photometer Unit. The window is as shown below.

Figure 7-3 The window of Photometric unit
7.3.1 Best Alignment Position Configuration

Find the parameters of signal collecting optimal cuvettes segment, auto wash optical cuvettes segment, forward
and reversed maximum deviating cuvettes segment in the parameters list. Input the parameters and click
Configure. Click Search to check if the parameter configuration is correct.
Figure 7-4 Best Alignment Cuvette Segment Configuration
7.3.2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
1) The signal of No.3 cuvette of the optical cuvettes segment is within the two boundary lines.
2) The wave forms of the photoelectric signal of the 12 channels are neat and almost identical.
1) The position sensor of the reaction carousel is located on the right of the analyzer. Remove the right
panel before alignment.
2) Loosen the three M3 screws on the sensor with a wrench. Select Signal Collecting Position
Adjustment to display the alignment window.

Reaction carousel
position sensor
Figure 7-5 Reaction carousel position sensor

3) Make sure the lamp has been turned on for over 1 minute. If not, wait for 1 minute, and then select
Start to proceed to the next step.
4) A window pops up to prompt you to add 200 µl DI water with pipettor in the designated cuvette. Select
Next.
5) Observe the waveforms in the upper part of the window and check if the photoelectric signal meets
the alignment requirement. See the figure below. If not, adjust the photocoupler.
The green box must

be within the two
red lines.
Figure 7-6 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment

 If you want to adjust the position of optical coupler. Loosen the three M3 hexagon screws on
the optical coupler bracket. Use a wrench to knock the sensor gently to adjust clockwise the
position of the sensor and the green box moves right. If you adjust the position counter
clockwise, the green box moves left. After position adjustment, tighten slightly the screws and
click re-align. The software restarts testing.
 If the photocoupler is in a proper position, select Done without any adjustment.
6) Tighten the screws.
7) After confirming the signal collecting position, select Start at the bottom of the window to test
photoelectric signal of all channels. Make sure the wave forms of the photoelectric signal of the 12
channels are neat and almost identical.

7.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment

Alignment index:
1) The water blank is 50000～54000.The gain of 340nm channel is ≥102.The gain of other channels is ≥31
and the gain of 340nm channel must be within the lower limit of 31~76 at the same time.
2) The dark current of all channels is within 1~300.
Alignment methods and steps:
1) Click Photoelectric Gain Adjustment. The window pops up.
Figure 7-7 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment

2) Make sure that the lamp has been turned on for over 3 minutes. If it has, select Done; otherwise, wait
for 3 minutes.
3) According to the prompt of step 4, add 200 uL DI water into No. 1~5 cuvettes of No.1 cuvettes segment.
4) The photoelectric gain is adjusted automatically. When adjustment is complete, select Done.
5) Select Continue to test the dark current and the water blank AD of each channel.
6) Select Continue to finish the alignment and exit the procedure.
Note
 Ensure that the screws on the bracket of the position sensor of the reaction
carousel have been tightened.
 Alignment parameters can be saved only after each procedure is complete.
Another alignment is required if a procedure is terminated. If the parameter is not
successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range will be displayed by
the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.
 If the water blank exceeds the upper limit（Light intensity is too weak）, adjust the
position of the fiber Bunch as shown in the figure below and then align again.

Loosen the hexagon socket head Note: If the light

cap screw slightly, push the Fiber intensity is too
Bunch in the direction of the strong, you can move
figure, and then tighten. it in the opposite
direction as shown by
Fiber Bunch the arrow
Figure 7-8 Adjust the fiber bunch position
7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Sample/Reagent Carousel. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-9 The window of Sample/Reagent Carousel Unit
7.4.1 Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
The probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the through-hole on the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-
J04).

Operation methods and steps:
Figure 7-10 Alignment procedure

1) Select Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment and then operate according to the
screen prompts.
2) Select Continue to reset all mechanical parts of the whole unit.
3) Place Cuvette alignment fixture BA24-J04 on the 37# and 31# cuvettes.
4) Adjust the position of probe to the reaction carousel.
a) See Figure 3-29 Replacing vertical motor assembly Tighten slightly the screwon the probe
arm till the extent that the arm cannot swing freely but the arm can rotate when you push it
with your hand. Note: If the arm can rotate independently, the alignment position is not
correct. Do not let the motor rotate when you push the arm with your hand otherwise exit the
alignment procedure and align again.
b) Click the button on the software window to move the probe above the dispensing position on
the reaction carousel. Rotate the arm with your hand and check if the probe can pass through
the center hole of the fixture on the two cuvettes otherwise adjust the probe's radial position
and reaction carousel's circumferential position parameters. The left and right arrow on the
window can adjust the circumferential position of the reaction carousel. After the probe's
radial position is confirmed, tighten the screw.

BA24-J04
BA60-J07
Reaction carousel's orbit
The crossover point of Reaction

carousel's orbit and probe's orbit
Probe's orbit
Figure 7-11 Reaction Carousel Circumferential Position Adjustment

c) Select Continue to proceed to the next step.
5) Click Continue. Check the position of the probe in dispensing position and diluting position.
6) Select Continue. The alignment is complete. Select Exit to close the window.
Note
 The alignment tools will be used in following alignment. Do not remove them.
 The left arrow button is equivalent to rotating clockwise and the right arrow button
rotating counterclockwise.
 When selecting Large Step, you can set up the concrete steps according to the
reference range.
 Once the probe arm length is determined, it must not be adjusted during alignment
of probes and carousels.
 If the probe arm length is changed, the probe and carousel units should be aligned
again.
 If you loosen the two fixing hex socket screws of the probe rocker arm, you need
to adjust the horizontal position of the probe to the reaction carousel, the wash well
and the reagent carousel. If the debugging is out of range, it is possible to rotate
when the rocker arm is fixed. Over the rocker arm, you need to re-adjust and fix
the rocker arm.
7.4.2 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position

Alignment index:
The sample probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the central hole of the sample/reagent position
alignment tool (BA48-J10) in 1#, 19# and 37# positions of the outer ring.


1) Select Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position, and then operate
according to the screen prompts.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool BA48-J10 in position #1, #19 and #37 of the sample/reagent
carousel, and then select Continue. Click Continue.
The probe tip can pass

through the central hole
of the alignment tool.
BA48-J10
Figure 7-13 sample position alignment tool

3) Loosen the arm screw a little so that the probe arm cannot rotate freely but can be rotated by hands.
If the arm rotates freely, the adjusted position will be inaccurate. Do not move the motor when rotating
the probe arm. If the motor moves, exit the window and access again.
4) Manually rotate the probe arm to1# position of the sample/reagent carousel outer ring, and click the
up and down arrow buttons to stop the probe at the visually nearest position above the fixture. Check
if the probe tip is aligned with the middle of the through-hole. If it is not, manually rotate the arm to the
crossing point in circumferential direction of the sample/reagent carousel outer ring, and click the left
and right arrow buttons to adjust the probe's circumferential position on the outer ring, so that the
probe tip can pass through the central hole of the fixture in 1# position.

The 4 arrows are

used to control the
probe.
The 2 arrows are used to

control the carousel.
Figure 7-14 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position Adjustment

5) Adjust the sample probe in 19# and 37# positions of the sample/reagent carousel outer ring according
to step 3.
7.4.3 Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position
Alignment index:
alignment tool (BA10-J16) in 1#, 19# and 37# positions of the middle ring.
1) Select Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool BA10-J16 in position #1, #19 and #37 of the sample/reagent
carousel, and then select Continue.
3) Adjust the sample probe in 1#, 19# and 37# positions of the sample/reagent carousel middle ring
according to step 4 of Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position.
7.4.4 Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position
Alignment index:
alignment tool (BA10-J16) in 51#, 69# and 87# positions of the inner ring.
1) Select Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool BA10-J16 in position #51, #69and #87 of the sample carousel,
and then select Continue.
3) Adjust the sample probe in #51, #69and #87 positions of the sample/reagent carousel inner ring

according to step 4 of Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position.

Note
 When the alignment is complete, there is no need to take out the alignment tool.
7.5 Probe unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Probe Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-15 The window of probe unit
7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the through-hole on the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-
J04).


1) Select Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel.
2) Place the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-J04) in 37# and 31# position of the reaction carousel, and
then select Continue.
3) Select the down arrow button to lower the probe to above the alignment fixture so that it can align with
the central hole.
4) Adjust the circumferential position of the probe arm and ensure that the probe can enter the central
hole on the fixture. Press the probe arm and tighten the screws on it. If error exists, click the left and
right arrow buttons to adjust the probe till it meets the requirement.
BA24-J04
Figure 7-17 The cuvette alignment fixture

5) Select Continue and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If the index is not
satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
6) Select Continue and move the probe to above 31# position. Click up and down arrow to lower the
probe to above the alignment tool and make sure probe tip can pass through the central hole of the
fixture otherwise click left and right arrow to adjust the parameters until the requirement is met.
7) Select Continue and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If the index is not
satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
8) Select Continue to save parameters and exit the window.

7.5.2 Probe to Horizontal and Vertical Positions on Wash Well

Alignment index:
1) Horizontal position:The probe tip can enter the central hole on the wash well alignment tool (BA48-J12)
and the gap between the probe’s wash well and the fixture shell is even.
2) Vertical position: When reaching the bottom of the central hole on the wash well alignment fixture (BA48-
J12), the probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through
the gap between the sensor plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.

1) Select Probe to Horizontal and Vertical Positions on Wash Well.
2) According to Step 2 on the screen, place a wash well alignment tool (BA48-J12) in the probe wash
well, and then select Continue.
3) Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the probe till it lowers into the center on the
alignment fixture. If the probe is greatly deviating from the alignment tool, use a big cross head
screwdriver to loosen the screws on the wash well or the bracket of the wash well, adjust the wash
well till the probe can enter to the central hole on the alignment tool, and then tighten the screws.

Use the clearance gauge to measure

the gap here and keep it away from
BA48-J12 the slit on the photocoupler side. The
soldering lug is deformable and may
affect the measurement.
Criteria: The clearance gauge can
pass with 0.15mm and cannot pass
with 0.2mm.
Figure 7-19 Probe to Horizontal and Vertical Positions on Wash Well

4) Confirm the alignment result. If the requirements are not met, return to Step 3.
5) Adjust the probe's vertical position above the wash well by using the up and down arrow buttons.
Check that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm and cannot pass with 0.20mm.
6) Check the vertical position. If the requirements are not met, return to Step 5.
7) Remove the alignment tool according to screen prompts.
7.5.3 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring
Alignment index:
The probe tip can enter the central hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in 1#, 19# and 37# positions of the
sample/reagent carousel outer ring.

1) Select Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in position #1, #19 and #37 on the outer ring of the
sample/reagent carousel, and then select Continue.
3) Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the probe so that it can enter into the central
hole on the alignment tool.
7.5.4 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring
Alignment index:

sample/reagent carousel middle ring.
1) Select Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring.
2) Place a sample position alignment tool (BA10-J16) in position #1, #19 and #37 on the middle ring of
the sample/reagent carousel, and then select Continue.
7.5.5 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring
Alignment index:
sample/reagent carousel inner ring.
1) Select Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring.
2) Place a reagent position alignment tool (BA10-J16) in position #51, #69 and #87 on the inner ring of
the sample/reagent carousel, and then select Continue.
7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel
Alignment index:
When reaching the cuvette bottom, the probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that the clearance gauge can
pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.

1) Select Probe to vertical limit position on reantion carousel.
2) Check that cuvettes are loaded in 37#, 64# and 11# positions of the reaction carousel.
3) Adjust the probe over the 3 cuvette positions, and ensure that the lifting height meets the requirement.
7.5.7 Probe to Vertical Limit Position in Reagent Bottle
Alignment index:

When reaching the bottom of the reagent bottle, the probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that the clearance
gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the arm base and it cannot pass
with 0.20mm.
1) Select Probe to Vertical Limit Position in Reagent Bottle.
2) Load the reagent bottle in 1#, 19# and 37# position on the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
3) Adjust the probe over the 3 reagent positions, and ensure that the lifting height meets the requirement.
7.5.8 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part (Optional)
Alignment index:
The probe has its tip above the ISE sample injection port but deviates slightly from the central hole. The probe
tip should not contact with the inwall of the sample inject port.

1) Ensure the ISE has been installed.
2) Select Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part.
3) According to Step 3, select the down arrow button to lower the probe to above the ISE sample injection
port. Select the left/right arrow buttons to adjust the probe radially till it is 1mm away from the center
of the sample injection port or deviating slightly from the central hole. The probe tip should not contact
with the inwall of sample inject port.
4) If the probe fails by adjusting parameters, loose the screws fixing the ISE module on the chassis, and
then move it till requests are met.
5) If the problem still remains, use a cross head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ISE module and
move it till requests are met.
6) The operation in Step 3 is verified in Step 4. If requirements are not met, return to Step 3.
7.5.9 Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part (Optional)
Alignment index:
The probe has its tip level with the third transition line in the sample injection cup.


1) Check if the Probe Rotary to ISE alignment has been completed.
2) Select Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part.
3) According to Step 3 on the screen, select the up/down arrow buttons to make the probe tip level with
the third transition line inside the sample injection cup. (You can see three transition lines, and the
probe tip shall be level with the one at the bottom, as shown in the figure below.)
Probe tip levels

with this line
Figure 7-24 Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part
Note
 Alignment of each position is verified the next step.
Another alignment is required if a procedure is terminated.
 If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range
will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.

7.6 Mixer Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Mixer Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-25 The window of Mixer Unit
7.6.1 Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The mixer (mixer alignment lever BA48-J16) can pass the through hole of the mixer horizontal position alignment
cuvette (BA24-J05) in position 16# and 24# of the reaction carousel.


1) Install the mixer alignment fixture BA48-J16, and then select Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction
Carousel.
BA48-J16:
Alignment
lever
(inserted to
the end)
Figure 7-27 mixer alignment fixture

2) Place the mixer horizontal position alignment fixture (BA24-J05) in position 16# and 24# of the reaction
carousel.
3) According to Step 3 on the screen, adjust the mixer position to align with 16# cuvette.
a) Click the Up and down arrow to move the mixer to above the fixture.
b) When the mixer aligns with the center of the fixture, use M3 Hexagon wrench to
pretighten the screw to the extent that the arm cannot swing freely but the
arm can rotate when you push it with your hand.
c) Rotate the arm downward and pretighten the screw and then rotate it upward and
then tighten the radial screw.

Because the radial

screw is located at
the lower side, you
need to rotate the BA48-J16
mixer to leave
enough space to
tighten the radial
screw.
BA24-J05
Figure 7-28 Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

d) Move the mixer to above the reaction carousel fixture and tighten the
circumferential screw.
4) If the lever is not correct horizontally, select the left/right arrow buttons in Step 4 to adjust so that it can
align with the alignment tool.
6) Select Continue, remove the fixture and store it properly.
7.6.2 Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel
Alignment index:
The lever lowers into the cuvette, the gap between which the go gauge of the mixer alignment tool (BA80-J20-
001) can pass and the no-go gauge cannot.

1) Select Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel. Make sure the mixing position is holding a
cuvette instead of alignment tool.
2) Select Continue. After the system resets mechanically, the sample mixer moves into the cuvette.
3) Select the up/down arrow buttons, and insert the alignment tool (BA80-J20-001) between the mixer's
straight-knurled column and cuvette edge. Gently push the alignment tool to observe if the Go Gauge
can easily pass while the No-go Gauge cannot.

The Go Gauge (thinner

side) can easily pass while
the No-go Gauge (thicker
side) cannot.
Figure 7-30 Mixer to Vertical Position on Reaction Carousel

7.6.3 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position
Alignment index:
The mixer (mixer alignment lever BA48-J16) can enter the through hole of the wash well alignment fixture
(BA40-J76) and the gap between the probe’s wash well and the fixture shell is even.

1) Select Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position.
2) Select Continue. Place fixture BA40-J76 in the mixer wash well.
3) Click the up and down arrow to move the mixer alignment tool to above the wash well fixture. Click left
and right arrow to make the mixer alignment tool align with the center hole of the wash well fixture. If
deviation exists, loosen the screw of the wash well to adjust the position of the wash well till the
requirements are met.
BA40-J76

Figure 7-32 Mixer to Horizontal Wash Position

5) Remove the fixture. Select Continue to save parameters and exit the window. Install the real mixer.
7.7 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Unit
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Wash Station. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-33 The window of Wash station
7.7.1 Cuvette Wash Station Home

Alignment index:
The wash probes can pass through the hole of the wash probe fixture 898-000321-00 and no obstruction exists.


1) Select Cuvette Wash Station Home.
2) Remove the cuvette segment of the optimal cuvette position and place the fixture. Click Continue.
3) According to Step 3 on the screen, use an M4 hexagon wrench to loosen the two screws on the wash
probe conversion board, adjust the wash probes till the wipe blocks can move vertically in the hole of
the alignment tool, and the wash probes of other phases are in the center of the cuvettes. When
requests are met, tighten the two screws gradually. Exercise caution to prevent deforming the probes.
two screws on the wash

898-000321-00
probe conversion board

Figure 7-35 Alignment of Wash Station

4) Remove the alignment tool and install the cuvette segment. Click the up and down arrow to move the
wash probes. The wash probes move smoothly and do not interfere with the interior of the cuvette. If
the requirement is not met, return to step 3 and align again.
5) In Step 5, the reaction carousel rotates to the forward maximum deviating cuvette position. Click the
up and down arrow buttons to move the wash station so that the wipe block and wash probes are in
the center of the cuvettes and can move smoothly.
6) In Step 6, the reaction carousel rotates to the reversed maximum deviating cuvette position. Click the
up and down arrow buttons to move the wash station so that the wipe block and wash probes are in
the center of the cuvettes and can move smoothly.
7.7.2 Cuvette Wash Station Height
Alignment index: When the wash station lowers to the vertical washing position, the wash probes bounce for
0.7 to 0.8mm, which means that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.7mm through the gap between the anti-
collision blocks and the wash station bracket and it cannot pass with 0.8mm.

1) Select Cuvette Wash Station Height.
2) Check if the wipe blocks can insert into the center of each cuvette. Select Continue.
3) When the wash probes move vertically to the bottom of the cuvettes, make them contact the cuvette
bottom, and select Small Step or Large Step. Adjust the probes with the up/down arrow buttons while
measuring the lifting height with 0.7mm and 0.8mm clearance gauge. Make sure the smallest gap
between the anti-rotation blocks and the wash station bracket can let go a 0.7mm clearance gauge
but 0.8mm gauge cannot pass the gap.
4) Verify Step 3. If requests are not met, return to Step 3, and select the up/down arrow buttons to adjust
the mixer till requests are met.
7.8 Bar Code Unit (Optional)
7.8.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements
1) The bar code label should be clear, and not vague, dirty or scratched.
2) The sample bar code label should be stuck upright and plane and9mm away from the tube bottom.

Bar
Sample tube
code
area
9mm
Figure 7-37 The sample bar code Sticking Requirements

3) The reagent bar code label should be stuck in the front side below the bottle opening, and in
the middle of the vertical and horizontal directions.
Do not stick to the

corner
Do not stick to the

corner
Figure 7-38 The reagent bar code Sticking Requirements
7.8.2 Bar code Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Bar code unit. The window is as shown below.

Figure 7-39 The window of Bar Code Unit
7.8.3 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
1) The light beam transmitted from the bar code reader can pass through the sample bar code slot and the
reagent bar code slot on the bar code reader alignment tool (BA24-J03).
2) The bar code in 1~5# on the outer ring and 1~5# positions on the middle ring of the sample/reagent
carousel can be identified correctly and completely and displayed on the screen.
1) Select Bar Code Reader Adjustment.

2) Use cross screw driver to remove the tube holder in 14# and 15# position on the outer ring and place
the bar code alignment tool BA24-J03(The slot facing the outside of the carousel. )Click Continue.
Insert the positioning

Reagent bar code
pin at the lower side of
scanning slot
the BA24-J03 into the
two holes after the tube
holder is removed.
Sample bar code

scanning slot
Figure 7-41 Bar Code Reader Position Adjustment 1

3) Loosen the four screws of the bar code reader and its bracket. Adjust the angle of the light beam to
make it pass through the sample bar code slot. Use the left and right arrow on the software screen
to adjust the position until the parameters of the sample/reagent carousel meet the requirement.
Place a white paper in

front of the alignment tool.
When all the scanning
light passes through the
slot, a complete straight
Adjust the screw here (two line will fall on the paper.
more at the lower side) to
adjust the bar code reader
position.

4) Check again if the light goes through the slot on the fixture. If not, return to previous step to make
adjustment till requests are met.
5) Remove the alignment tool. Place the bar coded sample tube and reagent bottle respectively in 1~5#
position on the outer ring and middle ring. When the bar code is scanned, the bar code reader indicator
turns yellow-green and the software screen prompts the identification rate is ≥80%. Scan the bar codes
and check if the bar codes are correctly identified.
When bar code is

identified, the indicator
here turns yellow-green.
When no bar code is
scanned, it is red.

6) If all bar code cannot be read, check if the light direction meets the requirement and the bar code
reader works normally.

7.8.4 Bar Code Stability Test

Alignment index:
1) When the sample/reagent carousel rotates for several circles, the bar code identified in the same position
should be the same.
2) The bar code in all positions of the sample/reagent carousel can be identified correctly and completely and
displayed on the screen. Randomly choose 3 bar code on the outer ring and inner ring, and check that the
bar code displayed on the screen is same as that on the bar code label.
1) Place bar-coded sample tubes in position 1-50# on the outer ring and bar coded reagent bottles in
position 1#-50# on the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
2) Select Bar Code Stability Test, set the scan circle as 10, and select Start.
3) After scanning, check if the identified bar code meets the requirement. If different bar code is read in
the same position, the position will be indicated in red.
4) If the stability test fails, find the reasons and take actions according to the following probabilities:
a) Check if the failed bar code meets the printing standard, the bar code label is not tilting, dirty or
damaged and has been applied in correct position.
b) Check if the glass scanning window is clean without contamination.
c) The scanning window is not blocked by the sponge cushion.
d) If none of the above happens, replace the bar code reader, adjust it properly and do the test again.
e) Generally, the three methods above are enough to troubleshoot the problem.
Note
 Check that the sponge cushion seals the bar code reader completely without
blocking the scanning light. Otherwise, adjust the bar code reader again.
 After alignment, check if the screws on the bar code reader and conversion board
have been tightened.
7.9 Hydropneumatic Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-44 The window of Hydro Unit
7.9.1 Preparations before Alignment

1) Check if all tubes have been connected correctly.
2) Check if the wash tubes on the 4-phase wash probes assembly have been connected properly. If not,
first connect the 4-phase aspirating tubes. Visually check that the 4-phase aspirating tubes are

inserted with the same depth and not twisted, and all tubes are smooth without crossover or protrusion.
3) Check if the solenoid valves have been connected to the correct cables.
4) The diluted wash solution tank holds sufficient diluted wash solution.
Cuvette Type Dilution ratio of diluted wash solution 1
Plastic Cuvette 9 portions of DI water:1 portion of concentrated
wash solution
5) Fill the water tank with sufficient water.
6) Connect the water supply tube to the analyzer, and connect the high-/low-concentration waste tanks.
7) Check if the inlet filter assembly has been installed.
8) Remove the pseudo probe from the probe arm, and install the real probe instead.
Installation requirements:
1) Gap between the probe plate and the arm surface is not allowed. Otherwise, check the retaining bolt
and tube, because the tube's elasticity will also affect the probe's bouncing;
2) A washer has been applied on the retaining bolt, and the nut has been tightened;
3) After fixing the probe with bolt and spring, manually lift the probe and release it, and check that the
probe can bounce back freely through the spring;
4) Adjust the level sense board and the relative positions of the probe plate and photocoupler so that the
probe plate is in the middle of the photocoupler.
7.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status
Figure 7-45 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment

Manually switch the floater status one by one according to the table below, and then select Query to refresh the
floater status. Check if the actual fluid level of each container is the same as the status displayed on the screen.
Tank Name Floater Status Screen
Display
Water tank, Diluted Wash Solution Floater triggered (high level) Not empty
Tank
Water tank, Diluted Wash Solution Floater not triggered (low Empty
Tank level)
High Concentration Waste Tank Floater triggered (high level) Full
High Concentration Waste Tank Floater not triggered (low Not Full
level)

When the valve voltage is normal

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Valve/Floater/Pump
Alignment,see Figure 7-45 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment,select the
corresponding valve to Turn on/Turn off, and you can hear the crisp sound.
2) The valve is powered by DC 12V, the multimeter is adjusted to DC, the black probe is grounded,
and the red probe measures the red and black wires respectively.
Valve Red wire voltage Black wire voltage
Turn on 12V 0V
Turn off 12V 12V
When the Pump voltage is normal

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Valve/Floater/Pump
Alignment,see Figure 7-45 The window of Valve/Floater/Pump Alignment,select the
corresponding Pump to Turn on, and you can feel the vibration of the pump by hand.
2) The Pump is powered by DC 12V, the multimeter is adjusted to DC, the black probe is grounded,
and the red probe measures the red and black wires respectively.
Pump Red wire voltage Black wire voltage
Turn on 12V 0V
Turn off 12V 12V
7.9.3 Syringe Check
1) Select Syringe Check.
2) Click DI Water Syringe and Wash Solution Syringe successively. No alarm means that the syringes
are OK.
Figure 7-46 The window of Syringe Check
7.9.4 Fluidic Prime

1) Select Fluidic Prime.

Figure 7-47 The window of Fluidic Prime

2) Check the outlet tube is connected and remove the wash probes and put it into an empty container.
3) Click Continue and Start to perform auto prime until the flow of phase 1-3 probes is continuous. Click
Stop and OK to move to the next step. If the prime is not successfully completed, set the prime cycle
again.
Figure 7-48 prime wash station

4) Install the wash station and execute auto wash according to the software prompt. Make sure no
overflow occurs.

5) Click Continue. According to software screen, perform mixer exterior wash until the mixer wash well
can spray water continuously. Click Stop and OK to move to the next step.
Figure 7-49 Clean/Prime Mixer Exterior

6) Click Continue. According to software screen, perform probe interior/exterior wash until the probe
wash well can spray water continuously. Click Stop and OK to move to the next step.
Note: If the probe syringe has air bubbles, please remove the probe syringe and push and pull syringe
plunger repeatedly until air bubbles are removed completely from syringe. Click Stop and then re-install the
syringe. Making the V-shape slot level to scale 7.5 of the syringe. Click OK to move to the next step. Note: when
removing the syringe, do not drop the washer.
Figure 7-50 Clean/Prime Probe Interior and Exterior&Probe syringe

7) Select Continue to reset the mechanical parts for 3 times. Check that the mechanical parts are moving
normally.
8) Select Continue.
9) Select Exit to finish the alignment procedure. Select Maintenance -> Parameters -> Parameter
Configuration->Wash Unit to check if the value of “is fluidic prime performed” is 1. If yes, the
prime is successful.
7.9.5 Mixer Wash Flow Test
Alignment index:100~120ml/min
Tools: measuring bottle,empty container
1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Mixer Wash Flow Test.
Remove the connector at the mixer wash tubes and place the waste tube into the empty container.

Remove the connector

and put it into the empty
container
Figure 7-51 The tube of Mixer Wash Flow Test

2) After confirming that the action on the prompt dialog has been completed, click "OK".
Figure 7-52 Mixer Wash Flow Test 1

3) Set the wash time to 60 seconds, click “Start”, after the water is stopped, pour the water in the container
into the measuring bottle, it must be between 100~120ml.
Figure 7-53 Mixer Wash Flow Test 2

4) If the flow meets the test target, restore the tube; if not, follow the steps below:
a) Check the mixer outer wall wash tube is correct, the inner diameter of the tube is about 8mm.

b) The mixer outer wall wash tube D22 can be properly corrected and retested until the requirements are
met. The D22 tube correction method is as follows:
Flow(mL/min) Tube length（cm）
＞120 60
90~100 30
80~90 25
c) If there is no problem with the piping, replace P01.
7.9.6 Probe interior Wash Flow Test
Alignment index:＞40ml/min,no liquid sputtering.
Tools: measuring bottle,empty container
1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit—> Probe interior Wash Flow Test.
Place a container below the probe.
Figure 7-54 Probe interior Wash Flow Test 1

2) Set the wash time to 60 seconds, click “Start”, after the water is stopped, pour the water in the
container into the measuring bottle, it must be above 40ml.
Figure 7-55 Probe interior Wash Flow Test 2

3) If the flow does not meets the test target, Check if the tube is clogged or damaged.
If the tube is OK,replace P01.
7.9.7 the volume of the reaction liquid during cuvette washing process
Alignment index: Afte the Auto Wash is cleaned, the amount of liquid remaining in the reaction cup, the
liquid level is 5-10 mm from the reaction cup opening.
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Reaction Carousel Temperature
Curve. The window is as shown below.

Figure 7-56 The window of Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve

2) In the red box above, enter the number of Auto Wash 5 cycle, click to start.
3) Observe the action during cleaning. After the cleaning mechanism is lifted, the distance between the
liquid in the reaction cuvette and the cuvette mouth should be 5-10mm. If it is not good to watch, the
corresponding reaction cuvette can be taken out after the end to check the liquid volume of the reaction
cuvette.
4) If the cuvette has a small amount of liquid, check the infusion line and fittings.
If the cuvette contains too much liquid or overflows, check if the aspiration is normal.
7.10 Pyrology Unit
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit. The window is as shown below.
Figure 7-57 The window of Pyrology Unit
7.10.1 Configuration of Sensor Parameters

Alignment index: Configure the parameters correctly according to the rated values of the reaction carousel
sensors, and configure the △AD value of temperature sensors.
1) Select Sensor Configuration.

2) According to the sequence number on the temperature sensor, contact the headquarters to find the
resistance of rated temperature points (0, 37 and 100), select sensor 1 and input the resistance for
each temperature point, and then select Calculate.
3) When a dialog box pops up indicating qualified sensor, select Configure to configure the parameters
to the relevant sensor.
4) Observe the △AD value of PCB, and input it in the edit boxes at lower-right corner of the window for
sensor 1. Select Configure, and then select Search to verify them.
5) When configuration is complete, select Exit.
Figure 7-58 The window of Sensor Parameters
7.10.2 Observe Temperature Curve

Alignment index:
The reaction carousel temperature is within 36.7~37.3 ℃ and reagent preheating temperature is within
43~47 ℃.
5) Select Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve.
6) Select Turn on heater.
7) Select Sensor temperature curve 1(reaction carousel heating curve).Select Start in the temperature
curve area. Check the reaction carousel temperature curve for 1 minute when the curve is steady and
the temperature reaches 37℃. The curve of sensor is straight and stable with value within 36.7~37.3℃.
8) Check the reagent preheating curve in the same way. Sensor temperature curve 2 is the reagent
preheating curve.
9) Select Stop. Select Exit to close the window.

Figure 7-59 Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve
7.10.3 Wash Solution Temperature Control

Alignment index:
The temperature of cleaning fluid and wash solution is within 39℃-49℃.
1) Select Wash Station on the Parameter Configuration window, and check that the value of Fluidic Prime
Complete is 1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Wash Solution
Temp Curve.
2) Select Deionized Water Heater and Wash Solution Heater, and then select Turn On.
3) Select Start in the temperature curve area, and then observe if the temperature curves of cleaning
fluid and wash solution are straight and steady (for 2 minutes according to the computer time). Check
that the average temperature of cleaning fluid and wash solution is within 39℃-49℃.
4) Select Stop. Select Exit to close the window.
Figure 7-60 Wash Solution Temp Curve

7.10.4 Reagent refrigeration assembly

Alignment Index: Reagent refrigeration temperature is 2~12℃).
Methods and procedure:
1) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Rgt Refrig Temp Curve. Click Start.
When the temperature is steady, check the Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Curve for 1 minute. Its
value must be within the target range.
Figure 7-61 Rgt Refrig Temp Curve

2) If the cooler is replaced, select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit ->Reagent
refrigeration Alignment. Click configure otherwise the cooler will not work.
Figure 7-62 Reagent refrigeration Alignment
7.11 ISE Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> ISE Unit. The window is as shown below.

Figure 7-63 ISE unit Alignment
7.11.1 Module Intialization

Handshake:
When the ISE module shakes hand with the system, click "Start". When data returns "<ISE!>", the data is
displayed on the display bar and the next line displays "Handshake successful" indicating that the module is
normally communicated with the system, as shown in the figure below.
Purger A:
a) On the Purge A interface, define the parameters as below, interval time: 5S, cycle count: 30 times.
b) Click "Start" and wait until "<ISE!>" returns on the current data display area, indicating that a calibrator
A purging cycle is completed. During this, pump A and waste liquid pump rotate clockwise and pump
liquid out. Repeat the operation above for several times and you can see that calibrator A tube is
gradually filled with liquid and drained to the dispensing port.
c) In this case, click "Stop". The software will stop purging after the current calibrator A purging cycle is
completed.
d) If no liquid flow is detected or liquid flow is slow after several executions, check whether the hose
connector is properly and reliably connected and whether the peristaltic pump works normally.
Purge B:
The operator for "Purge B" is the same as that for "Purge A".
Air Bubble Detector Calibration:
a) Click "Start" under Part Check - Pump Check.
b) After calibration, wait until the current data display area returns calibrated data (data format: <BBC A
xxx M xxx L xxx>). The next line displays "Air bubble detector calibrated", indicating the debugging is
successful.
c) If the current data display area displays calibrated data as <ERC BBC x000000>, the next line displays
"specific error" (marked with red text) according to the returned error code. For error codes, Table 7-3
ISE Error Codes..
Pump Check:
a) Place a test tube filled with deionized water in the W position of the sample carousel;
b) Click "Start" under Part Check - Pump Check.
c) Operate as instructed on the screen. After calibration is complete, wait until the current data display
area returns data as <PMC A xxxx B xxxx W xxxx> (each value shall fall in between 1500 and 3000),
and the next line displays "Pump Check Correctly", indicating that the debugging is successful.

d) If the current data display area returns calibrated data as <ERC PMC x000000>. For x, see Appendix.
The next line displays "specific error" (marked with red text). For error codes, see Table 7-3 ISE Error
Codes.
Wash:
Prepara sufficient wash solution in the sample carousel (usage in each wash operation is 100 ul), and then input
the level of the wash solution in the cuvette in "Set liquid level in cuvette", and click "Clean". Wait until the data
area returns <ISE!> (wait for about 160 s). The next line displays "Clean completed", including the wash is
complete.
Two-point calibration:
a) Click "Start" in the "Two-point calibration" area to display the confirmation dialog for fluidic tube wash.
If it is possible to check that the last wash operation has been waited for more than 15 min, directly
click OK; otherwise, wait until the countdown time ends.
b) After the countdown time ends, automatically execute the two-point calibration testing. After the testing
is complete, the current data display area returns the calibration result "< Na xx.xx K xx.xx Cl xx.xx
xxxxxxxx>". ;
c) If an error code displays during calibration, repeat several times of two-point calibration. If the problem
persists, replace the corresponding electrode reporting error as instructed by error message. For error
codes, see Table 7-3 ISE Error Codes.
7.11.2 ISE Error Codes

Note: Error codes will be affixed to result strings. An error code is in format of 7 ASCII characters, such as
<1234567>. Each digit represents a specific meaning, as shown below:
Table 7-3 ISE Error Codes
Digit #1 Digit #2 Digit #3 Digit #4 Digit #5 Digit #6 Digit #7

Error Type (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Air bubble included S 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the sample
Air bubble included A 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the calibrator A
Air bubble included B 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the calibrator B
Air bubble included C 0 0 0 0 0 0
in the wash
solution
Air in Segment M 0 0 0 0 0 0
Pump calibration P 0 0 0 0 0 0
error
No fluid in F 0 0 0 0 0 0
electrode pipes
Air bubble D 0 0 0 0 0 0
monitoring error
Chip reading error R 0 0 0 0 0 0
Chip writting error W 0 0 0 0 0 0
Saving calibration Q 0 0 0 0 0 0
result error
Command error T 0 0 0 0 0 0
No error 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Na+ 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
K+ 0 2 2 2 2 2 2
Na+，K+ 0 3 3 3 3 3 3
Cl- 0 8 8 8 8 8 8
Cl-,Na+ 0 9 9 9 9 9 9

Cl-,K+ 0 A A A A A A
Cl-,K+,Na+ 0 C C C C C C
The error types in the table above are described as below:
1) - Air bubble/hardware;
2) - Electrode voltage overflowed during calibrator B calibration or blood measurement;
3) - Electrode voltage overflowed during two-point calibration or calibrator A calibration in blood
measurement mode, or
4) calibrator B calibration in urine measurement mode;
5) - Electrode voltage noise during calibrator B calibration or blood measurement;
6) - Electrode voltage noise during two-point calibration or calibrator A calibration in blood measurement
mode, or
7) calibrator B calibration in urine measurement mode;
8) - Voltage drift during calibrator A calibration in blood measurement mode, or slope drift
9) during two-point calibration;
10) - Exceeds the slope or module measurement range;

8 Installation
8.1 Installation Procedure
8.1.1 Installation Procedure
The approximate installation procedure of the analyzer is as follows: for your reference:
Table 8-1 Analyzer installation procedure
Classification Main Content Remarks
Before Check if the analyzer and reagents are arrived by telephone, The LIS and water unit
installation check whether the water unit, UPS, LIS, etc. are prepared in are not required
advance, confirm the trainees, and confirm that the arrival
reagents have been refrigerated.
Prepare tools and alignment fixtures
Download relevant information on TDP: latest software (if Please search for the
new software is released, and the version is higher than the specific file path on the
factory analyzer); download the maintenance manual for TDP
backup
Once again, confirm that the above is correct.
During Check the quantity of the goods and confirm whether the In case of any missing,
installation installed reagents are refrigerated. timely give feedback
Checking Packing List
Unpacking Keep boxes and screws
for three months
Transfer the analyzer to the department installation location
Remove the analyzer fixed parts and foam tape Please save the fixed
parts being removed.
Install accessories
Connect the pipeline
Install the PC
Software Installation
Start the analyzer
Adjust the positions
Prime the fluidic system
Set the analyzer, and initialize maintenance records
Apply for testing for performance verification
Record data, and fill in the installation report
Assist the LIS in connection (if any)
Train the customer for operations and simple troubleshooting
Print template settings (refer to the corresponding chapter of
the instruction manual)
Confirm that the analyzer works normally, and the pipeline
and wire are neat and beautiful.
After confirming the above items are correct, accept them
and sign your name
After Regularly visit the customer after installation (not more than The customers whose
installation one week), and take the initiative to care analyzers are newly
installed have more
operational problems
8.1.2 Installation Time Consumption

The estimated time spent in the installation procedure is as follows:
Table 8-2 Estimated time spent in the installation procedure

No. Work Content Time

Consumption
Step1 Confirm the installation environment, water and electricity are About 1 H
qualified, check the quantity of goods, and installed reagents,
and check the packing list
Step2 Disassemble the analyzer and accessory box About 1 H
Step3 Connect the accessories and fluidics system About 0.5 H
Step4 Install the PC About 0.5 H
Step5 Install the software (if the control software should be About 0.5 H
upgraded, about +1H will be required)
Step6 Startup About 0.5 H
Step7 Confirm and adjust the positions About 0.5 H
Step8 Prime the fluidic system About 0.5 H
Setp9 System Setup About 1 H
Step10 Verify performance and test the analyzer with running water About 2 H
Step11 Train the customer for operations and simple troubleshooting About 4 H
Step12 Reconfirm and check the analyzer and software, and perform About 1 H
5S on site
Step13 Other (such as LIS connection, signature and acceptance) About 1 H
Total About 14 H
8.2 Check before Installation

8.2.1 Installation Environment
 Altitude:-400～2,000m
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform should be able to support at least 150Kg weight.
 The bearing ground should be able to support at least 200Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
 The installation site should be kept away from large noise and power supply interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that is frequently switched on
and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.
 Operating temperature: 15°C-30°C with fluctuation <2°C/H.
 Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
 Provide air conditioning equipment if the room temperature does not meet the requirements.
 Install the equipment near a sewer for convenient discharging of waste liquid.
 Dimensions before packing: 860mm(length)×660mm(depth)×550mm(height)
 Dimensions after packing: 1060mm(length)×800mm(depth)×720mm(height)
 Cabinet: 860mm(length)×660mm(depth)×650mm(height)
8.2.2 Configuration Check
 BS-360E analyzer
 Packing list of accessory kit
 Packing list of ISE accessory kit (for ISE module only)
8.3 Installation Requirements
8.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation

Wall
Min. 500 Max. 3,000
Min. 500
Operation Unit
660
Analyzing Unit
Front
860
Min. 500
Min. 500 Unit: mm
Figure 8-1 System Clearance
8.3.2 Power Supply and Noise

 Power supply: 220V: 220-240V~ 50Hz, 220/230V~ 60Hz; 110V: 110/115V~ 60Hz. Voltage fluctuation: +/-
10%. Line frequency: +/-3Hz. Three-wire power cord with good grounding performance (ground voltage ≤
5V).
 The instrument should be powered by a properly-grounded power supply no less than 3000VA, and the
mains socket used to connect the instrument should have its load no less than 10A.
 Keep the instrument at least 2.5m away from the mains socket.
 If you are going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can provide power supply
greater than or equal to 3000VA/2100W.
WARNING
 Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Incorrect grounding may lead
to electric shock or equipment damage.
 Measurement of ground voltage:
 First confirm that the neutral and ground wires cannot be shorted,set the
multimeter to the AC 250V scale, connect the black probe to the earth wire and the
red probe to the live wire and neutral wire. If grounding is proper, the voltage
between earth wire and neutral wire should be less than 5V, and the voltage
between earth wire and live wire should be similar to that between live wire and
neutral wire.
 Check if the power socket outputs voltage meeting the specified requirements and
has a proper fuse installed.
8.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage

 Water quality: resistance no less than 1 (MΩ.cm@25°C) and conductance no more than 1μS/cm.
 Water temperature: 5-32°C.
 The 15L DI water tank is provided for holding DI water.
 DI water tank and diluted wash solution tank are placed on the ground. The tube must not be twisted or
pulled too tight at the middle in case the tube falls off the connector.
 The analyzer discharges high-concentration waste and low-concentration waste separately with high-
concentration waste discharged into a waste tank and low-concentration waste to the sewer or the low
concentration waste tank. Follow the local regulations for waste discharge.
 When Low-concentration waste is discharged to a sewer, the diameter of the discharge outlet must be no
less than 50mm and the height of the discharge outlet must be no higher than 100mm.
 The low-concentration waste tube must be shorter than 5m. The tube must be routed from high to low
smoothly without U shape or V shape twists or turns otherwise the waste liquid may flow back into the
instrument. Refer to the figure below.

Waste outlet Waste outlet Waste outlet
Waste tank Waste tank Waste tank
Waste outlet Waste outlet Waste outlet
Discharge outlet Discharge outlet Discharge outlet
Biohazards
Dispose of liquid waste according to the local regulations.
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet the requirements of water quality; otherwise, unqualified water may result in
incorrect test results.
8.3.4 Computer Requirements

Refer to 6.2.1 Computer Requirements (for International Customers).
8.4 Installing the Analyzer
8.4.1 Unpacking
1) Please check the packing list before unpacking, including: biochemical host, accessory box, deionized
water tank, diluted wash solution tank, high concentration waste tank, low concentration waste tank,
wash solution, ISE module accessory box (optional ISE).
Note: The checklist of the packing list is recorded in the BS360E Installation Acceptance Report,
see Appendix A.1BS-360E Installation Acceptance Report.
2) The main unit of the biochemical analyzer weighs about 120 kg. You are recommended to use the
forklift to remove it from the truck. Check whether the anti-dumping indicator of the main box becomes
red (if so, the analyzer may be dumped).

Figure 8-2 Anti-dumping indicator of main unit box

3) Use a diagonal pliers or scissors to cut the cable tie outside the box and remove the upper cover and
side cover.
Figure 8-3 Remove the main unit box

4) Remove the cabinet from the carton and unscrew the four leveling feet of the analyzer clockwise to
ensure that the four caster wheels of the analyzer are not touching the ground.

Figure 8-4 Remove the cabinet

5) Use a spanner to remove the screws and remove the fixing angle iron to lift the analyzer.
Figure 8-5 Remove the L fixing angle iron

6) Lift the main unit and place it on the bracket to ensure that the leveling feet of the main unit fit the
grooves in the bracket.
Figure 8-6 The leveling feet of the main unit fit the grooves in the bracket
8.4.2 Removing Packaging

1) Open the protective cover of the biochemical analyzer, and remove the tape and shock absorbing
foam on the face shell. Pay special attention that the shock absorbing foam behind the auto wash
mechanism and the foam at the loading syringe should also be taken out.

Figure 8-7 Remove tapes and foams

2) Properly save the parameter configuration table attached to the reagent carousel. The parameter
configuration table contains the factory-corrected parameter information. If any parameter is missing
or changed, you can refer to this table to modify the parameter. (You recommended to take a photo of
it and save it in the hard disk of the client computer).
Figure 8-8 Parameter configuration table
8.4.3 Installing Accessories

Remove the packaging and plastic from the countertop of the biochemical analyzer. Take out the
sample probe packing box from the accessory box. Take out the white washer in the packaging bag,
moisten it with water, and place it in the metal connector of the sample probe.

Note: Keep the gasket

carefully. If it is lost,
there is a spare gasket
in the accessory box.
Figure 8-9 Install the washer of the sample probe
Installing the sample probe

1) Before installing the sample probe, remove the arm and shell; loosen the screw that fix the sample
probe by hand and take it out.
If you cannot
loosen the
fixing screw
of the
sample
probe, you
can use a
flat-blade
screwdriver.
Figure 8-10 Remove the arm shell; loosen the screw that secure the sample probe
2) Insert the sample probe from the top and bottom into the probe hole on the arm of the sample
probe, and align the hole on the shutter of the sample probe to the column in the arm cavity.
3) Check again that the washer is inside the metal connector of the sample probe. If so, align the
tube connector with the connector of the sample probe and tighten it clockwise. If not, find it and
install it in the metal connector before connection.

Figure 8-1 Connect the metal connector of the sample probe

4) Make sure that the shutter of the sample probe is in the middle of the black sensor (on the level
detection board). If it is not in the middle position, check if the shutter is deformed, if so, correct
it, and then insert the plug connected to the end of the sample probe into the J1 connector socket
of the level detection board.
Figure 8-11 Confirm the shutter of the sample probe in the middle of the sensor and connect the plug
5) Insert the spring into the column in the arm cavity and tighten the screw compression spring.

Figure 8-12 Tighten the screw of the sample probe

6) Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the sample probe upwards and
then release it to check if the spring works well, and if the probe can rebound in place. If it does,
proceed to the next step. If not, check if the spring is clamped or the screw fixed too tightly, and
troubleshoot.
Figure 8-13 Check if the spring works well

7) After the installation is complete, turn on the main power switch and the analyzer switch, and
observe that the LED orange lamp numbered D2 on the circuit board in the probe arm flashes,
indicating that the level detection system is normal.
Note: Do not install the arm cover at this time. After waiting for the fluidic system priming, confirm
that there is no leakage at the connector of the fluidic system, and then install the arm cover, and
then perform step 8.

8) Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the sample probe upwards and
then release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. It not, it
indicates that the arm cover is not installed correctly. Reinstall the arm cover and check the spring
until it can move freely.
Installing the mixer

1) Take out the mixer from the accessory box and raise the mixer arm to the vertical apex.
2) Screw the mixer vertically from one end of the large hole of the retaining screw until the end
surface of the mixer is flush with the end surface of the small hole of the retaining screw.
3) Install the mixer mounting hole at the uppermost end of the mixer motor shaft. Pay attention
that the close cooperation between the mounting hole and the motor shaft.
4) Tighten the mixer retaining screw clockwise and visually check that the mixer is vertical with
a straight reference, such as a ruler. If it is not vertical, reinstall it.
Note: If the retaining screw cannot be tightened by hand, you are recommended to use a
Monkey spanner and a Nipper pliers to fix it, but care must be taken not to over-force,
otherwise the motor shaft may be damaged.
5) After installing the mixer, confirm whether it is fixed firmly. Pull the mixer down by hand. If it
is not loosened, the installation is OK. If it falls off, re-fix it.
Keep the
sections flush.
Rotate the retaining screw clockwise.
Figure 8-14 Install the mixer
8.4.4 Connect the pipeline

1) Fill the DI water tank with DI water.
Note: If the client wants to connect directly to the water unit, skip this step.
2) Prepare the diluted wash solution with a ratio of 1 part of concentration solution and 9 parts of
deionized water, and fill the solution into the diluted wash solution tank. (On site, you can pour half of
CD80 (2-L barrel) into the diluted wash solution tank (10-L barrel), then pour deionized water into the
tank, pay attention to the foam)
3) Use the 2 filters configured in the accessory box to connect the connector of the deionized water tank
and that of the dilute wash solution tank, respectively. The filter is installed in the tube between the
deionized water tank (diluted wash solution tank) and the analyzer inlet, about 150 - 300 mm from the
end of the tube at the connection end of the analyzer inlet. After the filter is connected, the ends are
fastened with a clamp or a tie (for a tube with a severely deformed end, the end should be cut about
5 mm); the tube should be inserted into the root of the connector. Note: The filter connector is not
oriented.
Note: If the client is connected directly to the water unit, please connect the outlet of the water unit
directly to the water inlet of the analyzer with a tube, and install a filter in the middle of the tube.

Figure 8-15 Install the filters

4) For the filter connecting with the connector of the deionized water tank and that of the diluted wash
solution tank, place one end of the installed level sensor into the deionized water tank and into the
diluted wash solution tank, respectively, screw the screw cap, and connect the other end of the tube
respectively to the deionized water interface and to the diluted wash solution interface, and connect
them with the corresponding sensor interfaces; then for the connector of the high-concentration waste
tank, place one end of the level sensor into the high-concentration waste tank, screw the screw cap;
connect the other end to the high-concentration interface on the right side of the analyzer and install
the corresponding sensor interface; install the low-concentration waste tube.
5) If the analyzer is equipped with an ISE module, first remove the panel electrolyte plug of the ISE
sample port, remove the back plate, and put on the peristaltic pump tubes (3). The directions of the
tubes are as shown below.
Figure 8-16 Install the peristaltic pump tubes

6) After the analyzer is installed, the correct tube connections are as follows:
8.4.5 Connecting the Overall System

1) If a UPS is equipped, install the UPS and connect it to the UPS ground.
2) Connect the power cords and data cables of the main unit of the biochemical analyzer, the computer,
the printer, and the monitor. Be careful not to turn on the switch first.
3) Connect the serial cable of the computer and the main unit of the biochemical analyzer. Note that the
PC and the biochemical analyzer are connected by serial port, and the COM1 port on the PC is
selected.

8.4.6 Setting the PC

Please set the PC according to section 6.2 Computer Settings.
8.4.7 Software Installation
1) Install the latest version of the operating software, please refer to 6.3 Installation of Operating Software
for the specific installation steps.
2) Upgrade the control system. Please refer to 6.4.3 Upgrading Control System .
Note: If the software has not been updated after the analyzer is delivered, only the first step should be
performed when the analyzer is installed.
8.4.8 Starting up the System
1) Turn on the main power switch and the analyzer power switch.
2) Start the computer. The Workstation operating software is run automatically when the Windows is
started. You are also allowed to run the operating software by selecting the shortcut icon on the
desktop or in the Start menu. See the figure below. The system skips the initialization procedure when
detecting that the fluidic prime is not performed. Enter the username “ServiceUser” and password
“#BS8A#SEU” in the login window.
Figure 8-17 startup screen

Figure 8-18 login screen

3) When the main screen is shown, select Utility -> System Setup -> Factory F2. Select 1 Optional
Modules, enable/disable ISE module, sample bar code and reagent bar code, probe clog detection
and then select OK. See the figure below:
Figure 8-19 optional Modules window
8.4.9 Aligning the Analyzer

Confirm the position of the analyzer during installation of the new analyzer to avoid deviations in the position of
the analyzer during transportation or other conditions.
1) First, back up the parameters of the analyzer unit. For details, please refer to 6.7.3 Unit
parameter Backup.
2) Enter the Utility-Alignment screen.
3) Please follow the table below for alignment. For details, please refer to the index in the
reference.
Contents to be Checked and Reference
Aligned
Alignment of rotation positions of 7.4 Sample/Reagent carousel unit
reagent carousel and reaction carousel
Positions of sample probe to wash 7.5 Probe unit

well, reagent carousel, and reaction

carousel, which is in the center of
sample/cuvette
Positions of mixer to wash well and 7.6 Mixer Unit
reaction carousel, which is in the center
of wash well and cuvette
Position of auto wash probe 7.7 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Unit
assembly to reaction carousel, which is
in the center of cuvette
Syringe Check 7.9.3 Syringe Check
Requirements: The syringe has no
abnormal noise and no leakage, the fixing
screws are not loosened, and there is no
alarm during the test
Position of barcode scanner and 7.8 Bar Code Unit (Optional)
stability test (optional)
If there are no fixtures on site, refer to Appendix A.2BS-360E Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No
Alignment Tooling) for alignment.
8.4.10 Aligning the ISE (Optional)
If the analyzer is equipped with an ISE module, please align the ISE by referring to 14.2.3 Alignment of the ISE
module.
8.4.11 Prime the fluidic system
Prime the fluidic system for the newly installed analyzer by referring to 7.9.4 Fluidic Prime.
8.4.12 Initial Maintenance Record
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance to display the maintenance window. Confirm all scheduled
maintenance procedures and set up start time for them. The maintenance frequencies include Daily, Weekly,
Two-Week, Monthly, Three-Month, Six-Month, and Other. Select the Select All button on each maintenance
frequency tab page, and then select OK. The current date and time appears in the Date Performed column of
each maintenance procedure as shown in the figure below.
Figure 8-20 Scheduled Maintenance screen

8.4.13 Startup Initialization

When the fluidic prime is finished, exit the operating software and reboot the computer. The operating software
is automatically run and starts initializing. When the login window is displayed, enter the user name “Admin”
and password “#Admin”.
Note: Case sensitivity is required when entering the username and password. Please do not check Quick Mode.
Figure 8-21 Login screen

After entering the operating software, wait for the instrument to incubate for a period of time and then enter the
standby,perform the next step.
If the ISE module is selected,load ISE reagent on the Reagent/Calibration screen.
8.4.14 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray
Reagents
1) Select Utility -> Chemistries -> Config, and select Options to display the Option window.

Figure 8-22 Select Import to display the Import window

2) Select Load Default to display all Mindray reagent chemistries in the left column. Select Add All to add
all chemistries to the right column. Select Import to import the parameters and then select Exit.
Figure 8-23 Import window

3) All Mindray reagent chemistries are displayed in the Available Chemistries column. You can delete
chemistries that will not be used in your laboratory.

Figure 8-24 Chemistry Configuration screen

4) Select OK to complete the chemistry configuration.
8.4.15 Running Water Test
1) Select Utility Chemistry Setup, import the Water chemistry from Mindray reagent
chemistries, and load the reagents of the Water chemistry by referring to
8.4.14 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray Reagents.
Figure 8-25 Parameters of running water test

2) Load Wash D and Saline W.
 On No. 49 position of the reagent carousel, put CD80 Conc Wash.
 On No. 50 position of the reagent carousel, put physiological saline.
Load Wash D and Saline W on the reagent screen, as shown in the figure below.


Figure 8-26 Load Wash D and Saline W
3) Load the Water reagent
In the sequence shown below, enter the Reagent/Calibration screen, select the reagent
position 1#, click Load, select the chemistry Water in the pop-up screen, and click Load.
Then click Exit, and click Load Complete. At the same time, fill the water reagent pack with
deionized water (not less than 10 ml) and place it in the 1# position of the reagent carousel.
(This manual takes 1# position as an example, and other positions can be selected in
practice)

Figure 8-27 Load the water reagent

Figure 8-28 Water reagent is loaded completely

4) Sample preparation and application: In the sequence of the following figures, in the
Application screen, click the Water chemistry, then click Options, enter the number of
repetitions 80 in the pop-up Options dialog box, click OK to exit the current screen, and
click the OK button at the bottom right corner of the Application screen. Confirm that the
sample is placed at sample position 1 (not less than 2 ml of deionized water), and then click
the Start Test button.

Figure 8-29 Apply for the running water test

5) Confirm the following item during the test:
 The mechanical movement of each assembly is normal, without abnormal alarms
(including optical, temperature control, mechanical, communication, etc.)
 The sample probe, mixer, and cuvette wash station are washed normally, without liquid
hanging.
 The cuvette wash station will be jacked up after dropped to the bottom of the cuvetter
each time.
 The reaction curves of all the samples do not show periodic fluctuations or sharp convex
jump points, and the absolute value of the test result does not exceed 10.
8.5 Verifying Basic Performance
8.5.1 Checking System Status
1) Record the temperature and humidity of the working environment of the analyzer, the grid
voltage, the zero ground voltage, and the ambient atmospheric pressure in the BS-360E
_Installation Acceptance Report.
2) In the operation software, select Utility Status, and record the temperature, hydro and
power status in BS-360E _Installation Acceptance Report.
8.5.2 Testing Movement Positioning Performance
1) Remove the reaction carousel cover, and the reagent carousel cover, and select
UtilityMaintenance Biochemistry MaintenanceHome, observe the movement of
the sample probe, the mixer and the two carousels. There should be no alarm prompt during
the whole procedure. The sample probe and the mixer should be centered in the wash well
(the sample probe positioned in the wash well should be aligned with the wash well
outlet).

2) The vertical movement of the sample probe syringe is normal, without abnormal sound; the
position of the auto wash station down to the cuvette should be not rubbed, and should be
located in the center of the cuvette.
3) If any of the units is positioned abnormally, select UtilityMaintenanceAlignment, and
select the corresponding unit module to align the position parameters. The alignment result
is recorded in the BS-360E_Installation Acceptance Report.
8.5.3 Testing Optical Performance
1) Select UtilityMaintenanceBiochemistry MaintenancePhotometer Check. The
absorbance of each wavelength of the newly installed analyzer should be in the range of
5000 - 8000. If it exceeds 8000, please check whether the installation of the light source
lamp is in place.
2) Select UtilityMaintenanceBiochemistry MaintenanceCuvette Check. The new
analyzer should have no red marked cuvette, if there is, please replace the red marked
cuvette.
8.5.4 Testing Bar Code Performance
Select UtilityMaintenanceAlignmentSample/Reagent Bar CodeBar Code
Scanning Stability Test. Put a valid barcode (the installation reagent is carried with a
barcode, which can be placed in the sample/reagent carousel for scanning). The analyzer
can accurately read the barcode. Please refer to 7.8.4 Bar Code Stability Test.

8.5.5 Testing Clinical Performance

1) Select UtilityChemistry SetupConfigurationOptions, and import the default
chemistries.
2) Put the installed reagent, select Reagent Load to load the reagent at the
corresponding position. After the reagent loading is completed, be sure to click End
Load, otherwise other operations cannot be performed;
Select End Load after reagent

loading is completed.
Figure 8-30 Reload the reagent

3) Select Calibration Setup to add the calibration solution and set the calibration rules,
select the reagent item to perform Calibration Request, and click Run to perform the
calibration test. After the test is finished, Succeeded is displayed in Calibration Status.
If Failed is displayed, please check the reagent placement or calibrator preparation
and re-perform Calibration Request.
4) After the calibration test is completed, prepare 2 mL of fresh serum for the chemistry
request test, and the number of repetitions is 10. If the ISE module is selected, the
repeatability tests of K, Na, and Cl are also required. The test results are recorded in
BS-360e_Installation Acceptance Report.
5) After the whole installation and alignment procedures are completed, train the
operators.
8.6 LIS Connection
If the client should be connected to the LIS, please refer to 12 LIS Connection Setting and Troubleshooting.
The LIS Protocol Manual (PDF version) is available in this way:
 Downloaded under the LIS directory on the TDP
8.7 Backing Up Data
After the analyzer is installed, you are recommended to back up the following data:
1) Back up the tested database file BA80.bak to the computer E drive. Refer to 6.7.1 Data backup.
2) Back up the aligned analyzer parameters to the computer E drive. Refer to 6.7.3 Unit parameter
Backup.
3) Keep the paper factory parameter list safely and take a photo of it to the computer E drive. For the
paper parameter list, see .
4) If the LIS is connected, save the screenshot Figure 8-8 Parameter configuration table of the LIS
setup screen in the software to the computer E drive. Refer to LIS Setting backup.

8.8 Handling Exceptions in Installation

 Logistics problems include missing accessory, package damage, and instrument damage. Generally,
this type of problems should be borne by the logistics company.
 Instrument allocation problems include mismatch of order with deliverables and nonconforming
accessory (for example, connection cable or shield cover) package. Generally, this type of problems
is solved by applying for new materials.
 Loose cable, great offset, and rack deformation problems. Generally, this type of problems is solved
by experienced engineers.
 If the instrument reproduces any error that is difficult to rectify or unacceptable to the customers, see
available strategies to handle the problem.

9 Preventive maintenance
9.1 Overview
9.1.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance is a preventive measure taken by service personnel of Mindray or authorized by
Mindray with the aim of eliminating hidden troubles to ensure system reliability and achieve best performance
during operation. The Preventive maintenance cycle for the chemistry analyzer is one year and for ISE module,
half a year. The maintenance includes changing, cleaning or checking the parts as shown in the table below.
Table 9-1 Maintenance items to be performed by service personnel
Category Procedure When to do
Replacement Item Replacing Lamp 2000 hours,or more than 6
months
Replacing cuvettes More than 3 months
Replace Water Inlet Filter More than 1 year
Replace Diluted Wash Solution More than 1 year
Filter
Replace Syringe over 100,000 times
Replace Calibrator Tube(ISE More than 1 year
configured)
Replace Pump Tube(ISE More than half year
configured)
Replace the ISE electrode(ISE More than 6 months or
configured) over 10,000 tests
Replace Probe Washer More than 1 year
Clean Item Clean Dust Screens When needed
Clean the dust of the heatsink When needed
fan
Clean Wash Well When needed
Clean Cuvette Wash Station When needed
and Tubes
Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE When needed
Configured)
Clean DI Water Tank When needed
Clean Diluted Wash Solution When needed
Tank
Clean Sample/Reagent When needed
Compartment
Clean Analyzer Panels When needed
Special Wash When needed
Clean Probe Exterior When needed
Clean Mixers When needed
Photometer Lens Maintenance More than 1 year
Check Item Pump Calibration (ISE When needed
Configured)
Air Bubble Detector When needed
Calibration(ISE configured)
Cuvette Check When needed
Photometer Check When needed
Check Waste Pump When needed
Replace Cleaning Fluid Syringe When needed
Replace Wash Solution Syringe When needed
9.1.2 Biochemistry maintenance commands
Table 9-2 Biochemistry maintenance commands

Biochemistry Usage Execution time

maintenance
command
Home Reset the probe, mixer and wash station, and clean · Check probe/mixer/wash well
the probe and mixer. · Clean probe interior
· Replace probe
· Replace mixer
· Clean wash wells
· Special wash probe
Clean Reset the probe and mixer mechanically to return Check probe/mixer/wash well
probe/mixer/wash them to the wash position.
wells
Clean probes Remove air bubbles possibly existing in the tubes, After maintenance of probe and
interior and clean the probe and wash well. wash wells
Special wash Use concentrated wash solution to clean the probe, Special wash
mixer, cuvettes, and wash station.
Special wash Use concentrated wash solution to clean the probe in Special wash probe
probes order to eliminate cross contamination.
Clean Remove air bubbles possibly existing in the tubes, After maintenance of probe and
probes/mixers and clean the probe and wash well. wash wells
exterior
Prime wash station Prime the wash station and tubes to remove air Clean wash station
bubbles.
Cuvette check Check for dirty cuvettes by running water blank. · Cuvette check
· Special wash
Photometer check Check the light intensity by measuring the average · Photometer check
absorbance of 5 cuvettes at 340 nm. · Replace lamp
Replace lamp Replace the lamp. Replace lamp
Replace cuvettes Replace cuvettes. Replace cuvette
9.1.3 ISE maintenance commands

Table 9-3 ISE maintenance commands
ISE maintenance command Usage Execution time

Two-point calibration Calibrate the ISE module with calibrators When needed
A and B.
Clean electrode tubes Clean the electrode tubes with ISE wash Clean electrode tubes
solution to remove the materials on the
electrode surface.
Pump calibration Calibrate the peristaltic pump to ensure Pump calibration
accurate test result.
Maintenance Discharge the calibrator from the When needed
electrode inside before electrode Or automatically executed during
replacement. "Clean sample injection port" and
"Replace electrode"
Air bubble detector calibration Calibrate the air bubble detector to Air bubble detector calibration
ensure good sensitivity.
Purge A Dispense 100 μL calibrator A to the When needed
inside of the electrodes through the Or automatically executed during "
sample injection port. Clean sample injection port",
"Replace electrode" and "Unload
reagent pack"
Purge B Dispense 100 μL calibrator B to the When needed
inside of the electrodes through the Or automatically executed during "
sample injection port. Clean sample injection port",

ISE maintenance command Usage Execution time

"Replace electrode" and "Unload
reagent pack"
Replace electrode Replace the ISE electrodes. Replace electrode
Replace tubes of pump and Replace the aging tubes of the peristaltic Used by service engineers to
calibrator pump and calibrator. replace the tubes of pump and
calibrator
Unload reagent pack Remove the reagent pack and empty the Remove reagent pack
tubes.
Program check View the software version of the ISE When needed
module.
Air bubble detector calibration View the result of air bubble detector After performance of "Air bubble
result calibration. detector calibration"
Pump calibration result View the result of pump calibration. After performance of "Pump
calibration"
Write dallas chip Write information on the Dallas chip. When needed
Read dallas chip Read the information on the Dallas chip. When needed
Store Electrodes Remove the electrodes and store them When needed
Clean Sample Injection Port Clean the sample injection port When needed
9.2 Maintenance Tools

Table 9-4 Maintenance Tools
Name Applicable Maintenance
Philips-head screwdriver φ3.3×100 Removing the system enclosure
and the cooling fans
Philips-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Installing and removing the
probes and lamp
Slot-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Removing probe and pipe hoop
Round-head cleaning tool, 0.25+/- Unclogging the probes
0.01mm*125mm round tip
Hair brush Cleaning filter core and dust
screens
Gauze clean probe/mixer exterior and
sample/reagent compartment
Cotton swabs Clean Wash Well
Suction cleaner Cleaning fans and dust screens
Tweezers Removing/Installing probes and
syringe washers
Beaker Maintaining wash station
Pipette clean ISE sample injection port
Ethanol Cleaning photometer, probes,
mixers and wash station
CD 80 Clean Wash Well
9.3 Maintenance Procedure

9.3.1 Procedure
Among the Preventive maintenance items, some of them are performed with the main power switched off, while
the other are performed through the maintenance window on the operating software, where maintenance logs
are recorded. To improve the efficiency and shorten the field maintenance time, you are recommended to follow
the procedure below:
Table 9-5 Execution order of maintenance items

No Procedure Maintenance Tools Operations

1 Clean Analyzer Panels Ethanol and gauze Wipe
2 Clean Dust Screens Hair brush, suction Remove dust
cleaner
3 Clean the dust of the Hair brush, suction Remove dust
heatsink fan cleaner
4 Photometer Lens Ethanol and dust-free Wipe
Maintenance cloth
5 Replace Water Inlet Filter Replace
Filter 043-000422-00
6 Replace Diluted Wash Filter Replace
Solution Filter 043-000422-00
7 Clean DI Water Tank / Washing
8 Clean Diluted Wash / Washing
Solution Tank
9 Replace Syringe Syringe Replace
801-BA23-00025-00
10 Replace Probe Washer Replace
Washer 0040-10-32307
11 Replace Pump Pump Tube Replace
Tube(ISE configured) 801-BA34-00105-00
12 Replace Calibrator Calibrator Tube Replace
Tube(ISE configured) 801-BA34-00106-00
13 Clean Probe Exterior Ethanol and gauze Wipe
14 Clean Mixers Ethanol and gauze Wipe
15 Clean Wash Well NaClO solution and Wipe
cotton swabs
16 Clean Wash Station Ethanol and cotton swab Wipe
17 Clean Ethanol, gauze, cotton Disassemble
Sample/Reagent swab and wipe
Compartment
18 Clean ISE Injection Ethanol and cotton swab Wipe
Port (ISE Configured)
19 Pump Calibration (ISE / Execute
Configured)
20 Air Bubble Detector / Execute
Calibration(ISE
configured)
21 Special Wash Concentrated wash Execute
solution
22 Cuvette Check / Execute
23 Photometer Check / Execute
24 Check Waste Pump / Execute
25 Replace Cleaning / Execute
Fluid Syringe
26 Replace Wash / Execute
Solution Syringe
9.3.2 Steps
Clean Analyzer Panels
1) Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer,see Figure 3-1 Shells assembly .
2) Use clean gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the analyzer panels and carousel covers.
3) Use wash solution to clean the monitor screen and keyboard.
4) Restore the upper protective shield.

5) After maintenance, open the logs and record related information.
Figure 9-1 maintenance list and logs
Clean Dust Screens

1) Switch off the analyzer power.
2) Pull the handle of the dust screen to remove it.See Figure 3-2 Frame assembly.
3) Tidy and clean the dust screens.
4) Dry the dust screens in air.
5) Restore the dust screens in place.

Clean the dust of the heatsink fan

1) Refer to 3.1.8 Remove the dust from the fans for cleaning dust of the fans.
Photometer Lens Maintenance

1) Refer to 3.9.6 Photometer Lens Maintenance for Photometer Lens Maintenance.
Replace Water Inlet Filter

1) Check the maintenance log and when the inlet filter maintenance interval is more than 1
year, change it.
2) Refer to Removing/Reinstalling Filter for the removing and installing steps.
Replace Diluted Wash Solution Filter

1) Check the maintenance log and when the diluted wash solution filter maintenance interval
is more than 1 year, change it.
2) Refer to Removing/Reinstalling Filter for the removing and installing steps.
Clean DI Water Tank

1) Remove the tank connector, clean the tank with deionized water, and connect the water
outlet of the tank.
Clean Diluted Wash Solution Tank

1) Remove the tank connector, clean the tank with deionized water, and connect the water
outlet of the tank.
Replace Syringe
1) Check the using count of the syringe on the status screen. When the syringe has been
used for 100,000times, change it.
2) Prepare a new syringe plunger assembly and washer, put the plunger head in the deionized
water beaker to remove air from the syringe, and then moisten the washer in the deionized
water.
4) Loosen the screw on the shield of the syringe.
5) Loosen counterclockwise the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe and then remove
it.
6) Loosen counterclockwise the four retaining screws on top of the syringe, and then remove
the screws and the fixing blocks
7) Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand. Loosen the
syringe counterclockwise. And then remove the washer.
8) Loosen the plunger guide cap counterclockwise, hold the plunger head and pull it slightly to
remove the plunger assembly from the syringe.
9) Insert the plunger head of the new plunger assembly into the bottom of the syringe, and
then tighten the retaining screw to fix the plunger head. Tighten the plunger nut clockwise
10) Soak the new syringe connector in the deionized water beak, pull gently the plunger head
to aspirate half syringe of deionized water, and then push the plunger head to remove the
air.
11) If no washer is found in the T piece, put the new washer in the T piece. Hold the T piece
with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand, and then screw the T piece
clockwise.

12) Install the syringe on the bracket.

13) Install the fixing blocks and 4 retaining screws while having the retaining screws not
tightened.
14) Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe height. Make the syringe head over the
upper fixing block for 7.5 scales.
15) Tighten the four retaining screws on the fixing blocks.
16) Align the plunger head to the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe, and then tighten
clockwise the retaining screw.
17) After finishing replacement, switch on the analyzer power.
18) Perform the Home maintenance procedure. Check the new syringe for leak and bubbles.
If leak occurs, check the syringe and the connector.
19) Tighten the syringe shield.
20) The procedure is completed. Write the maintenance log and input the maintenance
information and clear the using count of the syringe.
Cleaning probe interior

When to do
Perform this procedure when you find that the probe is clogged and cannot aspirate or dispense
sample and reagent, or when the probe is detected with abnormal liquid flow during the "Checking
probe/mixer/wash well" maintenance.
Materials required
Unclogging device (or needle), small slot-head screwdriver, small Philips-head screwdriver, beaker,
tweezers, deionized water, and thread syringe
How to do
1) To remove the probe,refer to 3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws.
2) To clean the probe
a) Connect the unclogging device to the probe.
b) Fill the syringe with deionized water and then connect it to the unclogging device.
c) Put the probe inside the beaker while keeping the probe tip not contacting the
beaker.
d) Push the syringe to rinse the interior of the probe. Repeat this step for 10 times.
e) If the syringe plunger leaks and the probe cannot be unclogged due to serious
blockage, replace the probe.
f) Check if continuous water flow comes out of the probe in the same direction with
the probe. If it does, it indicates the cleaning procedure is finished successfully.
g) If water flow is still abnormal after unclogging, replace the probe with a new one.
h) Remove the unclogging device.
3) To install the probe,refer to3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws.
4) To check the probe,refer to3.5.4 Replacing probe assembly-collision spring and powder screws.
Replace Probe Washer

1) Check the maintenance log. When the probe washer has been used for 1 year and change
it.
2) Remove the probe and its washer.
3) Install the washer and install back the probe.
4) Run the operating software, and select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry
Maintenance and then select Probe interior clean and prime.
Replace Pump Tube (ISE configured)

1) Check the maintenance log. When Pump Tube has been used for half year, change it.
2) Refer to 3.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube for replacing Pump Tube.

Replace Calibrator Tube (ISE configured)

1) View the maintenance log. When the Calibrator Tube has been used for more than 1 year,
change it.
2) Refer to3.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube for Replace Calibrator Tube.
Replace ISE electrode(ISE configured)

1) View the maintenance log. When the Ref electrode has been used for more than 6 moths,
and K,Na,Cl electordes are used for 6 months or 10,000 tests,change it.
2) Refer to 3.10.6 Replacing ISE electrode for repalcing ISE electrode.
Clean Probe Exterior

2) Lift gently the probe to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.
3) Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the probe exterior. Clean the probe tip until it
becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol
on the probe. Do not pull the probe vertically to prevent probe damage.
4) After the procedure, restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on the
analyzing unit and select Home.
Clean Mixers
2) Lift gently the mixer to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.
3) Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the mixer exterior. Clean it until it becomes
clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the
mixer. Do not pull the mixer vertically to prevent probe damage.
4) After the procedure, restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on the
analyzing unit and select Home.
Clean Wash Well

2) Move the probe and mixer away from the wash well for the convenience of maintenance.
3) Use clean cotton swabs moistened with CD80 to clean the wash wells.
4) After the procedure, switch on the analyzer power.
5) Execute Home command or Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells maintenance command.
Check if the wash wells have a normal water flow.
Clean Wash Station

1) The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or incubation
status.
2) Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Remove the wash station, and use gauze
moistened with ethanol to clean the nozzles and wipe blocks.
3) Use the gauze soaked with DI water to clear the ethanol left on the nozzles.
4) Install back the wash station and close the upper shielding cover of the analyzer.
5) Execute the Prime Wash Station maintenance command.

Clean Sample/Reagent Compartment

1) The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or incubation
status.
2) Remove the carousel cover and carousel, and then store them properly.
3) Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the interior of the
compartment. If necessary, you can use gauze moistened with neutral wash solution.
4) Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the carousel body and
bar code scanning window, and then use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to clean the
sample or reagent positions.
5) Install the carousel and the carousel cover.
Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE Configured)

1) Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2) Enter ISE maintenance screen and select Clean ISE injection port.
3) Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
4) Open the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel.
5) Use clean cotton swab soaked with ethanol to wipe the sample injection port (interior of the
sample injection cup of the ISE module ) until it is clean; then use a clean cotton swab
soaked with DI water to wipe the interior and periphery of the sample injection port.
6) Enter the ISE Maintenance window and execute purge A and purge B each for three times.
7) Restore the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel. Restore the upper
protective shield of the analyzer.
Pump Calibration (ISE Configured)

1) Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2) Enter ISE maintenance screen and click Pump Calibration.
3) Fill a sample cup with at least 500μL DI water, and place it in No.40 position of the sample
carousel.
4) Continue the procedure until it is completed.
5) After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration is
successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Air Bubble Detector Calibration (ISE configured)

1) Ensure ISE is standby.
2) Enter ISE maintenance screen, and select Air Bubble Detector Calibration. The procedure
is performed automatically.
3) After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration is
successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Special Wash
1) Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
2) Place 40ml concentrated wash solution on the No.49 position of the reagent carousel.
3) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and select special
wash.
4) Confirm if cuvette check is needed after the concentrated wash. If it is, mark the checkbox
in front of Check Cuvettes.
5) Select Continue. The system starts cleaning the probe, mixer, cuvettes and wash station.
When special wash is finished, the system performs cuvette check automatically.
6) Select Done.
7) Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer.

Cuvette Check
1) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
Cuvette check.
2) After check, check the cuvette check results for yellow indication. Record the cuvettes
highlighted in yellow and perform the Clean Cuvettes or Replace Cuvettes procedure.
Photometer Check
Photometer Check.
2) If the result is Normal, the system will give no alarms, otherwise the following alarm will be
given.
a) If the alarm is “Lamp is not turned on”,refer to 10.2.10 Lamp Is Not Turned On C07005
b) If the alarm is “Light intensity is too strong”,refer to 10.2.11 Light Intensity Is Too Strong
C07006.
c) If the alarm is “Light intensity is too weak”,refer to10.2.8 Light Intensity Is Too Weak
C07003 .
Check Waste Pumpt

1) Power off the analyzer. Remove the desk panels and reaction carousel cover. Run the
operating software and home the system. The analyzer enters standby status. Use a plate
to shield the photometer to complete the dark current check.
Circulate Wash Cuvettes.
3) Check the volume of the reaction liquid during cuvette washing process,refer to 7.9.7 the
volume of the reaction liquid during cuvette washing process.If the reaction liquid reaches
the top of the cuvette or overflows, remove the rear panel and check and replace the waste
pump. The pump P02 is for phase 1 wash probe and P03 for phase 2 and 3 wash probes.
If phase 4 wipe block cannot aspirate clean the cuvette, check and replace pump P04.
4) If the reaction liquid volume is small, execute the Prime Wash Station maintenance
command.
5) If no abnormality occurs, restore the panels.
Replace Cleaning Fluid Syringe

1) Power off the analyzing unit and remove the rear panel. Run the operating software and
home the system. The analyzer enters standby status.
2) Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
3) Check if the 10ml wash syringe leaks. If so, replace it. For the removing steps, refer to
Removing/Reinstalling Wash Syringe Assembly.After maintenance, open the logs and
record related information.
4) If no abnormality occurs, restore the rear panel.
Replace Wash Solution Syringe

1) Power off the analyzing unit and remove the rear panel. Run the operating software and
home the system. The analyzer enters standby status.
3) Check if the 2.5ml wash syringe leaks. If so, replace it. For the removing steps, refer to
Removing/Reinstalling Wash Syringe Assembly,After maintenance, open the logs and
record related information.
4) If no abnormality occurs, restore the panels.

Check Probes/Mixers Exterior Wash Flow

1) Open the upper cover of the analyzer and home the system.
2) Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, then select Biochemistry Maintenance.
3) Select Probes/Mixers Exterior, and then select Continue.
4) Liquid flows out of the probe and mixer wash well automatically. Observe the liquid flow of the wash
wells. Spillage, overflow or no liquid flow should not occur. The probe wash height should be no less
than 5mm. The liquid in the mixer wash well should flow out of its center and form a convex with a
height of 1-2mm.
Figure 9-2 Check Probes/Mixers Exterior Wash Flow

5) Repeat the above steps for more than 3 times to check if the probe/mixer flow is normal. If not, check
the exterior wash tubes. (First check if the restrictive tube at the exterior wash valve's outlet is clogged.)
Check the flow again after solving the problem.
6) Select Done.
7) Close the maintenance window.
9.4 Post-maintenance Check
Check after maintenance according to the contents of the A.5BS-360E Series Recovery Checklist.

10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to locate failure and determine relevant corrective actions.
10.1 Overview
10.1.1 Classification of logs
The fault log records all types of faults that occur with various parts of the instrument. All faults are classified by
part as shown in the following table.
Table 10-1 faul classification
No. Item. No. Item.

1 Operating system 11 Reaction carousel unit
2 Instrument connection 12 Sample/reagent carousel
unit
3 Database 13 Wash station
4 Result calculation 14 Temperature unit
5 Sample bar code 15 Probe Interior Wash Unit
6 Reagent bar code 16 ISE unit
7 Host communication 17 Light source
8 Instrument instruction 18 Other error of operation
unit
9 Sample probe unit 19 Home Process
10 Mixer unit
Error logs
Each error has a unit code used for identification and locating probable causes and solutions. An error code
consists of 6 letters and numbers, such as "C01001", in which "C" indicates that the error occurs on the operation
unit, "01" is the error description of instrument connection, and "001" is the serial number of the error. Therefore,
"C01001" is described as "the first error of instrument connection on the operation unit".
The following tables provide a summary of error codes for the operation unit and analyzing unit.
Table 10-2 Error code of the operation unit
Error Code Description

C Indicates that the error occurs on the operation unit.
00～99 Indicates the specific component on which the error occurs.
00-Operating system
01- System communication
02-Database
03-Result calculation
04-Sample bar code
05-Reagent bar code
06-LIS host communication
07-Other
000～999 Serial number of the error.
Table 10-3 Error code of the analyzing unit
Error Code Description

A Indicates that the error occurs on the analyzing unit.
00～99 Indicates the specific component on which the error occurs.
00-Command execution
01/02-Probe unit
05-Mixer
06-Reaction carousel unit
07-Sample /reagent carousel unit

11-Wash unit
12-Temperature unit
21-Probe interior wash unit
22-Home process or ISE unit
000～999 Serial number of the error
10.1.2 Viewing and handling logs
Description of Error Log screen

Select Alarm in the function buttons area of the main screen. The Error Log screen is displayed by default and
shows all errors occurring on the current day.
Figure 10-1 Error Log screen

Every error log contains the event ID, date/time, error description (by processing method), event class (by
subsystem) and symptom.
Choose the following buttons as needed:
 Search F1: to search for error logs by date, event ID, symptom, or event class.
 Refresh F2: to refresh the error logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified error logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all error logs currently displayed on the screen.
Recalling logs
Error logs can be recalled by all users in any system status. Error logs can be recalled by date, event ID,
symptom and event class.
Perform the following steps to recall desired event logs:
1) Select Alarm > Error Log .
2) Select Search F1.
3) Enter one or more of the following conditions:
 Date
 Event ID (available for error logs only)

 Symptom (available for error logs only)

 Event class (available for error logs only)
4) Select OK. The event logs satisfying the conditions are displayed on the screen.
5) Choose the following buttons as needed:
 Refresh F2: to refresh the logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all logs currently displayed on the screen.
10.1.3 Error Troubleshooting
When an error occurs, it will be indicated in many ways. The following pages describe how to troubleshoot
errors and help you determine solutions to such errors.
Generally, troubleshooting is divided into the following steps:
 An error occurs and is indicated in various ways.
 Check the error logs and component status.
 Identify the error and determine relevant solutions.
 Implement the solutions.
 Check and evaluate the implementation of the solutions.
Error indications
Errors may occur on hardware, software and the entire system. When an error occurs, it will be indicated in
many ways to help identify it and determine the possible causes and solutions. Errors can be indicated by
alarm tone, alarm message, color, alarm message box, result flag and error log, through which you will obtain
detailed information about errors and find the relevant solutions.
Alarm tone
When an error occurs, the buzzer gives alarm tone reminding you to notice the error and take corrective actions.
Alarm tone can be adjusted manually or silenced.
Perform the following steps to adjust the alarm tone:
1) Select Utility > System Setup.
2) Adjust the alarm tone in the Alarm Volume field.
3) Test the alarm tone until it is satisfied.
4) To silence the alarm tone, drag the slider to the leftmost position of the scale.
5) Select Save F8 to save the adjustment.
Alarm message
When an error occurs, the system gives an alarm and displays the alarm message in the second line of the
prompt message area.
Color highlight
An error will be indicated by highlighting relevant buttons and screen texts with different colors. Yellow indicates
a warning, and red indicates a serious warning or error.
 Reagent button
 Utility button
 Alarm button
Select a button to access relevant function page, check for abnormities and take corrective actions. When the
problem is solved, the alarm indication disappears.
Alarm message box
An error can also be shown in an alarm message box, which contains the date/time, event ID, time(s) and help
icon.
Errors that are indicated through an alarm message box are divided into the following types:
 Common error: including those that are indicated by warning the user, and by invalidating tests,
reagents and samples. When such error occurs, the alarm message box shows with the title bar
highlighted in yellow.
 Serious error: including those except for the common error. When such error occurs, the alarm
message box shows with the title bar highlighted in red, and you are only allowed to reboot or exit the
system.
When an alarm message box appears, select the Alarm button to view the new error logs, analyze the possible
causes and determine relevant corrective actions.
Flag
Flag is also called data alarm. When calibration error or failure, or sample result error occurs due to the sample,

reagent or system failure, a flag will appear near the corresponding calibration result or sample results.
Error log
All alarms are recorded in the error logs. By recalling the error logs you are enabled to master the current status
of the system and troubleshoot errors.
Identifying errors
To identify errors, understand the error indication thoroughly, check the error logs and system status, and then
determine relevant solutions.
The table below shows the error types that may occur on the system. Find relevant corrective actions according
to the description.
Table 10-4 Error types
Error Type Description

Instrument failure and Instrument failure and error may be detected on all
error subsystems and processed in different ways. Such errors
are shown in the Error messages and corrective actions
table, and can be identified through the event ID.
Data alarm Data alarm is a flag indicating biochemistry or ISE chemistry
result error. The flags are included in the Result flags table,
and can be identified through the flag symbol.
10.2 Common Troubleshooting

10.2.1 Database initializing failed
Symptom: Analyzer alarm database initializing failed
Fault Mechanism: this alarm is generated if the database cannot be initialized when the analyzer is
turned on.
Fault Scenario: this alarm is generated when the software is turned on
Figure 10-2 Database initializing failed alarm

Procedure:

1)Confirm that the current account of the system is the administrator account by referring to 6.2.8
Confirmation of Administrator Permission and UAC.
2)Select the software startup program, right-click Properties→Compatibility, and confirm that
Open in Compatibility View is not ticked.
3)Back up the database file Database. Please refer to 6.7.1 Data backup.
4)Enter the Database folder in the software installation directory. The default path:
D:\Mindray\BS360\OperationSoft\DataBase. Only keep the Backup folder. After the rest of the files are
deleted, start the software. If the operating software can be entered normally, the current database file
is wrong, if not, proceed to the next step.
5)Uninstall the SQL Database. Please refer to 6.6.2 SQL Database Uninstalling .
6)Reinstall the software. The software will automatically install the database during the installation
procedure. Refer to 6.3 Installation of Operating Software.
7)Reinstall the operating system. For domestic customers, please use the backup GHOST file in
the E drive for recovery.
8)Repeat step 6.
10.2.2 Database backup failed
Symptom: Analyzer alarm database backup failed
Fault Mechanism: this alarm is generated if the database cannot be backed up when the analyzer
is turned on.
Fault Scenario: this alarm is generated when the software is turned on
Figure 10-3 Database backup failed alarm

Procedure:
1) Exit to the desktop with the engineer username and password
2) Go to the software installation directory, enter the Databasebase folder, enter the Backup folder and
find the BA80.bak file. The default path is D:\Mindray\BS360\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup.
3) Delete the BA80.bak file.
4) Restart the software.
10.2.3 Database Version Is Higher Than the Current Software Version
Symptom: Database version is higher than the software version when the analyzer software is turned on.

Figure 10-4 Database version is higher than the software version

Alarm Mechanism: this alarm is caused by a mismatch between the SQL database software version
and the database file version of the operating software.
Fault Scenario: this fault may occur when the software is repeatedly installed or upgraded.
Procedure:
1) In the software installation directory, find the Databaseconfig file, open it with Notepad, and find the
last character.
<Property name="DBVer">215</Property> </SessionFactory></DBConfigure>
2) Modify 215, which is larger than the number 214 in the 5 position in the figure below, and then save
the file. (Note: The picture is a normal screenshot, the number of 215 may be 211, 213, etc.)
3) Restart the software.

Figure 10-5 Database version is higher than the software version
10.2.4 Unmatched Operating Software VersionA22039

Error Code: A22039
Fault Information: unmatched operating software version.
Fault Scenario: this is generated when the software is turned on.
Fault Mechanism: this alarm is caused by a mismatch between the operating software version and
the control software version.
Procedure:
1) Upgrade the software. Refer to 6.4.2 Upgrading of Operating Software.
2) Upgrade the control system. Refer to 6.4.3 Upgrading Control System.
3) Confirm the version after upgrading. Refer to 6.4.4 Confirmation after Upgrading.
10.2.5 Water Residues Exist in the Cuvette A02027
Error Code: A02027
Fault Information: water residues exist in the cuvette or Probe level detection failed
Fault Scenario: this alarm occurs during the analyzer test.
Fault Mechanism: the residual water is detected in the cuvette when the sample probe adds the R1
reagent to the reaction carousel.
Possible Cause:
 Horizontal and vertical positions of the sample probe to the reaction carousel not correct
 Damaged sample probe
 Fluidics leakage of the sample probe
 Overflow of the reaction carousel
 Ground interference
 Level detection signal processing problem
Procedure:
1) Open the reaction carousel cover and check if there is any residual water in the cuvette corresponding
to the alarm. If there is, proceed to step 5, if not, proceed to the next step.
2) Check if the horizontal and vertical positions of the sample probe to the reaction carousel are correct.
If they are not correct, please refer to 7.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel and

7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel in the alignment guide, if the positions are
correct, please proceed to the next step.
3) Check the verticality of the sample probe, visually measure it, or use a vertical reference for
comparison. If the sample probe is not straight, please replace the sample probe.
Refer to
4) Check if the analyzer is falsely alarmed due to interference:
a) Confirm that the analyzer has a grounding wire and the zero ground voltage is <5V. The
measuring method is: set the multimeter to AC 250V voltage, and connect the black test lead to
the ground wire jack, and the red test lead to the live wire/zero wire jack, respectively. When the
grounding is good, the voltage between the ground wire and the zero wire is less than 5V, and
the voltage between the ground wire and the live wire is similar to the voltage between the live
wire and the zero wire.
b) Check whether the connection line of the level detection board is damaged, or is tied too tightly
by the cable tie. Check if the board connector is loose. The specific operation method is
Power off the whole analyzer, open the protective cover, remove 2 hardened dusting screws (M3X6), remove
the arm cover of the sample probe (DS193), refer to A.2BS-360E Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide
(No Alignment Tooling)Judging and Calibrating Verticality of Probe:
disconnect the J1. J2. and J3 connectors of the level detection board, and re-connect them. If the connection
wire of the J2 connector to the J11 connector of the main control board is damaged, wind it with an electrical
tape. If the cable tie is too tight, loosen the cable tie and re-plug the J11 connector.
c) If other level detection alarms appear at the same time, the level detection board 051-002479-00
is suspected and should be replaced.
5) Check the residual water source of the cuvette. There are two general conditions for the overflow of
the wash station: one is that the liquid absorption is not smooth, and the other is excessive liquid
dispensing. The first case is more common, please refer to the section 10.2.9 for specific steps3) in
section 10.2.9..
10.2.6 Bar Code Scanning Faults
The barcode scanning problems are generally divided into two types:
1) Software alarm, with specific alarm information. For example: A09011, the reagent barcode device is
not working properly; C04001, the sample barcode is repeated. Sample ID/bar code: %s Repeated
position 1: %s Repeated position 2: %s. For such alarms, please refer to Table 10-6 Error messages
and corrective actions for the cause description and procedure to process them.
2) There is no alarm in the software, but the reagent or sample barcode placed in the sample/reagent
carousel is not recognized.
The procedure below is for the second case.
Procedure:
Scanning reagent bar code failed.
1) Confirm the client environment and usage habits:
If the client environment is under high humidity condition, with too much condensed water, it will affect the
scanning of the reagent barcode. The fault is that some reagent barcodes cannot be scanned occasionally.
Customers are advised to install air conditioners to ensure air humidity.
The client usually puts the reagent carousel in the refrigerator and then shuts down the analyzer. This operation
may cause the reagent barcode to be unscanned. There are two ways to improve it: Method 1: the customer is
recommended not to take the reagent carousel out. Leave it in the analyzer, keep the power of the analyzer on
at night, and plug the reagent carousel cover. Method 2: Remove the reagent carousel at night and put it in the
refrigerator. The analyzer can be powered off. The next morning, power on the analyzer first to start the Reagent
Refrigeration Unit, and after the Reagent Refrigeration Unit is stable (about 5° under normal temperature
conditions), take the reagent carousel out from the refrigerator, and place it in the reagent compartment as
quickly as possible to reduce the contact time with the outside air.
2) Check if there is too much condensed water in the sample/reagent carousel, if the barcode window is
dirty or if there is condensed water, please clean it.
3) View the reagent scanning situations, which are divided into the following types:
a) All reagents cannot be scanned:
Check whether the barcode scanner has red light. If not, check whether the J5 connection line
form the reagent barcode scanner to the main control board is normal, re-plug and check if the
connection line is damaged or is tied too tightly by the cable tie. To replace the barcode scanner,
please refer to 3.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader. If the replacement of the main control board
is invalid, replace the barcode scanner (this is rare).
Note: If all reagents cannot be scanned, the chemistries may not be imported, or the chemistries

are wrong.
b) The chemistries cannot be scanned.
Try to manually load the reagent position. Operation method: enter the software, Reagent
Reagent Calibration, select the position where the reagent is placed, click Reagent Load,
input the barcode on the reagent pack at the barcode field in the pop-up screen. Note: Please
keep in mind that the barcord is case sensitive.
If the reagent can be loaded successfully, the barcode may have water mist or scratches or poor
adhesion.
If the reagent cannot be loaded successfully, it may be due to a chemistry problem. Re-import the
chemistry.
c) The barcode occasionally cannot be scanned; the position is not fixed.
Enter the software, align the barcode scanning position by referring to 7.8 Bar Code Unit
(Optional).
If it still cannot be solved after alignment, please replace the barcode scanner.
10.2.7 Cuvette Blank Out of Range C07004
Error Code: C07004
Fault Information: cuvette blank out of range. Cuvette No.: XX
Fault Mechanism: the 6th phase water blank is less than the lower limit of the allowable light intensity
alarm
Note: the 6th phase here is actually the 2nd phase of the wash station (facing the analyzer, from left to right),
and the 360E wash station has only four phases.
Possible Cause:
 The cuvette is polluted.
 The lamp is aging.
 The lamp is not installed correctly.
 The wash station dispenses liquid incorrectly.
 The wash station is overflowed.
 The optical lens is dirty.
 The light splitter lens assembly is abnormal.
Procedure:
1) Check the alarm information and determine the alarm cuvette No. If the interior of the cuvette is dirty,
please perform the cuvette detection and special wash by referring to Cuvette Check and Special
Wash. If the interior of the cuvette cannot be cleaned or the exterior is dirty, follow the steps in 3.3.7
Replacing Reaction Cuvette to replace the abnormal cuvette.
2) If the lamp is used for more than 2000 hours or 6 months, replace it. Refer to3.9.3 Replacing Lamp.
3) Check if the wash station overflows. If overflow occurs, refer to 3) in section 10.2.9.
4) Check the liquid dispensing volume in the 6th phase of the wash station and check the liquid volume
left in the cuvette according to7.9.7 the volume of the reaction liquid during cuvette washing process.
If the volume of liquid stored in the 6th phase is too small or there are bubbles, focus on the tubes and
connectors between SY01 and the wash probe. There may be leakage or blockage, please refer to
A.7Fluidic Diagram.
10.2.8 Light Intensity Is Too Weak C07003
Error Code: C07003
Fault Information: light intensity is too weak
Fault Mechanism: this alarm is triggered after Cuvette blank out of range occurs successively
Possible Cause: refer to 10.2.7 .
Procedure: refer to 10.2.7 .
10.2.9 Water Blank Out of Range (10X) C07009
Error Code: C07009
Fault Information: water blank out of range (10X)
Fault Mechanism: when the lamp fluctuates or the wash station overflows, the 340 nm water blank (light
intensity) of the 6th phase in the same cuvette will change significantly compared with the previous water blank.
If the changes in the 340 nm water blank (light intensity) of the 6th phase in 10 consecutive cuvettes exceed
the alarm threshold compared with the previous water blank, the alarm Water blank out of range (10X) is
generated.
Note: the 6th phase here is actually the 2nd phase of the wash station (facing the analyzer, from left to right),
and the 360E wash station has only four phases.
Possible Cause:

 Fluctuation of the lamp

 Insufficient dispensing volume of the 6th phase
 Bubbles in the 6th phase washing
 Dirty DI water
 The cuvette is contaminated and not cleaned thoroughly.
 Human factors:
a) The lamp is not replaced according to the maintenance software procedure. If the lamp is
replaced according to the procedure, the water blank reference value will be automatically
cleared.
b) The cuvette is not replaced according to the maintenance software procedure. If the cuvette is
replaced according to the procedure, the water blank reference value will be automatically
cleared.
c) Change the brightness value of the lamp in the parameter configuration. Direct change will also
cause a difference from the previous brightness. The alarm will then be generated.
d) To change the photoelectric gain value in the parameter configuration, align the photoelectric
gain according to the alignment procedure. The number cannot be directly changed.
e) After resetting the photoelectric collection bit, the water blank reference value is not cleared.
Replace the lamp again, and so the water blank reference value can be cleared.
Procedure:
1) First, eliminate the human factors, please check the human factors in the possible causes, if any,
replace the lamp (actually, only perform the flow but do not change the lamp). Refer to 3.9.3 Replacing
Lamp.
2) If the lamp is used for more than 2000 hours or 6 months, replace it. Refer to 3.9.3 Replacing Lamp.
Note: If the lamp fluctuates greatly, replace it. Inspection method: View the reaction curve of the
sample result with "L!". If the reaction curve has significant fluctuations, and the fluctuations of adjacent
tests have similar curves, it can be judged that the lamp fluctuates greatly, and the problem generally
occurs at the end of the life of the lamp.
3) Check if the wash station is overflowed
Inspection method: Take out the cuvette and observe whether there is liquid on the exterior of the
cuvette.
If there is overflow, please confirm which phase of overflow occurs and perform corresponding
processing according to the hydropneumatic map.
a) If there is overflow in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd phases, (the 4th phase overflow is unlikely with dry
cuvette). According to the following hydropneumatic map, consider whether the external waste
discharge tube of the analyzer is folded or crystallized, resulting in poor discharging of waste
liquid. Secondly, check the corresponding ZQ01, ZQ02, and ZQ03 tubes, the W09, W10, W12,
W14, W16, and W17 tubes, and whether the wash probe of the wash station is blocked or
loosened, and whether the pumps P02 and P03 (082-002426-00) are damaged. To replace the
tube, please refer toTable 5-1 The length of the tube and Identification..
b) If only the 1st-phase overflow occurs, check whether the 1st-phase probe of the wash station is
blocked, and then check whether the corresponding ZQ01, ZQ02, and ZQ03 tubes are blocked
or loosened. Check whether the high-concentration waste discharge tube outside the analyzer is
folded or blocked, and check the P02 pump.
Note: You can use the replacement method to exclude the causes.
If the P02 problem is suspected, P03 and P02 can be replaced. If the fault is transferred, the
pump is faulty.
The ZQ01 and W09 tubes on the aspirate probe of the wash station can be exchanged. If the
fault is transferred, the 1st-phase related fluidic system is faulty.
c) If only the 2nd-phase overflow occurs, because the 2nd and 3rd phases adopt P03 as the power,
consider that the 2nd-phase wash probe is blocked, or the W09 tube is blocked or loosened.
d) If only the 3rd-phase overflow occurs, consider that the 3rd-phase wash probe is blocked, or the
W10 tube is blocked or loosened.

e) If the 2nd and 3rd-phase overflows occur, focus on whether the external low-concentration waste
tube is blocked, check whether the W17, W16, W14, and W12 tubes are loosened or blocked,
and then use the replacement method to check whether the P03 is damaged. The W09 and W10
tubes are seldom blocked at the same time as and the 2nd and 3rd phase wash probe, but
investigation is required.
ZQ01
W09
W10
W11
T36
W12
SI1 SI2 SI3 SI4
T39 T38 T37
D29 T33 D31 W13 W14 ZQ02
D30 T32 D32 P04 P03 P02
ZZ10
SV07 SV05
W15 W16 ZQ03
D27 D28
T28 T27 T26

T31
1 2 3
D25 D26 ZZ06 ZZ09
T41
SV06
T25
ZZ07
DI Water D24 ZZ05 T29
preheating W17
ZZ08
D23 T22 T24 T30
From SY01
T21 T23 SY02
ZZ04 Wash
solution
preheating Low- High-
concentrat concentration
From Diluted Wash ion waste waste
Solution Tank
4) Check the liquid dispensing volume in the 6th phase of the wash station and check the liquid volume
left in the cuvette according to 7.9.7 the volume of the reaction liquid during cuvette washing process..
If the volume of liquid stored in the 6th order is too small or there are bubbles, focus on the tubes and
connectors between SY01 and the wash probe. There may be leakage or blockage, please refer
toA.7Fluidic Diagram.
10.2.10 Lamp Is Not Turned On C07005
Error Code: C07005
Fault Information: lamp is not turned on
Fault Mechanism: after the lamp is tuned on, the detected light intensity is less than the lower alarm limit.
Fault Scenario: the error is reported when the analyzer is running, or is turned on.
Possible Cause(s)
 The lamp is damaged.
 The lamp post is not tightened.
 The power board of the lamp is not connected properly.
 The power supply of the analyzing unit is disconnected.
 The wash station overflows.
 The light splitter lens assembly is faulty.
Procedure:
1) Open the reaction carousel cover and check if the lamp is turned on. If it is not, rerun the operating
software.
2) At the same time, check if the wash station overflows. If overflow occurs, refer to 3) in section 10.2.9.
3) Open the upper panel of the lamp to confirm that the post nut is tightened. Refer to 3.9.3 Replacing
Lamp.
4) Replace the lamp.
5) Re-plug the J5 connector of the DCDC power board and check the wire of the J5 connector to the
lamp for damage.
6) Enter the Utility screen —> Maintenance—>Alignment —>Photometric Unit. Click Turn On Lamp,
turn the multimeter to the DC gear, and measure the J5 connector on the DCDC power board. If it is
not in the range of 11.4 -12.6 V, replace the board.
7) Check if the fiber is damaged or unable to conduct light. When one end of the fiber is illuminated at

the lamp, the light will be seen at the other end of the fiber.
If the fiber is damaged, replace it. Refer to 3.9.4 Replacing Fiber Bundle.
8) Check if there is any foreign matter in the lens of the photometer in the reaction carousel. If there is,
remove it according to3.9.7 Photometer Lens Maintenance.
9) Replace the light splitter lens assembly 115-041267-00 by referring to 3.9.5 Replacing Light-splitting
Assembly..
10.2.11 Light Intensity Is Too Strong C07006
Error Code: C07006
Fault Information: light intensity is too strong
Fault Mechanism: After the lamp is tuned on, the detected light intensity is greater than the upper alarm
limit
Fault Scenario: The error is reported when the analyzer is running or is turned on
Possible Cause:
 Fluctuation of light source or lamp problem
 Cuvette uninstalled
 Photoelectric gain adjustment too high
 Incorrect fiber splice position
 Faulty light splitter lens assembly
Procedure:
1) For lamp problems, if the lamp is used for more than 2000 hours or 6 months or a non-original bulb is
used, replace it. Refer to 3.9.3 Replacing Lamp.
2) Check if the cuvette is installed, or if the wash station overflows. Refer to 3) in section 10.2.9.
3) Enter the Utility->Maintenance->Parameter Search and Configuration screen of the operating
software, select Reaction Carousel Unit, and view
the photoelectric gain value of each wavelength, which is normally 31 to 255. The larger the value, the smaller
the measured AD value and the higher the absorbance.
There are two ways to adjust the value. Method a) is recommended.
a)Refer to 7.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment for auto adjustment of photoelectric gain. The value
will change automatically after adjustment.
b)Re-configure the gain value by referring to 6.7.4 Parameter Configuration.
4) If the gain value has been adjusted to 255 and the alarm still exists, try to adjust the fiber position,
loosen the fiber splice fixing screw at the reaction carousel, and move the fiber along the lamp direction.
Please refer to Figure 7-8 Adjust the fiber bunch position.
5) Replace the light splitter lens assembly 115-041267-00 by referring to 3.9.5 Replacing Light-splitting
Assembly.
10.2.12 Equipment cannot be connected
There are several types of faults when the analyzer cannot be connected:
 Software alarm: Fault code: C01001 Fault Information: the analyzer cannot be connected
 An error occurred while you enter the software. The prompt: Inquiring instrument configuration failed.
The following information is displayed on the screen:

Figure 10-1 Inquiring instrument configuration failed

 An error occurred while you enter the software. The following information is displayed on the screen:
Note:It is generally not found in the COM port information.
Figure 10-6 Operating software starting up failed

Possible Cause:
 The analyzer main power is off
 Faulty power switch
 PC serial port abnormal
 Serial cable abnormal
 Online configuration file error
 Main control board abnormal
Procedure:
1) Check that the main switch of the analyzer and the switch of the analyzing unit are turned on. Normally,
the power switch indicator should be always on. If the switch is not on, please check and reconnect
the power cord of the analyzer, and confirm that the fuse at the power outlet is intact. Please refer to
Replacing the fuse. If it is confirmed that there is no problem with the power supply, replace the
switch.Refer to 4.5.4 Replacing Power swich and fuse
2) Check that the analyzer is connected to the computer, re-plug the serial cable, and check whether the
serial cable is normal.
Serial cable inspection mode: The serial cable is the RS232 direct connection, connect to 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 7 directly. Use the multimeter to adjust to the buzzer gear and measure whether the 2, 3, 4, 5,
and 7 at both ends of the serial cable are connected. If not, replace the serial cable.
3) View the serial port status of the computer, exit to the desktop of the computer, right click on the
computer, select the device manager, and view the port. Confirm that there is a COM port on the
computer, and the status is not ! or ?. If it is abnormal, please reinstall the serial port driver or replace
the serial port card.
4) Check the configuration file information and view if the COM port is set the same as the actual COM
port. If it is different, please change it. Please refer to 6.3.3 Confirm the configuration file.
5) Download the latest version of the software and upgrade it. Refer to 6.4 Software Upgrading.
6) If the above cannot be solved, please check the wiring of the serial port of the analyzer to the main
control board, and apply for the main control board to replace it. Refer to Installation Methods and
Precautions of the main control board.
10.2.13 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level of the Wash Well A01028
Error Code: A01028
Fault Information: the sample probe fails to detect the level of the wash well
Fault Mechanism: When the sample probe is cleaned in the wash well, the upper computer does not
receive the level detection signal or the level detection signal does not last for a long time.
Procedure:
1)First confirm that whether there is water in the wash well, and whether the water quantity meets
the requirements when the analyzer generates the alarm. Please follow the Check Probes/Mixers
Exterior Wash Flow method for inspection.
2)If the wash well is dry, check the hydropneumatic system. First check the water in the mixer
wash well.
a)If there is water in the mixer, focus on the exterior cleaning tube of the sample probe,
especially whether the restricting capillary of the SV03 valve outlet is blocked, and then check
whether the tubes and connectors of D21, D19, D18 and D16 are blocked.
 Check if SY01 is blocked or loosened. If you need to replace it, please refer to
Removing/Reinstalling Cuvette Wash Preheating Assembly.
 Check the SV01 valve. Refer to 7.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status.
 Then consider the SV03 valve failure, you can open the valve with reference to the
content of 7.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status and check if there is a crisp sound.
If not, the valve may be damaged, replace it. In addition, the replacement method can
be used, SV03 and SV04 are interchanged. If the fault is transferred, the SV03 is faulty.
If it is not transferred, check whether the J6 connector from SV03 to the power drive
board is damaged or loosened. If not, apply for the power drive board for replacement.
Refer to Installation Methods and Precautions of the power drive board.
b)If the mixer is also waterless, check the shared tube and check it in the following order:
 If the tank does not have enough deionized water, add the deionized water.
 If the inlet filter is blocked or damaged, try to replace it. Please refer to
Removing/Reinstalling Filter
 If the tubes (D01 - D04) related to the exterior cleaning are blocked, try to dredge the
tubes.

3)If there is little water in the wash well, focus on the exterior cleaning tube of the sample probe,
especially whether the restricting capillary of the SV03 valve outlet is blocked.
4)If there is water in the wash well and the flow rate is normal, check if the sample probe is bent.
Check the verticality of the sample probe, visually measure it, or use a vertical reference for comparison.
If the sample probe is not straight, please replace the sample probe. Refer to A.2BS-360E Moving Parts
Position Confirmation Guide (No Alignment Tooling)Judging and Calibrating Verticality of Probe.
5)If the wash well is not well drained, causing the DI water retained, check whether the waste
tube of the wash well is blocked. If so, dredge the tube and check it according to the fluidics diagram
of the whole machine.
6)Check if the horizontal and vertical positions of the sample probe to the wash well are correct.
Refer to 7.5.2 Probe to Horizontal and Vertical Positions on Wash Well for alignment.
7)Check if the analyzer is falsely alarmed due to interference:
a) Confirm that the analyzer has a grounding wire and the zero ground voltage is <5V. The
measuring method is: set the multimeter to AC 250V voltage, and connect the black test lead to
the ground wire jack, and the red test lead to the live wire/zero wire jack, respectively. When the
grounding is good, the voltage between the ground wire and the zero wire is less than 5V, and
the voltage between the ground wire and the live wire is similar to the voltage between the live
wire and the zero wire.
b)Check whether the connection cable of the level detection board is damaged, or the cable
is bound too tightly by the cable tie, or the board connector is loose. The specific operation method
is: power off the whole analyzer, open the protective cover, remove 2 hardened dusting screws
(M3X6), remove the arm cover of the sample probe (DS193), refer to Figure 3-26 Removing
level sense board, disconnect the J1. J2. and J3 connectors of the level detection board, and re-
connect them. If the connection wire of the J2 connector to the J11 connector of the main control
board is damaged, wind it with an electrical tape. If the cable tie is too tight, loosen the cable tie
and re-plug the J11 connector.
8)If the level detection board 051-002479-00 is faulty replace it by referring to3.5.6 Replacing
level sense board.
9)If the main control board is faulty, refer to Installation Methods and Precautions of the main
control board for replacement.

MF01
T05 T06 D08 T07 T08 D09
T09 S ample
SV02 probe Mi xer
SY03
Wash well
of sa mple Wash well
pr obe of m ixer
T14
D18 D19 T17 D21
D07 SV03
T15 T16
T46 D20 T18 D22
D33
SV04
D17
T04
D06
P01
D16
To Cuvette
Wash
T13
D05
T12 D11
T10
D10
D15 T11 D14 D12 D13
T03 SV01
D04
SY01
T02 Front cover

D03
FL01
D02
T01
D01 FS01
, V01
10.2.14 Sample Probe Fails to Detect the Level on the Reaction Carousel
when Dispensing A01033
Error Code: A01033
Fault Information: the sample probe fails to detect the liquid level on the reaction carousel when
dispensing
Alarm Mechanism: When the sample probe is dispensing in the reaction carousel, firstly, detect the R1
volume added before, and determine the number of steps of the vertical movement of the sample probe adding
the sample according to the R1 volume (volume tracking technology). This alarm is triggered if no level is
detected within the specified number of steps.
Troubleshoot as follows:
When analyzing the problem, follow this sequence: level signal generation (sample probe) → signal analysis
(level detection board) → transmission (connection line) → signal processing (main control board).
Procedure:
1)First check the alarm log of the analyzer and check if the analyer still has an alarm that the
sample probe does not detect the liquid level in the sample carousel or during cleaning. If there is a
similar alarm, judge that the level detection function is faulty. At this time, check if the sample probe,
the level detection board, and the power supply and wire of the level detection board are normal.
2)If there is only this alarm, according to the alarm mechanism, first check whether the reagent
in the reagent pack is sufficient, if not, add the reagent in time.
Note: There should be no air bubbles in the reagent pack; if it is an open reagent, do not pour too
much reagent.
3)Observe the sample probe. If the reagent probe lowers into the reagent pack during the whole
procedure of aspirating the reagent, focus on whether the sample probe is blocked, and whether the

reagent volume added to the cuvette is insufficient due to the leakage of the sample syringe and the
pipeline.
If the sample probe is blocked, please dredge the probe by referring to Cleaning probe interior.
If the syringe leaks, please replace it by referring to Replace Syringe.
Check the Teflon tubing between the sample probe and the syringe. There should be no wear
and tear, if any, please replace it directly.
4)If the sample probe does not lower to aspirate the reagent but return directly during the test,
judge that the function of the level detection board may be damaged or interfered. At this time, check
the power supply and wire of the level detection board. Replace the level detection board.
5)Check the vertical reagent dispense position from the sample probe to the reaction carousel,
and align it according to 7.5.6 Probe to Vertical Limit Position on Reaction Carousel.
10.2.15 Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Is Out of Range
Fault Mechanism: the temperature of reagent carousel is not within 2-12°.
Key note: The refrigeration module is cooled by three Peltiers.
Error Code:
 A14007: reagent refrigeration temperature is out of range.
TDISP temperature:
 A14008: reagent refrigeration temperature is out of range.
TDISP: ?
Fault Analysis:
Does the ambient
Reage nt refrigera tion Is ambient temperature of the
temperature temperature Yes department meet the
overran ge abn ormal standard? Is air
conditioning required?
No
Are th e three 1 Wire plugg ing

cooling currents within
the specified
Yes prob lem
ra nge? 2 Replace Peltier
No
1 Clean the dust

Is the re accumu lated
du st un clea ned i n th e dust scre en
scree n and the re fri gera ti on Yes
fan?
2 Clean the
refriger atio n fan
No
Is the Check the sen so rs.

temperature sensor Does the resistan ce
Yes
resistance at e ach temperature
faulty? meet the stan dard?
No
Replace th e p ower
drive boar d

Figure 10-7 Troubleshooting flowchart for reagent refrigeration temperature out of range
Procedure:
1) View alarm information and temperature display status.
2) Confirm that the ambient temperature of the department is within 15 to 30 degrees. If it is out of range,
please install an air conditioner.
3) Enter the software Utility - Status - Power, and view the Peltier status. if it is out of range, please
check the Peltier and wiring. To replace the Peltier, please refer to 3.4.5 Replacing cooler and sealing
ring.
4) Check the air filter and the cooling fan for serious dust accumulation. If so, clean it. If the fan is
abnormal, replace it. Refer to 3.4.9 Replacing cooling fan of reagent refrigeration.
5) Check the wiring from the temperature sensor to the power drive board, measure the resistance value
of the temperature sensor for reagent refrigeration. The sensor has a negative temperature coefficient.
Under normal conditions, the resistance value is 5 KΩ at 25 Celsius degrees, and the resistance value
decreases with increasing temperature. If the sensor is abnormal, replace it. Refer to3.4.4 Replacing
Reagent Temperature Sensor.
6) If the above steps cannot solve the problem, please replace the power drive board by referring to
Installation Methods and Precautions of the power drive board.
10.2.16 Clinical Result Problems
Troubleshoot as follows:
Result inaccurate
Result of individual Results of multiple

chemistry inaccurate chemistries inaccurate
Good Different Same

Poor repeatability repeatability wavelengths wavelength
Confirm Fluctuated
Reage Check the start Check the Normal
that the reaction curve
nt position of the use time of reaction
parameters
photoelectric the curve
invalid are set Check the start
acquisition and reagent, correctly, Check the position of
replace the light and and probe, photoelectric
splitter lens replace the perform syringe, acquisition,
assembly if reagent for cross- cuvette, and cuvette, lamp,
necessary recalibratio contaminat optics and mechanical
n. ion check. position
Figure 10-2 Troubleshooting clinical result problem

Client FAQ:
1) Common errors in parameters
 The parameter is set incorrectly, or the increment and decrement are set to the parameter.
 The 2nd generation reagents are used, but the parameters input are the 1st generation ones.
2) Calibration setup error
 The concentration value of the calibrator is set incorrectly, or a wrong calibrator is taken.
 The calibration rule is set incorrectly, and the wrong calibration rule is selected.
 The number of calibration repetitions is set incorrectly or may be set to only once, which usually
should be 2 to 4 times by default.
 The calibrator displayed by the software expired and was not modified in time, and could not be
calibrated.

 In the calibration rule, the calibrator is incorrectly selected, and there may be multiple calibrators
for one chemistry.
3) QC setup error
 The control target value and SD value are set incorrectly, or the wrong control is taken.
 The QC rule is set incorrectly, and the correct control is not selected.
 The control displayed by the software expired and was not modified in time, and the QC could
not be applied.
4) Redissolution error
 Dry powder calibrator and QC solution should be redissolved before use. An error occurs when
redissolution with water, for example, only 3 ml of water is required, but 5 ml is added.
 The redissolved water is used incorrectly, for example, use the distilled water placed for a long
time, or directly use the mineral water for redissolution. For redissolution, the distilled water for
injection is recommended.
 Pipettes are recommended for redissolution when syringe or an uncalibrated sample gun is used.
 After redissolution, the storage is incorrect. After normal redissolution, the solution should be split
charged and stored frozen, and the freezing and thawing cannot be repeated. The storage is
recommended not to exceed 1 month.
5) Reagent problem
 Reagent is expired
 Reagent is not placed in the refrigerator
 Air bubbles in the reagent pack.
 Rgt load error
 Reagent tilt
6) Calibrator and control problem
 Matching calibrator and control are not used
 Calibrator and control used is not assigned
7) Analyzer problem
 Micro-blocking of the sample probe may result in an assignment or a low result
 The sample syringe leaks, which may result in poor repeatability
 The Teflon tubing from the sample probe to the sample syringe is folded or damaged, which may
lead to poor repeatability of the results.
 If the lamp life exceeds 2000 hours or 6 months, the stability of the results may be poor, and the
reaction curve may fluctuate. In particular, the enzymatic chemistry will frequently send an alarm
of linearity limit out of range.
 If the photoelectric acquisition position is wrong, all the results will be unstable.
 If the cuvette is contaminated, the result will be unstable.
 If the mixer is dirty, the result will be unstable.
 Position shift will affect loading and mixing, resulting in unstable results.
8) Water quality problem
 Poor water quality will affect the results of chemistries such as ions.
 The TBA chemistry is affected by the pH value of water
 The water quality will affect the cleaning effect. There will be cleaning residue, affecting the results
9) Sample problem
 Sample centrifugation problem. The sample containing fibrinogen may block the probe.
 Sample trait problems, hemolysis, jaundice, chyle blood, etc.
 Blood collection tube problems. Separation of glue, etc. may be easy to result in probe blockage.
 Some patients have taken certain drugs and caused abnormal detection in some chemistries.

10.3 Data alarms
Data alarm is a result flag indicating that an error or abnormity occurs to a result. By identifying results flags can evaluate if the results are reliable and acceptable. Data
alarm is not necessarily an error but will definitely influence the result and should be considered carefully.
The system provides monitoring of biochemistry results and ISE chemistry results. When calibration error or failure, or sample result error occurs due to the sample,
reagent or system failure, a flag will appear near the corresponding calibration result or sample results. The following pages summary the result flags of the system.
Table 10-5 Data alarms and corrective actions
Flag Alarm Type Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions

< Result related Exceeds linearity range The result exceeds the low limit of the linearity Take no actions, or rerun the test for confirmation.
low range.
< ISE result related Exceeds measurement Sample or control result exceeds the low limit of the Take no actions, or rerun the test for confirmation.
range low measurement range.
> Result related Exceeds linearity range The result exceeds the high limit of the linearity Rerun the test with sample diluted or decreased.
high range.
> ISE result related Exceeds measurement Sample or control result exceeds the high limit of the Rerun the test with sample diluted or decreased.
range high measurement range.
▲ Result related Sample volume is Sample volume is Increased one No actions are required.
Increased one
▼ Result related Sample volume is Sample volume is decreased one No actions are required.
decreased one
^ Result related Exceeds reference range The result exceeds the high limit of the reference No actions are required.
high range.
^! Result related Exceeds critical range The result exceeds the high limit of the critical No actions are required.
high range.
v Result related Exceeds reference range The result exceeds the low limit of the reference No actions are required.
low range.
v! Result related Exceeds critical range The result exceeds the low limit of the critical range. No actions are required.
low
10-x Result related 10-x Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 continuous Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
results of a control are on the same side. normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
1-2s Result related 1-2s The current QC result is between ±2 and ±3 No actions are required.
standard deviations from the assigned mean
concentration.
1-3s Result related 1-3s The current QC result is greater than ±3 standard Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
deviations from the assigned mean concentration. normal, and the instrument is working correctly.

2-2s Result related 2-2s Results of two controls in the same run or two Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
continuous results of a control are on the same side normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
and greater than ±2 standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
4-1s Result related 4-1s Results of two runs (4 results), or 4 continuous Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
results of a control are on the same side and greater normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
than ±1 standard deviation from the assigned mean
concentration.
2.7s Result related 2.7s Multiple QC data and threshold values or cumulative Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. If
sum exceed ±2.7SD. the error remains, contact our customer service
department or your local distributor.
ABS Result related Absorbance out of range The absorbance of primary or secondary Check the sample for foreign matters or interferents;
wavelength used for calculating results is greater check if the reagent is qualified and placed in the
than 3.4A. correct position; check the cuvette is clean; check if the
photometric system is working normally.
BLK Calibration related Blank response out of The reagent goes wrong; insufficient reagent is Check if the cuvette is not overflowed, the reagent is
range dispensed; the cuvette contains air bubbles; the light sufficient without air bubbles, the light does not drift and
drifts; or the cuvette is overflowed. the chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes,
replace the reagent and then rerun the test.
BOE Result related Substrate depletion The sample concentration is too high, and substrate Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion
depletion occurs during fixed-time measurements. limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
CalcE Result related The results of constituent The test results of constituent chemistries of the No actions are required.
chemistries of a calculation are out of linearity range.
calculation out of range
CALE Result related Edited calibration factor The calibration factors are edited. No actions are required.
CALF Result related Calibration failed.(for The calibration fails. Recalibrate.
biochemistries)
CALF Result related No fluid in tubing 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
or leaking. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube

3. Air bubble detector failed. 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
electrodes.
6. Replace the bubble detector.
1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.

2. Replace the pump tube
3. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
electrodes.
CALF Calibration related No fluid in tubing 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
or leaking. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
3. Air bubble detector failed. 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
electrodes.
1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.

2. Replace the pump tube
electrodes.
CALJ Calibration related Rejected calibration The calibration factors are rejected. No actions are required.
factor
CALM Result related Air in segment 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the pump tube
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
or leaking. electrodes.
3. Air bubble detector failed. 3. Replace the bubble detector.
CALM Calibration related Air in segment 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 1. Replace the pump tube
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked 2. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
or leaking. electrodes.
3. Air bubble detector failed. 3. Replace the bubble detector.
CALR Result related Recalculated calibration The calibration factors are recalculated. No actions are required.
factor
COV Calibration related Calibration curve not For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base cannot Check that the reagent and calibrator are normal, and
convergent be calculated and no calibration curve is drawn. then recalibrate. If the error remains, contact our
customer service department.

CSD Calibration related Calibration curve The calculated standard deviation of the calibration Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
standard deviation out of curve exceeds the specified limit. reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
range
DEL Calibration related Deleted QC result The QC result has been deleted. No actions are required.
DET Calibration related Calibration determination The calculated determination coefficient of the Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
coefficient out of range calibration curve exceeds the specified limit. reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
DEP Calibration related Saving calibration result 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
error 2. Communication interface or pins failure 2. Replace the interface or pins.
3. Main control board of the ISE module goes wrong. 3. Replace the main control board of the ISE module.
4. Software error. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
DTGL Result related Insufficient probe wash The probe wash solution is insufficient during Fill more probe wash solution.
solution measurement.
DUP Calibration related Calibration repeatability The difference between the maximum and minimum Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable,
error response of the calibrator exceeds the specified troubleshoot the error, and then recalibrate.
limit.
EDT Result related Edited result The result has been edited. No actions are required.
EDT Calibration related Edited calibration factor The calibration factors have been edited. No actions are required.
ENC Result related No calculation interval The sample concentration is too high, and substrate Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion
depletion occurs within the lag time of rate check limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
measurements.
EXP Result related Enzyme linearity range The high-concentration sample leads to substrate Rerun the test with diluted sample.
extension depletion during the reaction time, and the result is
calculated by using measuring points within the lag
time.
EXT Result related Extended calibration The result is obtained by extending the calibration Take no actions, or recalibrate.
factor time.
FAC Calibration related Calibration slope The slope difference is applicable to linear Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
difference out of range calibration only and refers to the K factor (slope) reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
difference between two adjacent calibrations. It
exceeds the specified limit.
ICA Result related The response is normal, The chemistry has not been calibrated. Rerun it after calibration.
but results cannot be
calculated.
L! Result related Water blank fluctuation is 1. The cuvette is overflowing. 1. Check if the cuvette is overflowing.
out of range. 2. The lamp has been replaced incorrectly. 2. Check if the Replace Lamp command is executed

3. Cuvette check is not performed after maintenance. during lamp replacement.
4. The cable connectors are not tightened. 3. Check if the cable connectors and retaining screw of
5. The retaining screw is not tightened. the lamp have been tightened.
6. Cleaning liquid inside the cuvette is little. 4. Check if the cleaning liquid inside the cuvette is no
7. The lamp is aged. less than half of the cuvette.
8. The photometer goes wrong. 5. Check if the reaction curve fluctuates irregularly. If
yes, replace the lamp.
6. If the error remains, contact our customer service
department.
LIN Result related Non-linear The measuring points for result calculation are Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion
nonlinear, because the sample concentration is too limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample. If the alarm
high, or the substrate depletion limit is not specified occurs for more than one chemistry, and the reaction
or unreasonable. The lamp is aged. curve fluctuates irregularly, replace the lamp.
LOW Result related Response less than that The sample concentration is lower than the For ascending calibration curve, rerun the test with
of the minimum- sensitivity indicated on the reagent pack, making standard or increased sample volume; for descending
concentration calibrator response less than that of the lowest-concentration calibration curve, rerun the test with diluted sample.
calibrator.
MBK Calibration related Mixed blank absorbance The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not clear; Check if the cuvette is clear and not overflowed, the
out of range the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or insufficient reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and the
reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes, replace
the reagent and then rerun the test.
MON Calibration related Calibration curve not The calibration data and calibration curve are not Check if the calibrator is defined and placed correctly,
monotonic monotonic. and then recalibrate.
NLN Result related No linear interval The high-concentration sample leads to less than 3 Rerun the test with diluted sample.
valid measuring points within the reaction time of
rate check measurements.
NOIS Result related Electrode voltage noise 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE main control board failure. 3. Replace the main control board of the ISE module.
4. Salt buildup around electrodes or tubes due to 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
fluidic leaks.
NOIS Calibration related Electrode voltage noise 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE main control board failure. 3. Replace the main control board of the ISE module.
4. Salt buildup around electrodes or tubes due to 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
fluidic leaks.

OVE Result related Overridden calibration The result is obtained by overriding a failed Take no actions, or recalibrate.
factor calibration.
PUGA Result related Air in calibrator A 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
3. Pump tube A is aging, blocked, or broken. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken； 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path are blocked electrodes.
or leaking. 6. Replace the bubble detector.
6. Air bubble detector failed.
PUGA Calibration related Air in calibrator A 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
PUGB Result related Air in calibrator B 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
PUGB Calibration related Air in calibrator B 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B 2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles
PRO Result related Prozone check error Antibody excess occurs due to too high sample Check the reaction curve and the prozone check
concentration. parameters. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
R Result related Rerun result The result is obtained by rerunning the test. No actions are required.
R4S Result related R4S One result of a run is greater than +2 standard Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
deviations from the assigned mean and the other normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
greater than -2SDs.

RBK Result related R1 blank absorbance out The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not clear; Check if the cuvette is clear and not overflowed, the
of range the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or insufficient reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and the
reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes, replace
the reagent and then rerun the test.
RCE Result related Response calculation Absorbance data for calculation is incomplete, or the Rerun the test. If the error remains, contact our
error dividend is 0. customer service department.
REC Result related Recalculated result The sample result is recalculated manually with the /
latest calibration factors.
RESP Result related ISE response check code 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable
Command format or 3. Main control board of the ISE module goes wrong. 3. Replace the main control board of the ISE module.
execution error 4. Software error. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
RESP Calibration related ISE response check code 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
Command format or 3. Main control board of the ISE module goes wrong. 3. Replace the main control board of the ISE module.
execution error 4. Software error. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it
RGTE Result related Expired reagent The result is based on an expired reagent. Replace the reagent.
RGTL Result related Insufficient reagent The result is based on insufficient reagent. Replace the reagent.
RGTL Calibration related Insufficient reagent The calibration result is based on insufficient Replace the reagent.
reagent.
RRN Result related Response greater than The sample concentration exceeds the high limit of Rerun the test with diluted sample.
that of the maximum- the calibrator concentration.
concentration calibrator
SEN Calibration related Calibration sensitivity The difference of final response of the maximum Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the
error and minimum concentration calibrators exceeds the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.
specified limit.
SJAM Result related Sample probe is clogged Probe clogging is detected during sampling or the Sample treatment.
sample probe is clogged during sampling.
SLDR Calibration related Electrode slope drift 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
3. New reagent pack is unsteady. since installed.
4. Reference electrode has been used for over 66 3. Run a couple of calibrations after installing new
months. reagent pack.
5. ISE main control board failure. 4. Replace the reference electrode.
6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically 5. Replace the ISE main control board.
6. Control the ambient temperature to make the

fluctuation within +/-4℃.
SLEX Calibration related Slope out of range 1. Electrode is not installed correctly. 1. Reinstall the electrode
2. Calibrator expired. 2. Replace the calibrator.
3. Electrode degenerated 3. Replace the problematic electrode and rerun.
4. Bubbles in reference electrode 4. Remove the electrode and clap on it to eliminate
5. Reference electrode has been used for a long time bubbles. Reinstall the electrode and run calibration.
6. Electrodes interfered. 5. Replace reference electrode and rerun.
7. Module or tubing temperature above 32℃. 6. Troubleshoot the electrodes by replacing them in
different groups.
7. Monitor temperature, if too high, relocate equipment.
SLP Result related Corrected result The result is adjusted with calculation factors. No actions are required.
SLP Result related The results are produced Calibration factors instead of the default ones are No actions are required.
when the calibration configured for the second time calibration.
factors instead of the
default ones are
configured for the
second time calibration.
SMPA Result related Air in sample 1. Sample is insufficient or contains many bubbles 1. Increase the sample volume. At least 90μl sample
after dispensing. should be prepared.
2. No or insufficient sample has been dispensed into 2. Electrode is not installed correctly. Reinstall it.
the sample injection port. 3. Check the waste tube, and if necessary, replace it.
3. The electrodes are not properly installed, causing
leakage.
4. The waste pump tube is aging or broken.
SMPE Result related Expired sample The sample is expired. Replace the sample.
SMPL Result related Insufficient sample The sample is insufficient during analysis. Refill the sample.
SMPL Calibration related Insufficient sample The sample is insufficient during analysis. Refill the sample.
VDRF Result related Electrode voltage drift 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically. 5. Replace the ISE main control board.
6. Control the ambient temperature to make the
fluctuation within +/-4℃

VOUT Result related Electrode Voltage 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
Overflow 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
5. Replace the ISE main control board.
VOUT Calibration related Electrode Voltage 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent pack.
Overflow 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15 minutes
T1 Result related Reaction disk 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
temperature error 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component 2. If not, contact our customer service department.
error and cable error)
3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong.
(component error and cable error)
4. The heater goes wrong. (component error and
cable error)
5. PCB error
6. Parameters are lost.
7. Electromagnetic interference exists.
TD Result related Photoelectric 1. Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
measurement period is 2. Reboot the operation unit.
out of rangePhotoelectric 3. If the error remains, contact our customer service
measurement period is department or your local distributor.
out of range
10.4 Error messages and corrective actions

Table 10-6 Error messages and corrective actions

Event ID Component Event Error Message and Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions
class Event Log
A00006 Middle layer Error Equipment / E2PROM read/write error. 1. Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch it
unit configuration cannot on again. Recover the failure by performing the
be read or saved Home maintenance procedure.
Error:
2. Refer to 6.7.4 for processing
A00007 Middle layer Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch it
unit error executed. on again. Recover the failure by performing the
Home maintenance procedure.
2. If this message appears for 3 times, contact our
R&D department.
A01006 Sample Error Sample probe vertical / Probe vertical movement error Probe vertical movement error
probe unit movement error
1. Sensor status error.2.Motor belt or belt 1. Sensor status error:
Position:
pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if
Error:
position: so.
Or 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driving 2. Failed to find the zero position:
circuit error; 3) Vertical motor error; 4)
1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
Sample probe Vertical sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose;
assembly.
horizontal movement 3. Collision occurs during operation other
than aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or 2) Replace PCB.
error
Position: circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor 3) Replace motor.
Error: is not blocked when assembling the probe; 4) Replace sensor.
3) Incorrect probe positioning; 4) Incorrect 5) Tighten properly.
Or sample/reagent carousel positioning; 4. 3. Collision occurs during operation other than
Collision error remains: 1) Collision aspirating:
Sample syringe sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2)
1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
movement error. Collision sensor is not blocked when
Position: assembling the probe; 3) Collision 2) Reassemble.
Error: sensor is not blocked due to deformation of 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or
blocking plate’s driving spring; 5. Vertical adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains,
movement is not allowed in current adjust positioning parameters.
horizontal position: Software error. 4) Adjust reagent carousel positioning parameters.
4. Collision error remains:
Probe horizontal movement error 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
1. Sensor status error.2.Motor belt or belt 2) Reassemble.

class Event Log
pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate again.
position: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current
error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) horizontal position:
Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs Home instrument or probe unit.
during horizontal movement: 1) Driving
Reagent probe horizontal movement error
circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home
position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is 1. Sensor status error:
loose;4. Horizontal movement is not Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if
allowed in current vertical position: so.
Software error 2. Failed to find the zero position:
1) Replace PCB.
Probe syringe movement error 2) Replace motor.
1. Sensor status error.2.Motor belt or belt 3) Replace sensor.
pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero 4) Tighten properly.
position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement:
2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error;
1) Replace PCB.
4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose.
2) Replace motor.
3) Replace sensor.
4) Tighten properly.
4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current
vertical position: Home instrument or reagent
probe unit.
Probe horizontal movement error
1. Sensor status error:
Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if
so.
2. Failed to find the zero position:
assembly.
2) Replace PCB.
3) Replace motor.
4) Replace sensor.

class Event Log
3. Horizontal Collision occurs during operation:
1) Replace PCB.
2) Replace motor or sensor.
3) Tighten.
4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current
vertical position: Home instrument or probe unit.
Probe syringe movement error
1. Sensor status error:
Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if
so.
2. Failed to find the zero position:
assembly.
2) Replace PCB.
3) Replace motor.
4) Replace sensor.
A01007 Sample Warning Sample probe / 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
probe unit collides with an failure; 2) Reassemble.
obstacle when
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to remove dust or
aspirating
assembling the probe; adjust the probe to be vertical; if problem remains,
Sample position:
Sample ID/bar code: 3) Incorrect probe positioning; adjust the positioning parameters.
Specific position: 4) Incorrect Sample/reagent carousel 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel positioning
positioning. parameters.
A01021 Sample Warning The probe collides / 1. Clog detection board is not well 1. Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or
probe unit with an obstacle connected. loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit;
when aspirating. 2. Clog detection board error. 2. Check if the power indication light for clog
detection board is on properly; check if clog
detection board is working correctly.
3. Replace clog detection board if malfunction has
been identified.

class Event Log
A01024 Sample Warning Insufficient sample / 1. No sample is loaded on the designated 1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and run the
probe unit or position. test again.
Sample probe level
2. Insufficient sample. 2. If there are level detection error, check the
detection failed. probe, level detection board and connecting
3. Probe level detection error.
cable; replace if any abnormality is identified.
A01027 Sample Warning Sample is insufficient / 1. The sample probe aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the sample meets the requirements,
probe unit or contains air and the sample inside the sample tube is sufficient
2. The probe syringe assembly goes
bubbles in volume and free of air bubbles. Then try again.
wrong.
Position:
3. There is an error with the vertical 2. Check if the probe syringe assembly works
Sample ID/bar code:
or extreme position of the sample probe properly.
Probe level detection above the reagent carousel. 3. Check if the vertical extreme position of the
failed 4. There is an error with the vertical sample probe above the reagent carousel is
Position: extreme position of the sample probe correct.
Sample ID/bar code: above the reaction carousel. 4. Check if the vertical extreme position of the
sample probe above the reaction carousel is
correct.
A01028 Sample Error Sample probe fails to / 1. No DI water or hydro error; Refer to 10.2.13 .
probe unit detect liquid level 2. Probe level detection error.
during cleaning
A01029 Sample Error Sample is insufficient / 1. Sample contains clots or insufficient 1. Check if sample has been pre-processed
probe unit or contains fibrins sample; 2. Probe hydro error; 3. Clog properly; check if sample contains foreign matters
and clots or Probe detection system error. such as clot; check if there is sufficient sample.
clog detection failed.
2. Clean the probe with diluted wash solution. If the
Position:
Sample ID/bar code: problem remains, remove the probe and unclog it.
3. Check if hydro unit is normal, especially if there
is any air bubbles in clog detection pressure
sensor.
4. Check clog detection board and clog detection
pressure sensor, if previous two possible causes
have been eliminated.

class Event Log
A01030 Sample Error Probe is clogged / 1. Probe is clogged; 2. Probe hydro error. 1. Clean the probe with diluted wash solution.
probe unit during cleaning. Remove the probe and unclog it.
2. Check if probe tubing, pump and valve for
interior wash is normal.
3. Check clog detection board and clog detection
pressure sensor.
A01033 Sample Warning Sample probe fails to / 1. There is no reagent or insufficient Refer to 10.2.14 .
probe unit detect liquid level on reagent in the cuvette;
reaction carousel
2. Incorrect vertical extreme position
when dispensing.
parameter for the probe on reaction
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code: carousel;
Chemistry: 3. Probe level detection error.
or
Sample probe level
detection failed.
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A01036 Probe unit Error Probe level detection / 1. There is an error with the communication 1. Check the cable for any sign of fray, loose
board cable connecting the level detection board connection, disconnection, or short circuit.
communication error with the lower-layer unit. 2. Replace the level detection board.
2. There is an error with the level
detection board.
A01039 Probe unit Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off analyzing unit power and switch on
error executed. again; Home the system.
customer service department or your local
distributor.
A02007 Probe unit Warning Probe R2 collides / 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable.
with an obstacle failure; 2) Reassemble.
when aspirating
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or
Reagent position:
assembling the probe; adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains,
Specific position:
3) Incorrect probe positioning; adjust positioning parameters.

class Event Log
4) Incorrect Sample/reagent carousel 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel positioning
positioning. parameters.
A02023 Probe unit Warning Insufficient reagent / 1.There is no reagent or insufficient 1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and run the
Or reagent on the designated position; test again.
Probe R2 level
2. Probe level detection error. 2. If there are level detection error, check the
detection failed.
probe, level detection board and connecting
cable; replace if any abnormality is identified.
A02025 Probe unit Warning Probe dispenses / 1. Sample probe aspirates nothing; 1. Check if the reagent meets the requirement and
insufficient reagent Syringe assembly error. is sufficient in volume, and then try again.
2. Check if there is any abnormity of syringe
assembly.
A02027 Probe unit Warning Water residues exist / Refer to 10.2.5 . Refer to 10.2.5 .
in the cuvette or
Probe level detection
failed
A02032 Probe unit Warning Reagent is / 1. The reagent probe aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the reagent meets the requirements,
insufficient or 2. The probe syringe assembly goes and is sufficient in volume and free of air bubbles.
contains air bubbles Then try again.
wrong.
Chemistry:
3. There is an error with the vertical 2. Check if the probe syringe assembly works
Position:
extreme position of the sample probe properly.
above the reagent carousel. 3. Check if the vertical extreme position of the
sample probe above the reagent carousel is
correct.
A05006 Mixer unit Error Mixer vertical / Mixer vertical movement error Mixer vertical movement error
movement error
1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is
Mixer horizontal
Belt or belt pulley is loose. loose, tighten them if so.
movement error
2. Failed to find the zero position. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove
1) Assembly is jammed; obstacle or replace with a new assembly. 2)
Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor. 4) Replace
2) Driving circuit error;
sensor. 5) Tighten properly.
3) Vertical motor error;
3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current
4) Vertical sensor error; horizontal position: Home instrument or unit.

class Event Log
5) Belt pulley is loose;
3. Vertical movement is not allowed in Mixer horizontal movement error
current horizontal position. 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is
Software error loose, tighten them if so.
2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace
Mixer horizontal movement error PCB. 2) Replace motor. 3) Replace sensor. 4)
1. Sensor status error Tighten properly.
Belt or belt pulley is loose. 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current
vertical position: Home instrument or unit.
2. Failed to find the zero position.
2) Motor error;
3) Home position sensor error;
4) Belt pulley is loose;
3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in
current vertical position.
Software error
A05007 Mixer unit Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off the analyzer power and switch on it
error executed. again. Recover failure by performing the Home
maintenance procedure.
R&D department.
A06006 Reaction Error Reaction carousel / Reaction carousel movement error 1. Failed to find the home position.
carousel unit movement error
1. Failed to find the zero position. Replace sensor or cable
Error:
Home position sensor error 2. The coded disk missed steps
2. The coded disk missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
1) Assembly is jammed; assembly;
2) Driving circuit error; 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error; 3) Replace motor;
4) Sensor error; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
5) Belt pulley is loose; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly;
3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed steps

class Event Log
3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed when moving to the home position.
steps when moving to the home position. Replace sensor or cable
Home position sensor error
A06008 Reaction Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off analyzing unit power and switch on
carousel unit error executed. again; Home the system.
distributor.
A07006 Sample/reag Error Sample / Sample/Reagent carousel movement Sample/reagent carousel outer ring movement
ent carousel carousel movement error. error
unit error
1. Failed to find the zero position. 1. Failed to find the zero position Replace sensor
Error:
Home position sensor error or cable.
2. The coded disk missed steps 2. The coder missed steps: 1) Remove obstacle or
1) Assembly is jammed; replace with a new assembly. 2) Replace PCB. 3)
Replace motor. 4) Replace sensor or cable. 5)
Replace belt pulley and motor assembly.
3) Motor error;
3. The reaction carousel missed steps when
4) Sensor error; moving to the home position Replace sensor or
5) Belt pulley is loose; cable
3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed
steps when moving to the home position.
Home position sensor error
A07009 Sample/reag Error Sample bar code / Due to the system error, the sample bar Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize
ent carousel reader error code reader cannot work normally. If the the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot
unit error repeats and cannot be removed, then be performed, check if bar code reader is
the bar code reader has not performed the connected properly. If the error remains, then
initialization normally or the replace the bar code reader or the control drive
board.
communication cables are disconnected.
If bar code reader is not available, please
try again.
A07010 Sample/reag Warning Sample bar code / Sample bar code reader does not work Scan the bar code again. If the problem still
ent carousel error normally due to communication error. remains, check the cable of the bar code reader
unit Position: or replace the bar code reader or the control drive
board.

class Event Log
A07011 Sample/reag Error Sample bar code / Sample bar code sending buffer is full due Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.
ent carousel sending buffer is full to communication error.
unit
A09011 Sample/reag Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader connection error Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize
ent carouse reader does not work due to system failure. If the error repeats the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot
unit normally and cannot be removed, then the bar code be performed, check if bar code reader is
reader has not performed the initialization connected properly. If the error remains, then
normally or the communication cables are replace the bar code reader or the control drive
disconnected. board.
If bar code reader is not available, please
try again.
A09012 Sample/reag Warning Reagent bar code / Communication error. Reagent bar code Scan the bar code again. If the problem still
ent carousel error instruction buffer is full. remains, check the cable of the bar code reader
unit Position: or replace the bar code reader or the control drive
board.
A09014 Sample/reag Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader does not work Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.
ent carousel sending buffer is full normally due to communication error.
unit Position:
A11005 Wash station Error Wash station / 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is
movement error loose, tighten them if so.
Belt pulley is loose;
Error:
2. Home position is not found. 2. Failed to find the home position: 1) Replace
1) Driving circuit error; PCB. 2) Replace motor. 3) Replace sensor. 4)
Tighten properly.
2) Motor error;
3. The wash station collides with an obstacle
3) Home position sensor error; when moving: 1) Align wash probes. 2) Align
4) Belt pulley is loose; reaction carousel positioning. 3) Replace sensor,
3. The wash station collides with an cable or PCB.
obstacle when moving.
1) Wash probes are not vertical;
2) Reaction carousel positioning is
deviated;
3) Collision sensor or circuit error

class Event Log
A11013 Wash station Error Water tank is empty / 1. Water tank is empty. 1. Check if the water level of the water tank is at a
2. The low-level floater of the water tank low level and add it;
goes wrong. 2. Check if the low float of the water tank is
normal. Refer to 7.9.2 for the float check. If the
float is faulty, replace it.
3. Check if the wiring of the float sensor to the
main board is broken or the contact is poor.
4. Replace the main board.
A11015 Wash station Error Insufficient diluted / 1. Diluted wash solution tank is empty. 1.Add diluted wash solution.
wash solution 2.Check if the low-level float signal of the diluted
2. The low-level floater of the diluted wash
wash solution tank is correct. Refer to 7.9.2 for the
solution tank goes wrong.
float check. If the float is faulty, replace it.
A11020 Wash station Error High concentration / The high concentration waste tank is full 1.Check the high-concentration waste tank. If the
waste tank is full The floater of the high concentration waste tank is full, replace it. Cover the full tank and
dispose of the waste properly.
tank goes wrong.
2.Check if high-concentration waste goes
wrong.Refer to 7.9.2 for the float check. If the float
is faulty, replace it.
A11034 Wash station Error Cuvette wash / 1. Sensor status error. 1. Replace sensor cable.
syringe movement
2. The syringe assembly is probably forced 2. Remove obstacle or replace with a new
error.
to move. assembly.
3. Failed to find the zero position. 3. Change the drive board.
1) Assembly is jammed; 4. Change the motor.
3) Motor error;
4) Sensor error;

class Event Log
A11038 Wash station Error Instruction execution / Instrument instructions cannot be 1. Switch off analyzing unit power and switch on
error executed. again; Home the system.
distributor.
A12005 Temperature Warning Reaction carousel T1 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Reproduce failure.
unit temperature is out of 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the
range
(component error, cable error) Status screen, to check if temperature is out of
3. The temperature protection switch goes range.
wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of
4. The heater goes wrong. (component short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections
error, cable error) are secure.
5. The fan goes wrong. (component error, 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if
cable error) protection switch is shut and connections are
6. PCB error secure.
7. Parameters are lost. 5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal
temperature is correct, and connections are
secure.
6. Fan error: check if fan is working normally, and
connections are secure.
7. PCB failure.
8. Parameters are lost. Check if the temperature
control parameters are correct.
A12006 Temperature Warning Temperature of wash / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Reproduce failure.
unit solution for cleaning
2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. 2. Observe ambient temperature to check if
cuvettes is out of
(component error, cable error) temperature is out of range.
range
Temperature: 3. The temperature protection switch goes 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of
wrong. (component error, cable error) short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections
4. The heater goes wrong. (component are secure.
error, cable error) 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if
5. PCB error protection switch is shut and connections are
6. Parameters are lost. secure.

class Event Log
7. Electromagnetic interference exists. 5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal
secure.
6. PCB error
7. Parameters are lost: check if temperature control
parameters are correct.
A12007 Temperature Warning Temperature of / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Reproduce failure.
unit deionized water for
2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. 2. Observe ambient temperature to check if
cleaning cuvettes is
out of range
3. The temperature protection switch goes 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of
secure.
6. PCB failure.
A12010 Temperature Warning Reagent preheating / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Reproduce failure.
unit temperature is out of
2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. 2. Measure ambient temperature to check if
range.
3. The temperature protection switch goes 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of

class Event Log
secure.
6. PCB failure.
A14007 Temperature Warning Reagent refrigeration / 1. Reagent refrigeration temperature is out Refer to 10.2.15 .
unit temperature is out of of range (-10~45℃).
range. TDISP
Temperature: 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong.
(component error, cable error)
3. The radiator goes wrong. (component
error, cable error)
4. PCB error
A14008 Temperature Warning Reagent refrigeration / 1. Reagent refrigeration temperature is out Refer to 10.2.15 .
unit temperature is out of of range (2~12℃).
range. TDISP
Temperature: ? 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong.
(component error, cable error)
3. The radiator goes wrong. (component
error, cable error)
4. PCB error
A21001 Probe Error Probe interior wash / 1. Sensor status error. 1. Replace sensor cable.
Interior Wash syringe movement 2. Remove obstacle or replace with a new
2. The syringe assembly is probably forced
Unit error. assembly.
to move.
Error: 3. Change the drive board.
3. Failed to find the zero position.
4. Change the motor.
1) Assembly is jammed;

class Event Log
3) Motor error;
4) Sensor error;
A22001 ISE unit Error Slope out of range, SLEX 1. Electrode is not installed correctly. 1. Remove and reinstall the electrode.
electrode:
2. Calibrator expired. 2. Replace the calibrator.
3. Electrode degenerated 3. Replace the failed electrode and run tests again.
4. Bubbles in reference electrode 4. Remove the electrode and clap on it to eliminate
5. Reference electrode has been used for bubbles. Reinstall the electrode and run
a long time. calibration.
6. Electrodes interfere with each other. 5. Replace the reference electrode and run tests
7. Module or fluidic temperature exceeds again.
32℃. 6. Replace electrode by different combinations to
troubleshoot the failed one.
7. Monitor temperature, if too high, relocate
equipment.
8. Contact our customer service department or
your local distributor.
A22002 ISE unit Error Air in sample. SMPA 1. Sample is insufficient, or contains 1. Increase the sample volume. At least 90μl
Position: bubbles after being dispensed. sample should be prepared.
2. Electrode is not installed correctly. Reinstall it.
2. No or insufficient sample has been
3. Check the waste tube, and if necessary,
dispensed into the sample injection port.
replace it.
3. The electrodes are not properly
installed, causing leakage.
4. The waste pump tube is aging or
broken.
A22004 ISE unit Error ISE unit cannot be / 1. Power supply of ISE module goes 1. Replace the 24V power supply board.
connected. wrong. 2. Replace the ISE communication cable.
3. Replace the interface or pins.
2. Communication cable between ISE
module and middle-layer unit goes wrong.
3. Communication interface or pins failure
4. Main control board of the ISE module
goes wrong.

class Event Log
A22005 ISE unit Error ISE unit response / 1.Communication cable between ISE 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
error module and middle-layer unit goes wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
2. Communication interface or pins failure
4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
3. Main control board of the ISE module
goes wrong.
4. Software error
A22006 ISE unit Error Purge A and B failed. / 1. Leaks exist due to improper installation 1. Reinstall the electrode and check for the O ring.
of electrode or O ring's missing. 2. Use warm water to rinse the sample injection
2. Sample injection port of electrode inside port, and unclog the electrode tube. Check the
is blocked. inside of the reference electrode for salt buildup.
3. Calibrator in the reagent pack is 3. Replace the reagent pack.
exhausted. 4. Increase the prime cycle.
4. Purge cycle is not enough. 5. Replace the pump tube.
5. Peristaltic pump tube is aging, blocked 6. Use warm water to unclog the wand tube.
or broken.
6. Calibrator cannot be output due to the
blocked wand tube.
A22007 ISE unit Warning ISE reagent is going / Calibrator is exhausted. Replace the reagent pack with a new one.
to be exhausted.
A22008 ISE unit Error Voltage overflow, VOUT 1. Electrode or reagent pack is invalid. 1. Replace the problematic electrode and reagent
electrode: pack.
2. Electrode is unsteady.
2. New electrode will become steady after 15
3. New reagent pack is unstable. minutes since installed.
4. Reference electrode has been used for 3. Run a couple of calibrations after installing new
over 6 months. reagent pack.
A22009 ISE unit Error Electrode slope drift. VDRF/ 1. Electrode or reagent pack is invalid. 1. Replace the failed electrode or reagent pack.
(during calibration) SLDR
2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady after 15
Or
3. New reagent pack is unstable. minutes since installed.
Electrode voltage
drift. (during sample 4. Reference electrode has been used for 3. Run a couple of calibrations after installing new
reagent pack.

class Event Log
analysis) over 6 months. 4. Replace the reference electrode.
Electrode: 5. ISE main control board failure. 5. Replace the ISE main control board.
6. The ambient temperature is fluctuating 6. Control the ambient temperature to make the
greatly. fluctuation within +/-4℃.
A22010 ISE unit Error Voltage noise, NOIS 1. Electrode is invalid. 1. Replace the electrode.
electrode: 2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE main control board failure. 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
4. Salt buildup around electrodes or tubes
due to fluidic leaks.
A22011 ISE unit Error Air in calibrator B PUGB 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one.
2. Perform purge B to remove bubbles.
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B
3. &4. Replace the pump tube.
3. Peristaltic pump B tube is aging, clogged 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
and broken. electrodes.
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 6. Replace the air bubble detector.
broken:
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path are
blocked or leaking.
6. Air bubble detector failed
A22012 ISE unit Error Air in calibrator A PUGA 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new one
2. Calibrator A tube contains many air 2. Perform purge A to remove air bubbles.
bubbles. 3. and 4. Replace the peristaltic pump tube.
3. Peristaltic pump A tube is aging, clogged 5. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
and broken. electrodes.
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 6. Replace the bubble detector.
broken:
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path are
blocked or leaking.
A22013 ISE unit Error ISE pump calibrating / 1. Peristaltic pump tube is aging. 1. Replace the pump tube.
failed! 2. Aspiration and dispensing of sample 2. Replace the sample probe.
probe goes wrong.

class Event Log
A22014 ISE unit Error Air bubble detector / 1. Air bubble detector board is eroded due Replace the air bubble detector.
failure to the leaks at the joint of sample injection
port and bubble detector.
A22015 ISE unit Error Reading reagent / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
pack chip error 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Replace the wand.
A22016 ISE unit Error Reagent pack chip / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
writing error. Unload 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Replace the wand.
the reagent pack and
load it again.
A22017 ISE unit Error Air in ISE wash / 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1, Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
solution
2. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 2. Replace the pump tube
broken: 3. Clean the sample injection port and reinstall
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path are electrodes.
blocked or leaking. 4. Replace the bubble detector.
A22018 ISE unit Error No fluid in tubing CALF 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1, Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
2. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 2. Replace the pump tube.
broken:
electrodes.
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path are 4. Replace the air bubble detector.
blocked or leaking.
A22019 ISE unit Error Saving calibration DEP 1. Communication cable is disconnected. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
result error 2. Replace the interface or pins.
2. The interface or pin goes wrong.
3. ISE main control board failure. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
4. Wrong Software Version.
A22021 ISE unit Error Command format or RESP 1. Communication cable is disconnected. 1. Replace the ISE communication cable.
execution error 2. Replace the interface or pins.
2. The interface or pin goes wrong.
3. ISE main control board failure. 4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
4. Wrong Software Version.

class Event Log
A22022 ISE unit Error No fluid in tubing / 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1, Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
2. Replace the pump tube.
2. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or
broken:
electrodes.
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path are 4. Replace the air bubble detector.
blocked or leaking.
A22023 ISE unit Error No reagent module / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
has been loaded. 2. Wand error. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
A22024 ISE unit Error ISE response check RESP 1. Communication cable is disconnected. 1. Replace the communication cable.
code error
2. The interface or pin goes wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
3. ISE main control board failure. 3. Replace the main control board of the ISE
4. Wrong Software Version. module.
4. Upgrade the operating software or reinstall it.
A22027 / Error Fluidic prime failed. / Fluidic prime is not performed. 1.If fluidic prime is not performed,refer to 7.9.4
for fluidic prime.
2. Enter the Parameter Configuration screen,
select Wash Unit, find the Is Fluidic Prime
Performed parameter, check whether the value of
this parameter is 1.Refer to Figure 13-9
Parameter Configuration -Change the Is Fluidic
Prime Performed parameter
A22036 / Error Initializing sample / Due to the system error, the sample bar Refer to 10.2.6 .
bar code reader code reader cannot work normally. If the
failed. error repeats and cannot be removed,
then the bar code reader has not
performed the initialization normally or the
communication cables are disconnected.
A22038 / Error Scanning reagent / Scanning reagent bar code failed. Refer to 10.2.6 .
bar code failed.
A22039 / Error Unmatched software / 1. Executing version query instruction Refer to 10.2.4 .
version. failed.
2. Returned control software version and

class Event Log
that stored in the operating software does
not match.
A22042 Temperature Warning Temperature of / Warning No. 1:Sensor shortcut or 1. Reproduce failure.
control unit cuvette cleaning fluid temperature above 75℃. 2. Measure ambient temperature to check if
is out of range: %s\r\n Warning No. 2:Sensor disconnected or temperature is out of range.
Temperature: %s temperature below 0℃.
3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of
Warning No.3:Heater is heating for a long
short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections
time
are secure.
Warning No.4: Heater control is locked.
4. Temperature protection switch error: check if
protection switch is shut and connections are
secure.
5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal
secure.
6. PCB failure.
A22043 Temperature Warning Temperature of / Warning No. 1:Sensor shortcut or 1. Reproduce failure.
control unit cuvette wash solution temperature above 75℃. 2. Measure ambient temperature to check if
is out of range: %s\r\n Warning No. 2:Sensor disconnected or temperature is out of range.
Temperature: %s temperature below 0℃.
3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of
Warning No.3:Heater is heating for a long
short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections
time
Warning No.4: Heater control is locked. are secure.
4. Temperature protection switch error: check if
protection switch is shut and connections are
secure.
5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal
secure.
6. PCB failure.

class Event Log
C00007 Operating Error CPU performance / The CPU is too busy. Reboot the computer and operating software. If
system low this message appears for 3 times, contact our
R&D department.
C00011 Operating Error The last abnormal / The operating software is abnormal or the After rebooting the software, perform the special
system exit may cause analyzer is powered off accidentally. wash procedure.
carryover not
handled. Execute the
Special Wash
maintenance
command before
starting analysis to
ensure accurate
results.
C00012 Operating Warning Sound card failure / No sound card is installed; Sound card Reinstall sound card or sound card driver
system failure; Incorrect sound card driver
C00013 Operating Error The cuvette status / The operating software is not exited Take out and check the standby cuvettes. If they
system may not be refreshed normally due to some reasons.(BS-230) are used, replace them. When you are uncertain if
due to the last they are used, replace them.
abnormal exit of the
system. To ensure
the correct test
results, please check
the cuvettes and
replace them.
C01001 Instrument Error Equipment cannot be / Database software is not installed; Refer to 10.2.12 for processing.
connection connected database is not established; database
system or database file is damaged or
lost; database is opened exclusively
C02001 Database Error Database initialing / Database upgrade failed Refer to 10.2.1 for processing.
failed

class Event Log
C02002 Database Error Database upgrade / Database record is under use; database Refer to 10.2.1 for processing.
failed is locked
C02004 Database Warning Database backup / Cannot read or write necessary Refer to10.2.2 for processing.
failed information from or into database
C02005 Database Warning Reading/Writing / Database software is not installed; Refer to 10.2.1 for processing.
database failed database is not established; database
system or database file is damaged or
lost; database is opened exclusively
C03001 Result Warning Result cannot be RCE Absorbance data for calculation is Investigate the cause of photoelectric data loss;
calculation calculated incomplete, or the dividend is 0. contact our R&D department
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
Chemistry:
C03002 Result Warning Absorbance out of ABS The absorbance measured at the primary Check the reaction curve. If the absorbance of R1
calculation range and secondary wavelength is greater than is too high, check if reagent has air bubbles or
Sample ID/bar code: 3.3A. syringe leak.
Position:
2. Check if the reagent is placed in the correct
Chemistry:
position.
3. Rerun the test after dilution.
4. Contact our R&D department.
C03003 Result Warning R1 blank absorbance RBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed; check if
calculation out of range clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or reagent is sufficient, without air bubbles; check if
insufficient reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are reasonable; if previous
problems do not exist, replace reagent and rerun
the test.
C03004 Result Warning Substrate depletion BOE The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and the substrate
calculation Sample ID/bar code: substrate depletion occurs during fixed- depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Position: time measurements.
Chemistry:

class Event Log
C03005 Result Warning Result cannot be ENC The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and the substrate
calculation calculated substrate depletion occurs within the lag depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Sample ID/bar code: time of rate check measurements.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03006 Result Warning Linearity limit out of LIN The measuring points for result Check the reaction curve and the substrate
calculation range calculation are nonlinear, because the depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Sample ID/bar code: sample concentration is too high, or the
Position: substrate depletion limit is not specified or
Chemistry: unreasonable.
C03007 Result Warning Prozone check error PRO Antigen excess occurs due to too high Check the reaction curve and the prozone check
calculation Sample ID/bar code: sample concentration. parameters. Rerun the test with diluted sample.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03008 Result Warning Sample RRN The sample concentration exceeds the Dilute and Rerun
calculation concentration is high limit of the calibrator concentration.
higher than that of the
highest-level
calibrator
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
Chemistry:
C03009 Result Warning Mixed blank MBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if the cuvette is clear and not overflowed,
calculation absorbance out of not clear; the reaction cuvette is the reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and
range overflowed; or insufficient reagent is the chemistry parameters are reasonable. If yes,
Chemistry: dispensed. replace the reagent and then rerun the test.
C03010 Result Warning Blank response out of BLK The reagent goes wrong; insufficient Check if the cuvette is not overflowed, the reagent
calculation range reagent is dispensed; the cuvette contains is sufficient without air bubbles, the light does not
Chemistry: air bubbles; the light drifts; or the cuvette is drift and the chemistry parameters are reasonable.
overflowed. If yes, replace the reagent and then rerun the test.
C03011 Result Warning Calibration DUP The difference between the maximum and Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable,
calculation repeatability exceeds minimum response of the calibrator troubleshoot the error, and then recalibrate.
limit. Chem: exceeds the specified limit.

class Event Log
C03012 Result Warning Calibration sensitivity SEN The difference of final response of the Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation exceeds limit. Chem: maximum and minimum concentration the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
calibrators exceeds the specified limit. recalibrate.
C03013 Result Warning Calibration curve SD CSD The calculated standard deviation of the Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation exceeds limit, Chem: calibration curve exceeds the specified the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
limit. recalibrate.
C03014 Result Warning Calibration DET The calculated fit of the calibration curve Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation determination exceeds the specified limit. the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
coefficient exceeds recalibrate.
limit, Chem:
C03015 Result Warning Calibration slope FAC The slope difference is applicable to linear Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and
calculation difference out of calibration only and refers to the K factor the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then
range. Chem: (slope) difference between two adjacent recalibrate.
calibrations. It exceeds the specified
limit.
C03016 Result Warning Calibration curve is MON The calibration data and calibration curve Check if the calibrator is defined and placed
calculation not monotonic, are not monotonic. correctly, and then recalibrate.
Chem:
C03017 Result Warning Calibration curve is COV For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base Check that the reagent and calibrator are normal,
calculation not convergent, cannot be calculated and no calibration and then recalibrate. If troubleshooting fails,
Chem: curve is drawn. choose other calibration rules and recalibrate.
C03018 Result Warning Chemistry: 1-2s The QC result is between ±2 and ±3 No actions are required.
calculation Control: 1-2s warning standard deviations from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03019 Result Warning Chemistry: 1-3s The current QC result is greater than ±3 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 1-3s out of standard deviations from the assigned normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control mean concentration.
C03020 Result Warning Chemistry: 2-2s Results of two controls or two results of Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 2-2s out of one control within a run are normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control simultaneously greater than +2 or -2
standard deviations from the assigned

class Event Log
mean.
C03021 Result Warning Chemistry: R-4s One result of a run is greater than +2 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: R-4s out of standard deviations from the assigned normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control mean and the other greater than -2SDs.
C03022 Result Warning Chemistry: 4-1s Results of two runs (4 results), or 4 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 4-1s out of continuous results of a control are on the normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control same side and greater than ±1 standard
deviation from the assigned mean
concentration.
C03023 Result Warning Chemistry: 10-x Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 Check if the reagent is qualified, control sample is
calculation Control: 10-x out of continuous results of a control are on the normal, and the instrument is working correctly.
control same side.
C03024 Result Error Biochemistry test / Software error Rerun the test, or reboot the operating software
calculation period time out. Operating system error and analyzing unit. If the error remains, contact
Cannot continue our customer service department or your local
distributor.
C03026 Result Warning Photoelectric data is / Communication error. If the error persists, contact our R&D department.
calculation lost
C03027 Result Warning Chemistry: 2.7s Multiple QC data and threshold values or Check if the reagent is qualified and control is
calculation Control: 1.0-2.7 out cumulative sum exceed ±2.7SD. normal.Refer to 10.2.16 for processing.
of control
of control
of control

class Event Log
C03030 Result Error Photoelectric TD Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurement period 2. Reboot the operation unit.
is out of range 3. Check if the ground voltage is normal
Sample ID/bar code: 4. Check for interference, poor contact between
Position: the splitter assembly and the main control board,
Chemistry: or damage to the cable.
5. Check the serial port connection, computer
serial port
6. Replace the main board
C03031 Result Error Multiple consecutive / Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation photoelectric 2. Reboot the operation unit.
measurements are 3. Check if the ground voltage is normal
time out 4. Check for interference, poor contact between
Sample ID/bar code: the splitter assembly and the main control board,
Position: or damage to the cable.
Chemistry: 5. Check the serial port connection, computer
serial port
6. Replace the main board
C04001 Sample bar Warning Duplicate sample bar / Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample bar code label.
code code.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position 1:
Position 2:
C04002 Sample bar Warning Bar code has no / The sample of the bar code has not been Program the sample of the bar code.
code corresponding programmed.
programming.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
C04006 Sample bar Warning Sample is expired / The sample is loaded after its shelf life is The sample is expired. Replace the sample and
code Sample ID/bar code: exceeded. program it again. Reject the expired sample. If
Position: the sample shelf life is too short, change it to a
reasonable one.
C04008 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code too / The bar code length is greater than the Redefine the bar code with no more than 27
code long. Position: maximum value of 27 digits. digits.

class Event Log
C04009 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code is / The bar code length is less than the Redefine the bar code with no less than 3 digits.
code less than 3 digits. minimum value of 3 digits.
position:
C04012 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code / Bar code data does not accord with the Reset the bar code format, or reprint and scan the
code analysis error defined format. bar code.
Sample bar code:
Position:
C05001 Reagent bar Warning Duplicate reagent bar / Incorrect reagent or reagent bar code is Reprint the reagent bar code, or replace the
code code being used, or an invalid reagent bar code reagent bottle with an invalid bar code.
Reagent: is being used in a closed-reagent system.
Position 1: Closed-reagent bar code is aligned with
Position 2: closed reagents, and cannot be used
again for new reagent when a reagent is
exhausted.
C05002 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, Print the new reagent bar code with correct
code data error. or reagent bar code is not configured settings and check the bar code against the
Position: reasonably. The reagent bar code settings. In the case of a closed-reagent system,
contains incomplete or incorrect reagent replace the reagent bottle, or contact the reagent
information, such as expiration date, supplier.
reagent volume, etc.
C05003 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, Check the reagent bar code settings, or reprint the
code analysis error or reagent bar code settings are incorrect. reagent bar code against the settings. In the
Position: Non-closed reagent bar code is being case of a closed-reagent system, contact the
used in a closed-reagent system. The reagent supplier.
system fails to extract reagent information
from the bar code.
C05006 Reagent bar Error Wash solution / Reagent rather than wash solution is Reposition the reagent, or remove it from the
code position on reagent placed in the fixed wash solution position sample diluent position.
carousel is occupied on reagent carousel.
by another reagent
Position:
C05008 Reagent bar Error Physiological saline / Reagent rather than physiological saline Reposition the reagent, or remove it from the
code position on reagent is placed in the fixed physiological saline sample diluent position.
carousel is occupied position on reagent carousel.
by another reagent

class Event Log
Position:
C05010 Reagent bar Error The pretreatment / The pretreatment reagent position is Place the pretreatment reagent in correct position.
code reagent position is occupied by other reagent.
occupied by other
reagent. Position:
C05011 Reagent bar Error The ISE wash / The ISE wash solution position is Place the pretreatment reagent in correct position.
code solution position is occupied by another reagent.
occupied by another
reagent.
C06001 Host Error LIS initialization error / Host file is damaged or does not exist. Reboot operating software; initialize LIS module
communicati
on
C06002 Host Error LIS communication / Host parameters error Check system configuration parameters; re-
communicati parameter error connect LIS
on
C06003 Host Error LIS communication / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive
communicati error the instruction again. If the error occurs for several
on times, contact LIS vendor. If problem remain,
contact our R&D department.
C06004 Host Error LIS host cannot be / Abnormal network connection, or the LIS Check if LIS host and LIS station is started
communicati connected host is not started. normally.
on
C06005 Host Warning Sending sample / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive
communicati results failed. the instruction again. If the error occurs for several
on Sample ID/bar code: times, contact LIS vendor. If problem remain,
Position: contact our R&D department.
C06006 Host Warning Sending sample / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive
communicati information failed. the instruction again. If the error occurs for several

class Event Log
on Sample ID/bar code: times, contact LIS vendor. If problem remain,
C06007 Host Warning Inquiring sample / LIS host failure. If the error occurs accidentally, neglect it. Neglect
communicati information failed. the error. If the error occurs for several times,
on Sample ID/bar code: contact LIS vendor. If the problem remains,
C06008 Host Warning Downloading sample / Incorrect channel settings; or insufficient Check and re-set the chemistry correspondence
communicati failed. or redundant chemistries on the LIS host. between the operating software and the LIS host.
on Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
C07003 Light source Error Light intensity is too / 1. The lamp is not installed correctly. Refer to 10.2.8 for processing.
weak
2. The cuvette is contaminated.
3. The lamp is aging.
4. The wash station dispenses liquid
incorrectly.
C07004 Light source Warning Cuvette blank out of / 1. The cuvette is contaminated. Refer to 10.2.7 for processing.
range 2. The lamp is aging.
Cuvette No.:
3. The lamp is not installed correctly.
4. The wash station dispenses liquid
incorrectly.
5. The photoelectric collection board goes
wrong.
C07005 Light source Error Lamp is not turned / 1. The lamp is damaged. Refer to 10.2.10 for processing.
on 2. The lamp cable is not connected
properly.
3. The power board of the lamp is not
connected properly.
4. The power supply of the analyzing unit
is disconnected.
5. The photoelectric collection board goes
wrong.

class Event Log
C07006 Light source Error Light intensity is too / 1. A cuvette position has no cuvette Refer to 10.2.11 for processing.
strong installed.
2. The circuit gain is too high and beyond
the measurement range.
C07007 Light source Error Dark current is too / 1. The circuit gain is too high and beyond 1. Perform dark current fluctuation test to identify
high the measurement range. failure.
Channel: 2. Check if the abnormal channel has something
2. The power board of the lamp is not
AD: to do with the channel gain. If it does, adjust the
connected properly.
channel gain.
3. The photoelectric collection board goes 3. Check if the cables on the AD collection board
wrong. are installed correctly.
4. Unplug the cables from the AD collection board
and pre-amplification board and perform the dark
current fluctuation test again. Check if the failure
is related to the pre-amplification board. If yes,
replace the optical measurement assembly.
5. Replace the AD collection board.
6. If problem remains, contact our R&D
department.
C07009 Light source Error Water blank out of L! 1.Overflow Refer to 10.2.9 for processing.
range (10X)
2. The lamp has been replaced incorrectly.
3. Cuvette Check is not performed after
cuvette maintenance.
4. Wash solution inside the cuvette is little.
5. The cable connector or retaining screw
of the lamp are not tightened.
6. The lamp is aging.
7. The photometer goes wrong.

class Event Log
C07012 Other error of Warning Storage device error. / No floppy disk or U disk is inserted. No file Check if U disk or floppy disk is inserted or full;
operation Cannot import data is found in the floppy disk or U disk, or file Check if storage device is damaged
unit error, or file is damaged. The floppy disk
or U disk is locked or damaged.
C07013 Other error of Warning Storage device error. / No floppy disk or U disk is inserted. Check if U disk or floppy disk is inserted or full;
operation Cannot export data Insufficient disk space. The floppy disk or Check if storage device is damaged
unit U disk is locked or damaged.
C07014 Other error of Warning Reagent exhausted / All reagents in this kind of bottles do not Refill or replace the reagent.
operation Chemistry: reach minimum limit; All reagents of this
unit Position: kind cannot be detected
C07016 Other error of Warning Insufficient wash / Insufficient wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the sample/reagent
operation solution sample/reagent carousel. carousel.
unit Position:
C07017 Other error of Warning Wash solution is / Wash solution is exhausted on the Refill the wash solution on the sample/reagent
operation exhausted sample/reagent carousel. carousel.
unit Position:

class Event Log
C07022 Other error of Warning Less than X tests are / All reagents in this kind of bottles do not Refill or replace the reagent.
operation left in biochemistry reach minimum limit; All reagents of this
unit reagent. Chemistry: kind cannot be detected
C07023 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, 30 / The calibration factors are about to be Recalibrate the chemistry.
operation minutes left for next expired.
unit calibration.
C07027 Other error of Warning Calibrator %s has / The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
operation been expired
unit
C07028 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / Expired Replace the reagent.
operation No.: %s,
unit position: %s, has
been expired
C07029 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / The uncapping time of the reagent pack is Replace the reagent.
operation No.: %s, too long.
unit position: %s, has
exceeded the on-
board stability time
C07034 Other error of Warning Insufficient / Insufficient physiological saline on Refill the physiological saline on the
operation physiological saline sample/reagent carousel sample/reagent carousel.
unit Position:
C07035 Other error of Warning Physiological saline / Physiological saline is exhausted on Refill the physiological saline on the
operation is exhausted sample/reagent carousel. sample/reagent carousel.
unit Position:
C07036 Other Warning Chemistry: %s. / The calibration factors have been expired. Recalibrate the chemistry.
Calibration factors
are expired
C07037 Other Warning Reagent bottle / Serial number of the reagent is changed. Reagent serial number of the chemistry is
number of %s changed. Please recalibrate
chemistry is
changed. Please
recalibrate

class Event Log
C07038 Other Warning Reagent lot number / Lot number of the reagent is changed. Reagent lot number of the chemistry is changed.
of %s chemistry is Please recalibrate
changed. Please
recalibrate
C07039 Other Warning Calibration factors / The calibration factors are expired. The calibration factors are expired.
of %s chemistry are
expired. Recalibrate
C07040 Other Warning Reagent exhausted / Reagent exhausted Refill or replace the reagent.
Chemistry: Reagent probe does not detect liquid level
C07041 Other Error ISE reagent is less / Inventory of the ISE reagent is lower than Check the inventory, and refill ISE reagent if
than %s the alarm limit. necessary.
C07042 Other Warning %s, lot number: %s, / One or more special reagents have Replace the reagent.
position: %s, has expired.
been expired
C07043 Other Warning Pretreatment reagent / Pretreatment reagent is used up. The test for whole blood needs pretreatment
is exhausted. reagent. Fill the pretreatment reagent.
Position:
C07044 Other Warning Pretreatment reagent / Pretreatment reagent is insufficient. The test for whole blood needs pretreatment
is insufficient. reagent. Fill the pretreatment reagent.
Position:
C07045 Other Warning ISE wash solution is / ISE Wash solution is exhausted. Add the ISE wash solution.
exhausted.
C07046 Other Warning ISE wash solution is / ISE wash solution is insufficient. Add the ISE wash solution.
insufficient.

11 Parts List
Table 11-1 Parts list
Order Number 801 Number Part Number Part Description Part Name in PI&PO Applicable Range Location & Reference
801-BA40-00016-00 801-BA40-00016-00 051-000218-00 Sample Probe Clogging Detection Board Sample Probe Clogging Detection Board / /
051-002479-00 / 051-002479-00 Integration Liquid Detecting Board Integration Liquid Detecting Board PCBA / /
051-002872-00 / 051-002872-00 BA36 AC Driver Board BA36 AC Driver Board PCBA / /
051-002896-00 / 051-002896-00 Power driver board Power driver board PCBA / /
051-002900-00 / 051-002900-00 BA36DC/DC board BA36DC/DC board PCBA / /
115-056343-00 / 115-056343-00 Amplification assembly amplification assembly / /
115-048858-00 / 115-048858-00 Main board(open system) Main board(opend system) BS-360E /
115-048859-00 / 115-048859-00 Main board(Close System 3 User-defined) Main board(Close System 3 User-defined) BS-360E /
041-001143-00 / 041-001143-00 Lamp base retaining screw Lamp base retaining screw / /
115-038466-00 / 115-038466-00 20W Lamp Module (FRU) 20W Lamp Module (FRU) / /
115-041267-00 / 115-041267-00 Optical measure assembly optical measure assembly / /
115-041273-00 / 115-041273-00 Lamp Len Cone Assembly Len Assembly / /
801-BA40-00167-00 801-BA40-00167-00 BA40-20-61352 Fiber Bunch Fiber Bunch / /
082-002426-00 / 082-002426-00 Diaphragm pump of NMP830 diaphragm pump of NMP830 / Auto washing, step 1-8 waste pumps, P02-P
801-BA10-00025-00 801-BA10-00025-00 BA30-21-15311 Probe Interior-washing Pump Probe Interior-washing Pump / P01
024-000908-00 / 024-000908-00 Motor Step 1.8°1.2A250mNm42mm Motor Step 1.8°1.2A250mNm42mm / Auto washing assembly vertical motion moto
024-000909-00 / 024-000909-00 Motor Step 1.8°2A 0.54Nm 42*50mm Motor Step 1.8°2A500mNm42mm / Washing syringe motor
115-045515-00 / 115-045515-00 Sample reagent Disk Motor Assembly Sample reagent Disk Motor Assembly / /
115-045534-00 / 115-045534-00 reaction disk motor assembly reaction disk motor assembly / /
115-045521-00 / 115-045521-00 vertical motor assembly vertical motor assembly / Probe/mixer vertical motion motor
115-045522-00 / 115-045522-00 horizontal motor assembly horizontal motor assembly / Probe/mixer horizontal motion motor
115-045899-00 / 115-045899-00 motor module of syringe motor module of syringe / /
801-BA10-00023-00 801-BA10-00023-00 BA30-10-15052 DC Motor(6V) DC Motor(6V) / Mixer DC motor
009-000448-00 / 009-000448-00 Inner wash return valve The wire of inner wash return valve / SV02, SV04
082-002720-00 / 082-002720-00 2-way Solenoid Valve WIRE FOR Solenoid Valve / SV03, SV05, SV07
BA38-21-88190 / BA38-21-88190 3-way solenoid valve WTB-3R-N4E 3-way solenoid valve wire / SV01, SV06
801-BA10-00139-00 801-BA10-00139-00 2100-20-08144 Fan D08T-12PH Fan D08T-12PH / Cooler fan for analyzer
801-BA80-00136-00 801-BA80-00136-00 BA10-20-78211 Fan of lamp (FRU) FAN(FRU) / /
801-BA30-00075-00 801-BA30-00075-00 BA30-21-06530 Fan of Reaction Disk Fan 0.5W / Fan for reaction disk
024-000899-00 / 024-000899-00 FAN 12Vdc 92*92*38mm 110CFM 33.6dB 300mm FAN 12Vdc 92*92*38mm 110CFM 33.6dB 300mm / Fan for reagent cooling
009-004605-00 / 009-004605-00 Long Peltier Wire Long Peltier Wire / /
009-006306-00 / 009-006306-00 Temprature Sensor Wire of Reaction Disk Temprature Sensor Wire of Reaction Disk / /
801-BA20-00146-00 801-BA20-00146-00 024-000086-00 AC Heater 110V 125W AC Heater 110V 125W / /
801-BA20-00147-00 801-BA20-00147-00 024-000085-00 AC Heater 220V 125W AC Heater 220V 125W / /
801-BA30-00088-00 801-BA30-00088-00 024-000110-00 Reagent Temperature Sensor Reagent Temp Sensor / /

115-037552-00 / 115-037552-00 reagent preheat assembly reagent preheat asm / /
115-045715-00 / 115-045715-00 Auto washing heater assembly (110V) Auto washing heater assembly-BA36(110V) / /
115-045714-00 / 115-045714-00 Auto washing heater assembly (220V) Auto washing heater assembly-BA36(220V) / /
801-BA10-00104-00 801-BA10-00104-00 BA10-21-78147 Thermal Protector (70°C) Thermal Protector (70°C) / Heater temperature protection
009-007710-00 / 009-007710-00 fan wire of RGD and machine fan wire of RGD and machine / /
009-007711-00 / 009-007711-00 fan wire of RCD fan wire of RCD / /
009-007712-00 / 009-007712-00 fan wire of LAMP fan wire of LAMP / /
009-008481-00 / 009-008481-00 wire of reagent needle and refrigeration wire of reagent needle and refrigeration / /
0040-10-32301 / 0040-10-32301 Tube PTFE 0.040"IDX0.066"OD Tube PTFE 0.040"IDX0.066"OD / /
082-000384-00 / 082-000384-00 tube.Φ9.525XΦ15.875 PVC 55~60° tube.Φ9.525XΦ15.875 本色 PVC 55~60° / /
082-002374-00 / 082-002374-00 tube.3.2*6.4mm TPU tube.3.2*6.4mm TPU / /
082-002375-00 / 082-002375-00 tube.1.6*3.2mm TPU tube.1.6*3.2mm TPU / /
082-002482-00 / 082-002482-00 3/32"X7/32", sebific duct 3/32"X7/32"，sebific duct / /
3001-10-07069 / 3001-10-07069 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",ND-100-65,Tygon Tubing.1/16"X1/8",ND-100-65,Tygon / /
M6G-020026--- / M6G-020026--- Transparent PU Tube 4*6 (20m) Transparent PU Tube 4*6 (20m) / /
M6G-020049--- / M6G-020049--- Tube PTFE ID1.5mmXOD2.5mm Tube PTFE ID1.5mmXOD2.5mm / /
M90-000026--- / M90-000026--- Tube.PTFE,1/32"X1/16",3000074,100ft/coil Tube.PTFE,1/32"X1/16",3000074,100ft/coil / /
042-020878-00 / 042-020878-00 mid-dam plate assembly mid-dam plate assembly / /
042-020881-00 / 042-020881-00 top cover plate top cover plate / /
042-020882-00 / 042-020882-00 back plate back plate / /
042-020883-00 / 042-020883-00 left plate assembly(ISE) left plate assembly(ISE) / /
042-020893-00 / 042-020893-00 ISE cover plate ISE cover plate / /
042-020896-00 / 042-020896-00 light cover plate light cover plate / /
042-020917-00 / 042-020917-00 Front Cover(BS-360E) Front Cover(BS-360E) / /
042-020935-00 / 042-020935-00 Front Cover（BS-360S） Front Cover（BS-360S） / /
043-008156-00 / 043-008156-00 sample reagent table-board sample reagent table-board / /
043-008159-00 / 043-008159-00 automatic wash table-board automatic wash table-board / /
043-008228-00 / 043-008228-00 the rocker cover of reagent needle unit the rocker cover of reagent needle unit / /
043-008229-00 / 043-008229-00 Cover for Mixing Bar Cover for Mixing Bar / /
044-000332-00 / 044-000332-00 Base of the Mix Probe Arm(100mm) Base of the Mix Probe Arm(100mm) / /
048-006900-00 / 048-006900-00 dust-proof net dust-proof net / /
115-045446-00 / 115-045446-00 sample reagent plate cover assembly sample reagent plate cover assembly / /
115-045447-00 / 115-045447-00 reation plate table-board assembly reation plate table-board assembly / /
115-045448-00 / 115-045448-00 Protective Cover assembyl Protective Cover assembyl / /
115-045449-00 / 115-045449-00 left plate assembly(ISE) left plate assembly(ISE) / /
115-045450-00 / 115-045450-00 right plate assembly right plate assembly / /
115-045665-00 / 115-045665-00 Protective Cover assembly(gray) Protective Cover assembly(gray) / /
BA10-30-78156 / BA10-30-78156 Window Assembly for the Syringe Window Assembly for the Syringe / /
BA40-20-72907 / BA40-20-72907 Screw cap Screw cap / /
023-001265-00 / 023-001265-00 fixed bar code scanner fixed bar code scanner / /
115-047663-00 / 115-047663-00 Barcode module kit Barcode module kit / /
115-047662-00 / 115-047662-00 ISE Upgrade Package for BS-360E ISE Upgrade Package for BS-360E / /
082-000684-00 / 082-000684-00 Bump.006390-001 Bump.006390-001 / /

115-004625-00 / 115-004625-00 Reference electrode Reference electrode / /
115-004626-00 / 115-004626-00 K electrode K electrode / /
115-004627-00 / 115-004627-00 Na electrode Na electrode / /
115-004628-00 / 115-004628-00 Empty electrode Empty electrode / /
115-004630-00 / 115-004630-00 Cl electrode Cl electrode / /
115-023372-00 / 115-023372-00 ISE tube dredge tool ISE tube dredge tool / /
801-BA34-00103-00 801-BA34-00103-00 BA34-10-63661 ISE Sample Cup ISE Sample Cup / /
801-BA34-00104-00 801-BA34-00104-00 BA34-10-63662 ISE Bubble Detector ISE Bubble Detector / /
801-BA34-00105-00 801-BA34-00105-00 BA34-10-63664 ISE Pump Tube Kit ISE Pump Tube Kit / /
BA34-10-63657 / BA34-10-63657 4 channel PCB Main Board I/O kit 4 channel PCB Main Board I/O kit / /
BA34-10-63658 / BA34-10-63658 Compression Plate Compression Plate / /
BA34-10-63659 / BA34-10-63659 4 Channel PCB Preamp Board Kit 4 Channel PCB Preamp Board Kit / /
BA34-10-63663 / BA34-10-63663 O-Ring Kit,Sample Cup,Bubble Detector O-Ring Kit,Sample Cup,Bubble Detector / /
BA34-10-63666 / BA34-10-63666 4 Channel Right Angle Adapter Kit 4 Channel Right Angle Adapter Kit / /
BA34-10-63667 / BA34-10-63667 Tubing Adapter Tubing Adapter / /
BA34-10-63668 / BA34-10-63668 O-Ring Kit for Electrodes O-Ring Kit for Electrodes / /
BA34-10-63812 / BA34-10-63812 Ise Reagent Connector Ise Reagent Connector / /
801-BA34-00106-00 801-BA34-00106-00 BA34-10-63665 ISE Fluid Tubing Kit ISE Fluid Tubing Kit / /
115-046239-00 / 115-046239-00 clogging detecting assembly clogging detecting assembly / For upgrading clogging detecting
0000-10-10916 / 0000-10-10916 acupuncture needle acupuncture needle / /
0040-10-32304 / 0040-10-32304 connector p208 connector p208 / /
0040-10-32305 / 0040-10-32305 connector p200N connector p200N / /
0040-10-32307 / 0040-10-32307 Telfon washer.SEAL OD.150 ID.070 L.035 Telfon washer.SEAL OD.150 ID.070 L.035 / /
009-002204-00 / 009-002204-00 wire of Optical Switch(s) wire of Optical Switch(s) / /
010-000003-00 / 010-000003-00 FUSE Time-lag 250V 10A CER 5*20mm FUSE Time-lag 250V 10A CER 5*20mm / /
010-000151-00 / 010-000151-00 rocker switch rocker switch / /
023-001275-00 / 023-001275-00 17" LCD Monitor 17" LCD Monitor / /
801-BA80-00218-00 801-BA80-00218-00 033-000754-00 Air Spring(FRU) Air Spring(FRU) / /
033-000108-00 / 033-000108-00 spring avoiding strike spring avoiding strike / /
043-000422-00 / 043-000422-00 filter filter / /
801-BA80-00009-00 801-BA80-00009-00 043-000556-00 wash well shell(FRU) wash well shell(FRU) / /
043-002159-00 / 043-002159-00 10L water tank 10L water tank / /
043-007103-00 / 043-007103-00 Waste connector Waste connector / /
043-007104-00 / 043-007104-00 Waste connector nut Waste connector nut / /
049-000971-00 / 049-000971-00 square seal ring for dual peltier square seal ring / for dual peltier
049-001224-00 / 049-001224-00 square seal ring for single peltier sqare seal ring / for single peltier
051-001147-00 / 051-001147-00 BA48 Wash Photo Connector PCBA BA48 Wash Photo Connector PCBA / /
801-BA23-00025-00 801-BA23-00025-00 082-000430-00 Reagent Syringe.500ul(ZDV)(FRU) Reagent Syringe.500ul(ZDV)(FRU) / /
082-001460-00 / 082-001460-00 O-Ring.7.5X1.5 EPDM A70 Black O-Ring.7.5X1.5 EPDM A70 Black / /
115-016462-00 / 115-016462-00 Probe pole&spring Probe pole&spring / /
115-045526-00 / 115-045526-00 drive of mixer drive of mixer / /
115-037085-00 / 115-037085-00 HbA1c sample proble assembly Sugar sample proble assembly / /
115-037347-00 / 115-037347-00 washing barrel cap module wash bung module / /

115-037348-00 / 115-037348-00 waste cap module liquid waste bung module / /
115-040339-00 / 115-040339-00 assembly of 10ml syringe assembly of 10ml injector cavity(mould) / /
115-041761-00 / 115-041761-00 Reagent Disk Antifogging Assembly Reagent Disk Antifogging Assembly / /
115-045444-00 / 115-045444-00 2.5ml syringe assembly 2.5ml injector assembly / /
115-045451-00 / 115-045451-00 Protective Cover Hinge Assembly Protective Cover Hinge Assembly / /
115-045455-00 / 115-045455-00 Sample syringe assembly Sample syringe assembly / /
115-045456-00 / 115-045456-00 Power assembly Power assembly / /
115-045517-00 / 115-045517-00 Sample reagent disk assembly Sample reagent disk assembly / /
115-045520-00 / 115-045520-00 drive of needle assembly drive of needle assembly / /
115-045542-01 / 115-045542-01 washing probe driving assembly washing probe driving assembly / /
115-045543-00 / 115-045543-00 washing probe assembly washing probe assembly / /
115-045917-00 / 115-045917-00 10ml syringe washing assembly 10ml syringe washing assembly / /
801-BA10-00105-00 801-BA10-00105-00 BA10-20-77752 Washing Well Washing Well / /
BA20-20-75214 / BA20-20-75214 Cuvette Clip support \ / /
BA30-10-06619 / BA30-10-06619 Timing belt, B123MXL6.4 Timing belt, B123MXL6.4 / /
801-BA30-00105-00 801-BA30-00105-00 BA30-10-15041 Timing belt. 220XL037 width of 9.5 Synchronous belt. 220XL037 width of 9.5 / /
801-BX50-00012-00 801-BX50-00012-00 BA31-20-41651 Mixer Paddle with Nut Mixer Paddle with Nut / /
BA40-20-72908 / BA40-20-72908 ISE Stopple ISE Stopple / /
041-001845-00 / 041-001845-00 wipe block \ / used on auto washing assembly
M07-00061S--- / M07-00061S--- Main Power Switch Main Power Switch / /
M6C-020007--- / M6C-020007--- Timing belt.180XL037 Belt / /
M6Q-030042--- / M6Q-030042--- Straight connector,Classic1/8"&1/16"ID,PP Straight,Classic1/8"&1/16"ID,PP / /
M6Q-030043--- / M6Q-030043--- Y shapped connector,200Barb,1/8"ID,PP Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,PP / /
M6Q-030063--- / M6Q-030063--- straighthrough connector,Classic,1/8"ID,P straighthrough,Classic,1/8"ID,P / /
M6Q-030095--- / M6Q-030095--- Y shapped connector,600Barbs,3/8"ID,PP Y,600Barbs,3/8"ID,PP / /
M6Q-030105--- / M6Q-030105--- Y shapped connector, 200Barb,1/16"ID,Natural PP Tube to tube Y210-6 / /
023-001358-00 / 023-001358-00 PC CPU-G3900 memory4GB HDD500GB WIN10 PC CPU-G3900 memory4GB HDD500GB WIN10 / /
041-023325-00 / 041-023325-00 sample pipe adapter sample tube adapter / /
023-001275-00 / 023-001275-00 17" LCD Monitor 17" LCD Monitor / /
046-010891-00 / 046-010891-00 BS-360E Operator's Manual (EN) BS-360E&BS-370E&BS-360S Manual(EN) / /

12 LIS Connection Setting and

Troubleshooting
12.1 Overview of LIS
The LIS system is abbreviated from Laboratory Information System (Laboratory) and an important part of the
hospital information management. The LIS system has the main features including but not limited to specimen
check and acceptance, report processing, report review and specimen transfer. The stability of the LIS system
will significantly affect the normal operation of the laboratory department and even the diagnosis of clinicians.
The LIS system is also an important part for 15189 review process of the laboratory department. Medical
organizations pay more and more attention to medical information technology, including establishment of the
LIS system. The LIS system is also closely related to other systems in a hospital, including HIS system and
electronic medical records system. When an operator reviews a report in the LIS system, the self-service report
printer, out-patient medical workstation, in-patient medical workstation, including WeChat official account and
Alipay can receive the test result from the LIS system in real time. The LIS system has more and more data
interactions with other HIS subsystems.
For a equipment manufacturer, the equipment is normally connected to the LIS system which will print the lab
report. This is one of the most important sign indicating whether the equipment is enabled. To allow an engineer
to effectively coordinate the debugging operation of the LIS interface, the following sections focus on basic
knowledges and common problems concerning LIS connection.
12.2 LIS Networking
The communication between a computer (hereinafter referred to as workstation) and the LIS system is based
on TCP/IP protocol and data is transmitted via serial port or Ethernet port (cable transmission). The stability of
the network is very critical to the communication of the LIS system. The workstation configured for the
equipment shall have 2 or more network cards, and the workstation resides in the same network as that of the
equipment and LIS computer.
Figure 12-1 LIS connection diagram
12.2.1 Querying State of RS232 Serial Port Card and Network Card
Identifying the installation state of RS232 serial port and network card driver is an important part for detecting
the network state. If the driver is not installed, or any exception occurs to the installed driver, even if the
hardware including serial cable or network cable works normally, the network communication may be faulty.
Select [Computer] - [Property] - [Device Manager] - [Port] to check the installation of serial port card driver to

IVD Global Technical Support Dept.
check the state of the serial port.
Select [Computer] - [Property] - [Device Manager] - [Network Adapter] to check the installation of network card
driver to check the state of the network card. Open Network and Sharing Center -> Control Panel\Network &
Internet\Network Connection to check network connection.
12.2.2 Checking Network Status
One of the network cards configured to the workstation is used to communicate with the LIS computer. Use a
network cable to connect the workstation to the LIS computer and use the "ping" command to check the
connectivity of the network.
ping is also a communication protocol as a part of TCP/IP protocol. The "ping" command can be used to check
the connectivity of the network and helpful in analyzing and identifying network failure. It is applied in the
following format: ping (a space) IP address.
Use the following steps to set the IP address of one of network works in the workstation computer to the same
network segment as that of the LIS system:
1) Click the "Network Connections" icon on the computer, open "Network and Sharing Center" and then
click "Local Connection".
2) Click "Details" to check IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DNS server.
3) Open Network and Sharing Center -> check Active Network -> click and select Network Connections
- Connection - Properties (select Internet protocol version 4).
Set IP address and other information on this interface. The network between workstation computer and LIS
system is set according to the network architecture of a hospital.
Figure 12-2 Input IP address

IP setting of workstation computer in a hospital

Figure 12-3 IP setting of workstation computer in a hospital

The IP address of the workstation computer shall be in the same network segment as that of LIS computer.
4) On the workstation, use the Win + R combination key and input CMD into the Run input box to enter
the command console:
Figure 12-4 Run screen

5) Input ping + IP of the LIS computer. If you are actually returned with bytes, the network is connected.

Figure 12-5 Network connected

Request timeout, data lost.
Figure 12-6 Network disconnected

6) Perform step 5 on the LIS computer to check if the network is connected
12.3 LIS Parameter Setup
12.3.1 Introduction to Protocols
Mindray devices strictly follow HL7 protocol and ASTM protocol. LIS manufacturers, at their discretion, decide
to use what protocol to implement LIS interface connection, i.e. via Ethernet port or serial port.
There are detailed descriptions about field and domain for message headers and separator domains defined
in HL7 protocol and ASTM protocol. LIS interface engineers shall strictly follow the examples given in the

communication protocol to develop LIS interfaces. This User Manual further explains the communication
protocol so that LIS engineers can be directed more effectively to develop interfaces.
The ASTM protocol is not specific to serial port. It is also applicable to Ethernet port. ASTM and HL7 protocols
define the message transfer format while serial port and Ethernet port are means for transferring data.
Note:
Serial port or Ethernet port is only a means for transferring data. The cross serial port cable used in data
transfer shall meet RS232C specifications.
12.3.2 Parameter Setup on a Workstation Computer
[Apply] - [System Setup] - [LIS Setup]
If Auto Connect to LIS is checked, the machine will be automatically connected to the LIS interface. A port is
set by the LIS system. The port on the workstation shall be set the same as that of the LIS system. Do not set
the port number to 80/8080.
After Retry after Disconnect is checked, the machine will automatically connect to the LIS system if LIS
disconnection is detected.
Figure 12-7 Transport setup

BS-360E allows interaction with the LIS system via serial port or Ethernet port. ASTM and HL7 standards are
only protocols and not related to transport medium. Both HL7 protocol and ASTM protocol allow transfer of
test data via serial port or Ethernet port.
12.3.3 Basic Concept of Unidirectional/Bidirectional LIS
Communication
Unidirectional LIS communication:
The machine only sends the test result to the LIS system and receives no any instruction from the LIS system.
The machine, after test, will automatically send related data to the LIS system which will then analyze the
received test result.
Bidirectional LIS communication:
The machine not only sends the test data to the LIS system but also receives an instruction from the LIS
system.
After recognizing the barcode containing sample information, the machine will send the "Inquiring sample
information" instruction to the LIS system which will then retrieve the matching information about test items
therefrom according to received sample information. If the information about test items are retrieved, the LIS
system shall return messages in a fixed format to the machine within the specified period of time.
The uniqueness of a sample is identified by a bar code. Once a barcode for a sample is generated, it is unique
and cannot be changed.
Note: Regardless of bidirectional LIS communication or unidirectional LIS communication, the LIS shall always
make response to the information sent from the machine.

The unidirectional and bidirectional LIS communications have the basically same settings on LIS Setup ->
Transport Setup, with the only difference in
Bidirectional LIS setup:
1) From [Apply] - [System Setup] - [LIS Setup], select Bidirectional for the communication mode.
2) From [Apply] - [System Setup] - [Barcode Setup], select [Auto Number Scanned Samples].
Figure 12-8 Sample Bar Code
12.3.4 Channel ID Setup

Purpose of channel ID (item code): A channel ID plays an important role in LIS communication. In unidirectional
LIS communication, if there is a test item without setting a channel ID (item code), the result will not be sent to
the LIS system. Missing of test results is often resulted from failure to set a channel ID.
When a sample shall be diluted before testing, a channel ID is divided into a general channel ID and a dilution
channel ID which have the same setting method. However, a general channel ID shall not be the same as a
dilution channel ID, and do not carry out the original content test and dilution test for the same specimen at the
same time. The LIS system can process the general testing and dilution testing separately, but only one
channel ID is active when the machine is communicating with the LIS system.
The role of a channel ID is more important in bidirectional LIS communication. Without setting a channel ID,
or when the channel ID (item code) of the machine does not match that of the LIS system, when the machine
identifies the sample barcode and then sends the "Inquiring sample information" instruction to the LIS system,
the LIS system will not match correct information about sample items from the background according to the
barcode. To correctly transfer information about sample items, use the channel ID set in the LIS system. If the
LIS system sends a channel ID not set in the machine or a wrong channel ID, the machine will receive the
information with an alarm and reject to process it.
Steps to set a channel ID:
1) Disconnect the LIS system before maintaining a channel ID
2) Double click the blank area after an item and input the pre-defined channel ID (it is determined by
the LIS engineer).


Figure 12-9 Channel ID setup

Note: In general, only the LIS system administrator has permission to set a channel ID in the LIS system. Any
other persons are not authorized to edit a channel ID.
The channel ID maintained on the workstation computer shall be the same as that on the LIS system.
For example, the channel ID setup interface of the LIS system.
12.4 Operation Guidance of Test Tool
Please download the LIS test tool from the TDP platform
TDP/Bio-chemistry/LIS/LIS tool
Role of test tool: The tool is mainly intended for testing the LIS communication function of the machine (the
capability of sending the test result after specimen testing)
The LIS communication function is one of the most basic functions of the software. Methods to process raw
data may be different, depending on LIS manufacturers. When a test result is missed or part of results goes
wrong during transfer, you can use a data reception tool to check the cause. If it is checked that data sent from
the machine is completely consistent with that displayed in the workstation log, you can simply locate the LIS
interface to address the problem with raw data. Therefore, you can simply use the test tool to find out the
reason for an LIS problem. This tool mainly helps an engineer to check raw data sent from the machine.
The machine and LIS system cannot be used as the client or server side at the same time. Instead, there can
be the case where one is the client and the other is the server side. Note that port numbers are consistent. If
the 2 conditions above are met, the basic communication conditions are established. As a client, the machine
has the function to automatically connect to the LIS system.
12.4.1 Operation Procedure of Test Tool
1) Double click the "Mindray.exe" app
Note: The bi-direction test checkbox is checked by default. The server side mode is used by default.
Copy the Mindray.exe test tool to the workstation computer. Open Mindray.exe and exit the LIS system. Set
the port number and IP address in LIS setup on the workstation computer the same as that on the test tool,
and use the test tool as the client.

Figure 12-10 LIS tool
2) Setting port number and IP address

Setting port number and IP address is the most important link for implementing simulation of bidirectional LIS
communication.
Note: Click the "Log" button to generate a log which can be accessed from the path :LisDebug\Lislog.txt.
Click the "Clear" button to clear raw data.

Setting port number: The port numebr shall be identical to that set in the test tool.
IP is set to point to LIS IP. If the LIS system is installed on the computer connected to the machine, IP can be
set to Local IP (127.0.0.1). If the LIS system is not installed on the computer connected to the machine, IP is
set to Distance IP.

3) Simulating bidirectional LIS communication

When simulating bidirectional LIS communication, this tool can visualize the communication between the test
tool and the machine and generate a communication log which can be used to describe how to implement
bidirectional LIS communication to be used for simulation by an engineer. This can be an important guidance
for LIS engineers to develop bidirectional LIS interfaces.
The communication protocol and principle used by this test tool is identical to LIS system. However, it has only
part of LIS features and cannot completely be used as an alternative for LIS.
This test tool completely gives the data flow of bidirectional LIS communication and reduces the difficulty in
understanding bidirectional LIS communication and interface development on the engineer side.

The configuration file is mainly intended for maintaining item information and patient information sent to the
machine during bidirectional LIS communication testing.

Figure 12-14 LIS channel ID

Note: By default, the Mindray.exe tool assigns default values to basic patient information during programming.
A channel ID shall be manually entered in MRsettings.ini.
LIS Engineer's Need-to-Know
 Start character: char(11) Ox0B
 Carriage return character: char(13) Ox0B
 Stop character: char(13)+char(28) Ox0D+Ox1C
 ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a computer encoding system based
on Latin alphabet and mainly used for displaying Modern English and other Western-European
languages. It is now the most common single-byte coding system https://baike.baidu.com/item/编码
/80092. In interactions of LIS communication information, part of codes in the ASCII chart are used
as control characters. Therefore, LIS engineers shall identify the start character and stop character
when developing LIS interfaces. If all conditions are met, data is valid, with the start character being
single-byte char(11) Ox0B and stop character being multi-byte char(13)+char(28) Ox0D+Ox1C.
08,00:46:09:140,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180708004609||QRY^Q02|2487|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20180708004609|R|D|1169|||RD|120000116538|OTH|||T|<CR>
QRF||||||RCT|COR|ALL||<CR>
<EB><CR>
,
Messages in LIS communication use fixed format. Each sample message contains control characters which
are invisible to the naked eye but they have to exist. The machine will convert the start character to <SB> and
stop character to <EB><CR> in order to completely express received messages.
Regardless of receiving the sample application information or response message from the LIS system, the
machine will always detect both the start and stop characters in the message frame. An LIS engineer shall not
treat the start character and stop character as a character in the LIS interface, nor add or delete control
characters.
12.5 Common Problems and Corrective Measures
12.5.1 LIS cannot be connected
First, check whether the port number set on the workstation computer matches that of the LIS interface. Do
not use port number 80/8080. Next, check whether the IP address of the workstation matches that of the LIS
host and check that the workstation is properly connected to the LIS host.
The machine is used as the client and the LIS is used as the server side by default. The machine can be
automatically connected to the LIS.

12.5.2 LIS communication interrupted suddenly
 LIS sudden interruption: The "Transmission (TX)" button of the LIS is grayed out. The button is black
in normal state.
 The HOST status bar flashes always. It is blue in normal state. (In the condition that the LIS interface
is active)
 The machine software displays that the LIS is connected, but the "TX" button is grayed out (in the
condition that the LIS interface is active)
 The machine software displays that the LIS is not connected, and the "TX" button is grayed out (in
the condition that the LIS interface is active)
 The Connect icon is on and then grayed out (In the condition that the LIS interface is active)
For Mindray machines, the administrator permission is required for LIS communication to normally transmit
test results and implement information interaction. Change administrator permissions as below:
Figure 12-15 Run regedit
Figure 12-16 Registry

The EnableUA value is normally 0: from the Registry, change the EnableUA value to 0
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System

Figure 12-17 LIS state
12.5.3 Issues with firewall

Firewall settings will also affect the LIS communication. Check the firewall settings in both the machine and
LIS system sides.
Firewall policy: For the sake of security, some labs will customize some policies to allow only the port number
specified by the LIS system for communication. This is wrong. Although the port number used for LIS
communication is fixed, data communication inside the machine is randomly assigned with a port number.
Therefore, a port number shall not be fixed or limited to a certain range.
Windows system is a copy: Some computer systems are not an authorized edition, especially for non-
authorized edition with the desktop displayed as black ground that will affect the LIS communication. In this
case, please install an authorized edition and then deploy the LIS environment again.
12.5.4 Invalid LIS response
During LIS communication, especially when transmitting test results, the workstation can continue
communication only when a correct response message is received from the LIS system; otherwise, the
communication is blocked.
Error C06005 Sending sample results failed
Main cause: After sending the sample results, the machine does not receive the valid ACK message from the
LIS system.
The machine will identify this as sending failure.
Error C06007 Inquiring sample information failed
Main cause: The machine issues the "Inquiring sample information" instruction to the LIS system. That is, the
machine scans the barcode and then sends the barcode information to the LIS system. However the LIS
system fails to return the information about what is test item on the barcode in the specified period of time or
correct format, and an alarm is generated. For an example of this, see below.
22,10:28:59:523,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20190222102859||QRY^Q02|10|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20190222102859|R|D|9|||RD|1902224828|OTH|||T|<CR>
<EB><CR>
22,10:28:59:668,LinkLayer
Log: <=<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20190222102859||QCK^Q02|10|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII||<CR>
MSA|AA|10|Message accepted|||0|<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
<EB><CR>

22,10:28:59:669,MSH segment field count < 19 error[Count = 18].,
22,10:28:59:669, Parse segment[1] of message error[Ret = -2147090430]. ,
22,10:28:59:669,LinkLayer Log: CLinkLayer::DealFrame create FetchRcvFrm(),
Figure 12-18 LIS code

If there is a problem with message ACK, then an error will occur when item information is transmitted to the
machine later.
Figure 12-19 LIS item information
12.5.5 ISE response time out

27,11:33:07:185,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180727113307||ORU^R01|3583|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||
27,11:33:37:194,AppLayer Log: Application Layer Timeout !!!,
:
:
:
27,11:33:37:198, sending sample results failed. Sample ID/bar code: 3032, position: N0016-2,

Figure 12-20 LIS sample result
When the "Sending sample results failed" error occurs, check whether a response message is developed for
the LIS interface.
The response time can be set to 10 s, 20 s or 30 s in LIS setup.
When the workstation sends sample results, the LIS system shall make response. If the response is given for
more than 10 s, the machine will alert response timeout. An alarm will be also generated when the response
format is wrong. An LIS engineer shall pay special attention to start character, stop character and message ID
when processing response messages. Message ID is a variable. Not all message IDs sent each time are 1.
<SB>MSH|^~\&|LIS-Server|NanShan
Hospital|Mindray|BS-400|20090216201111||ACK^R01|64|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
<EB><CR>,
Problems with bidirectional LIS communication due to problems with channel ID
12.5.6 LIS communication result slowly transmitted
The machine has a mechanism to check response. That is, the machine will continue communication only
when it receives a valid response from the LIS system after a sample result is sent out. Otherwise, it will wait
for a valid response. Sending the test result from the machine to the LIS system may take a very short time. If
an engineer finds that transmitting a test result takes several minutes or longer, there is a high probability that
the LIS system has no response or gives wrong response.
In this case, an LIS engineer is recommended to check the response format of the LIS interface.
Note:
Message ID in a response message is a variable but not a constant. Message ID uses that given in the sample
result.
Response message:
<SB>MSH|^~\&|LIS-Server|NanShan
Hospital|Mindray|BS-400|20090216201111||ACK^R01|64|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
<EB><CR>,
12.5.7 Part of item results missed during LIS communication
If part of item results are missed when transmission to the LIS system, check the channel ID, especially
checking whether this is a calculation item.
12.6 Bidirectional LIS communication interaction log
11,09:57:56:467,LinkLayer Log:=>
<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||QRY^Q02|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
QRD|20180811095756|R|D|1|||RD|002100418080230050|OTH|||T|<CR>
<EB><CR>

11,09:57:56:558,LinkLayerLog: <=<SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||QCK^Q02|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
<EB><CR>
MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||DSR^Q03|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
QAK|SR|OK|<CR>
QRD|20180811095756|R|D|2|||RD||OTH|||T|<CR>
DSP|1|||||<CR>
DSP|2|||||<CR>
DSP|3|||||<CR>
DSP|4|||||<CR>
DSP|5|||||<CR>
DSP|6|||||<CR>
DSP|7|||||<CR>
DSP|8|||||<CR>
DSP|9|||||<CR>
DSP|10|||||<CR>
DSP|11|||||<CR>
DSP|12|||||<CR>
DSP|13|||||<CR>
DSP|14|||||<CR>
DSP|15|||||<CR>
DSP|16|||||<CR>
DSP|17|||||<CR>
DSP|18|||||<CR>
DSP|19|||||<CR>
DSP|20|||||<CR>
DSP|21|002100418080230050||||<CR>
DSP|22|||||<CR>
DSP|23||20180811095756|||<CR>
DSP|24||N|||<CR>
DSP|25|||||<CR>
DSP|26||serum|||<CR>
DSP|27|||||<CR>
DSP|28|||||<CR>
DSP|29||2^^^|||<CR>
DSP|30||13^^^|||<CR>
DSP|31||6^^^|||<CR>
DSP|32||7^^^|||<CR>
DSP|33||8^^^|||<CR>
DSP|34||9^^^|||<CR>
DSP|35||10^^^|||<CR>
DSP|36||11^^^|||<CR>
DSP|37||12^^^|||<CR>
DSP|38||1^^^|||<CR>
DSC||<CR>
<EB><CR>

11,09:57:56:732,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180811095756||ACK^Q03|1|P|2.3.1||||||ASCII|||<CR>
ERR|0|<CR>
<EB><CR>
Role of Analysis Tool
A data analysis tool allows copy and paste of raw data of the machine for analysis.
08,23:03:18:947,LinkLayer
Log: =><SB>MSH|^~\&|||||20180708230318||ORU^R01|2800|P|2.3.1||||0||ASCII|||<CR>
PID|1472|||||||O|||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
OBR|1472||9015|^|N|20180708224731|20180708224703|20180708224703||1^1||||20180708224703|serum|||
|||||||5|||||||||||||||||||||||<CR>
OBX|1|NM|4|calcium|2.252133|mmol/L|-|N|||F||2.252133|20180708225609|||0|<CR>
OBX|2|NM|5|magnesium|0.569389|mmol/L|-|N|||F||0.569389|20180708225829|||0|<CR>
OBX|3|NM|6|inorganic phosphorus|1.578690|mmol/L|-|N|||F||1.578690|20180708230304|||0|<CR>
OBX|4|NM|10|total bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method)|8.779144|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||8.779144|20180708230315|||0|<CR>
OBX|5|NM|11|direct bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method)|3.441980|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||3.441980|20180708230318|||0|<CR>
OBX|6|NM|16|adenosine deaminase|7.739112|U/L|-|N|||F||7.739112|20180708230311|||0|<CR>
OBX|7|NM|17|prealbumin|230.296762|mg/L|-|N|||F||230.296762|20180708230300|||0|<CR>
OBX|8|NM|18|total bile acid|1.787443|μmol/L|-|N|||F||1.787443|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|9|NM|19|alanine aminotransferase|19.820950|U/L|-|N|||F||19.820950|20180708230134|||0|<CR>
OBX|10|NM|20|aspartate amino transferase |39.088345|U/L|-|N|||F||39.088345|20180708230137|||0|<CR>
OBX|11|NM|21|alkaline phosphatase|130.115058|U/L|-|N|||F||130.115058|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|12|NM|22|γ-glutamyltransferase|67.893341|U/L|-|N|||F||67.893341|20180708230134|||0|<CR>
OBX|13|NM|23|lipoprotein (a)|71.263917|mg/L|-|N|||F||71.263917|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|14|NM|24|total protein|48.843538|g/L|-|N|||F||48.843538|20180708230224|||0|<CR>
OBX|15|NM|25|cholinesterase|4114.479156|U/L|-|N|||F||4114.479156|20180708225949|||0|<CR>
OBX|16|NM|26|albumin|29.379028|g/L|-|N|||F||29.379028|20180708225721|||0|<CR>
OBX|17|NM|27|lipase|10.279494|U/L|-|N|||F||10.279494|20180708230130|||0|<CR>
OBX|18|NM|28|α-amylase|63.568402|U/L|-|N|||F||63.568402|20180708230039|||0|<CR>

OBX|19|NM|29|apolipoprotein A1|1.740667|g/L|-|N|||F||1.740667|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|20|NM|30|apolipoprotein B|1.241503|g/L|-|N|||F||1.241503|20180708230231|||0|<CR>
OBX|21|NM|31|triglyceride|5.302102|mmol/L|-|N|||F||5.302102|20180708230235|||0|<CR>
OBX|22|NM|33|low density lipoprotein cholesterin|2.838998|mmol/L|-
|N|||F||2.838998|20180708230231|||0|<CR>
OBX|23|NM|34|high density lipoprotein cholesterin|1.156541|mmol/L|-
|N|||F||1.156541|20180708230235|||0|<CR>
OBX|24|NM|35|total cholesterol|5.675223|mmol/L|-|N|||F||5.675223|20180708225732|||0|<CR>
OBX|25|NM|36|creatinine (sarcosine oxidase method)|61.837352|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||61.837352|20180708230239|||0|<CR>
OBX|26|NM|38|uric acid|436.774956|μmol/L|-|N|||F||436.774956|20180708230242|||0|<CR>
OBX|27|NM|40|cystatin C|1.232627|mg/L|-|N|||F||1.232627|20180708230246|||0|<CR>
OBX|28|NM|41|urea|3.750785|mmol/L|-|N|||F||3.750785|20180708230116|||0|<CR>
BX|29|NM|43|creatine kinase MB isoenzyme|32.245208|U/L|-|N|||F||32.245208|20180708230242|||0|<CR>
OBX|30|NM|44|creatine kinase|62.994467|U/L|-|N|||F||62.994467|20180708230249|||0|<CR>
OBX|31|NM|45|lactic dehydrogenase |324.101538|U/L|-|N|||F||324.101538|20180708230217|||0|<CR>
OBX|32|NM|46|α-hydroxybutyrate dehydrogenase|243.997631|U/L|-
|N|||F||243.997631|20180708230213|||0|<CR>
OBX|33|NM|58|C reactive protein|36.545503|mg/L|-|N|||F||36.545503|20180708230257|||0|<CR>
OBX|34|NM|61|β2-microglobulin|2.708314|mg/L|-|N|||F||2.708314|20180708230300|||0|<CR>
OBX|35|NM|62|α-L-fucosidase |53.824504|U/L|-|N|||F||53.824504|20180708230123|||0|<CR>
OBX|36|NM|63|Fe|10.033768|μmol/L|-|N|||F||10.033768|20180708230257|||0|<CR>
OBX|37|NM|65|homocysteine (enzymatic cycling methods)|13.780098|μmol/L|-
|N|||F||13.780098|20180708230304|||0|<CR>
OBX|38|NM|1|Na|136.355000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||136.355000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|39|NM|2|K|4.220000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||4.220000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|40|NM|3|Cl|101.729000|mmol/L|-|N|||F||101.729000|20180708225006|||0|<CR>
OBX|41|NM|135|Glo|19.400000|g/L|-|N|||F||19.400000|||||<CR>
OBX|42|NM|136|A/G|1.515464||-|N|||F||1.515464|||||<CR>
OBX|43|NM|137|AST/ALT|1.972250||-|N|||F||1.972250|||||<CR>
OBX|44|NM|138|IBIL-V|5.340000|μmol/L|-|N|||F||5.340000|||||<CR>
<EB><CR>
This tool can display how the LIS interface process raw data from the machine and how the raw data from the
machine is analyzed and extracted, and generates a log in a specified format

Sample ID 9015
Channel ID -------------4--------|| item name --------calcium:--------:result 2.252133
Channel ID -------------5--------|| item name --------magnesium:--------:result 0.569389
Channel ID -------------6--------|| item name --------inorganic phosphorus:--------:result 1.578690
Channel ID-------------10--------||item name--------total bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method):--------:result
8.779144
Channel ID-------------11--------||item name--------direct bilirubin (vanadate oxidation method):--------:result
3.441980
Channel ID -------------16--------|| item name --------adenosine deaminase:--------:result 7.739112
Channel ID -------------17--------|| item name --------prealbumin:--------:result 230.296762
Channel ID -------------18--------|| item name --------total bile acid:--------:result 1.787443
Channel ID -------------19--------|| item name --------alanine aminotransferase:--------:result 19.820950
Channel ID -------------20--------|| item name --------aspartate amino transferase:--------:result 39.088345
Channel ID -------------21--------|| item name --------alkaline phosphatase:--------:result 130.115058
Channel ID -------------22--------|| item name --------γ-glutamyltransferase:--------:result 67.893341
Channel ID -------------23--------|| item name --------lipoprotein (a):--------:result 71.263917
Channel ID -------------24--------|| item name --------total protein:--------:result 48.843538
Channel ID -------------25--------|| item name --------cholinesterase:--------:result 4114.479156
Channel ID -------------26--------|| item name --------albumin:--------:result 29.379028
Channel ID -------------27--------|| item name --------lipase:--------:result 10.279494
Channel ID -------------28--------|| item name --------α-amylase:--------:result 63.568402
Channel ID -------------29--------|| item name --------apolipoprotein A1:--------:result 1.740667
Channel ID -------------30--------|| item name --------apolipoprotein B:--------:result 1.241503
Channel ID -------------31--------|| item name --------triglyceride:--------:result 5.302102
Channel ID -------------33--------|| item name --------low density lipoprotein cholesterin:--------:result 2.838998
Channel ID -------------34--------|| item name --------high density lipoprotein cholesterin:--------:result 1.156541
Channel ID -------------35--------|| item name --------total cholesterol:--------:result 5.675223
Channel ID -------------36--------|| item name --------creatinine (sarcosine oxidase method):--------:result

61.837352
Channel ID -------------38--------|| item name --------uric acid:--------:result 436.774956
Channel ID -------------40--------|| item name --------cystatin C:--------:result 1.232627
Channel ID -------------41--------|| item name --------urea:--------:result 3.750785
Channel ID -------------43--------|| item name --------creatine kinase MB isoenzyme:--------:result 32.245208
Channel ID -------------44--------|| item name --------creatine kinase:--------:result 62.994467
Channel ID -------------45--------|| item name --------lactic dehydrogenase:--------:result 324.101538
Channel ID -------------46--------|| item name --------α-hydroxybutyrate dehydrogenase:--------:result 243.997631
Channel ID -------------58--------|| item name --------C-reactive protein:--------:result 36.545503
Channel ID -------------61--------|| item name --------β2-microglobulin:--------:result 2.708314
Channel ID -------------62--------|| item name --------α-L-fucosidase:--------:result 53.824504
Channel ID -------------63--------|| item name --------Fe:--------:result 10.033768
Channel ID------------65--------||item name--------homocysteine (enzymatic cycling methods):--------:result
13.780098
Channel ID -------------1--------|| item name --------Na:--------:result 136.355000
Channel ID -------------2--------|| item name --------K:--------:result 4.220000
Channel ID -------------3--------|| item name --------Cl:--------:result 101.729000
Channel ID -------------135--------|| item name --------Glo:--------:result 19.400000
Channel ID -------------136--------|| item name --------A/G:--------:result 1.515464
Channel ID -------------137--------|| item name --------AST/ALT:--------:result 1.972250
Channel ID -------------138--------|| item name --------IBIL-V:--------:result 5.340000

13 Instrument Relocation and Emptying

13.1 Overview
When the analyzer is deactivated or should be moved to another working environment, process as follows.
13.1.1 Short-Term Suspension

If the analyzer is deactivated for a short term (within 3 days), the following operations are required on the
analyzer:
1) Enter the software, select Empty Fluidic Tubes. Refer to13.2 .
2) Remove all reagents and cleansers from the analyzer.
3) Exit the operating software, shut down the computer, and close the analyzing unit.
4) If the analyzer should be removed for storage, disconnect the main unit of the biochemical
analyzer from the computer, printer, display, and data cable, and follow the reverse steps of
8.4.4 Connect the pipeline to disconnect the tubing from the back end of the analyzing unit.
13.1.2 Long-Term Suspension

If the analyzer is deactivated for a long term (more than 3 days or several years), the following operations are
required on the analyzer:
4) Pack the analyzer according to section 13.4 Packing.
13.1.3 Analyzer Relocation

In the daily business of the laboratory, you may encounter the following situations that require the analyzer to
be relocated:
Out-Hospital Relocation
The laboratory will be relocated with the hospital or the analyzer will be transferred to another
branch for use.
The analyzer was donated to a lower-level township hospital.
In-Hospital Relocation
The laboratory is refurbished and the analyzer must first be moved to a temporary department.
The laboratory is moved to a new room or a new building.
Relocation target: The movement of the analyzer may affect its normal use and have a certain impact on its
performance. The goal of the relocation is to ensure that its performance meets the business requirements
through subsequent alignment and verification as it moves.
Relocation steps:
4) Pack the analyzer according to section 13.4 Packing.
5) Transport to the target location

6) Install the analyzer according to 8 Installation..
13.2 Emptying Fluidic Tubes

Click Utility →Maintenance→Alignment →Empty Fluidic Tubes to enter the screen.
Figure 13-1 Utility →Maintenance→Alignment →Empty Fluidic Tubes screen
13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional)

Empty Index
1) After the ISE tube is emptied, no water flows out from the tube connecting the ISE reagent pack.
2) All electrodes have been removed and the peristaltic pump tubing has been removed.
Empty method and steps:
1) Prepare the pipette, as shown below, and enter the Empty ISE Tube screen.
2) Use the pipette to aspirate 200 μl calibrator A from the sample loading port.
3) Place enough ISE wash solution at the required location on the sample\reagent carousel screen.
Execute the cleaning command and wait for the cleaning completed before proceeding to the
next step;

Figure 13-2 Empty ISE Tube screen
4) Remove all electrodes except the reference electrode. Dispense the aspirated calibrator A into
electrodes K+, Cl- and Na+, and use adhesive tape to seal both ends of the electrodes.
5) Install 4 spacers, use an emptying device to connect the A/B ports on the wand to deionized water,
and then execute Purge A/B periodically for 40 times.
6) Disconnect deionized water from A/B ports and continue with the purging.
Remarks: The number of purging operations can be set according to the emptying condition until the residual
deionized water in the A and B tubes is completely drained, and no liquid flows out from the waste outlet.

Figure 13-3 Empty ISE Tube -Set purging times
7) Remove all electrodes and the emptying device, place the wand in the reagent pack, remove the
peristaltic pump tube, install the shielding box door, and tighten the screws on the shielding box.
Figure 13-4 Remove the pump tube from the peristaltic pump
13.2.2 Emptying Wash Tube

Empty Index
1) After emptying, no water flows out from the inlet of the auto DI water and the wash solution.
2) No water drops are sprayed out from the tip of the sample probe, and no water is sprayed out
from the outlet of the exterior wash well.
3) No water is sprayed out from the outlet of the exterior wash well of the mixer.
4) Check the waste outlet and there should be no colored waste liquid flowing out.

Figure 13-5 Empty Wash Tubes screen

Note Prompt on the software screen Manual operation
Manually remove the diluted wash solution tank, empty it, and perform 1) Click Continue. A dialog box will pop up. Confirm that the prompt
Auto Wash and Drain. content is consistent with the real object, and click OK.
2) Set the number of emptying to 50, click Start to perform Auto
Wash and Drain.
3) If there is still liquid out at the inlet of the wash solution tube at the
end of the procedure, click Start, and execute emptying again.
Clean the wash solution tube: 1) Operate according to the prompts on the screen. There is no
1) Remove the diluted wash solution tank and clean it, fill it with no visible wash solution foam in the pack after cleaning. Click
less than 200ml of deionized water, and put it back in place. Continue. A prompt dialog box will pop up. Confirm that the
2 2) Remove the auto wash probe and place it in a vacant container of prompt content is consistent with the real object, and click OK.
not less than 200 mL. 2) Set the number of emptying to 60, click Start to perform Prime
3) Perform Prime Wash Station. Wash Station.

Install the auto wash probe back to the place. Operate according to the prompts on the screen. Select Continue to
3
proceed to the next step.
Wash the cuvette and auto wash tube. 1) Click Continue to set the number of washing to 80, and perform
Cuvette Wash.
4 2) If there is still colored liquid out from the waste tube at the end of
the cleaning procedure, click Start again and execute cleaning
again.

Manually empty the DI water tank and the diluted wash solution tank and Operate according to the prompts on the screen. Click Continue. A dialog
5 put it back to the place. Put the DI water and the wash solution inlet pipes box will pop up. Confirm that the prompt content is consistent with the real
respectively back into the tanks. object, and click OK.
Empty the liquid in the clean tubing until no water flows out from the inlet of 1) Disconnect the water inlet tubing, empty the water in the diluted
the DI water and wash solution tubes, otherwise increase the number of wash solution tank, click Continue, set the number of emptying,
priming. and click Start to perform Empty Cuvette Wash Tube.
6
2) If there is still liquid out at the inlet of the DI water and the wash
solution tube at the end of the procedure, click Start, and execute
emptying again.

1) Empty the DI water tank, wash it and put it back into place. 1) Click Continue, set the number of emptying, and click Start to
2) Empty the water in the exterior and interior wash tubing of the perform Empty Probe Interior and Exterior Wash Tubes.
probe. Observe if no water is sprayed out from the sample probe 2) If there is still water out from the probe tip or from the outlet of the
tip and the wash well. Otherwise, increase the priming times. probe exterior wash well at the end of the procedure, click Start,
The residual water in the syringe can be drained by hand as needed: loosen and execute emptying again.
3) Operate according to the prompts on the screen, empty the water
the syringe, push and pull syringe plunger repeatedly until residual water is
7 in the loading syringe (Note: When loosening the fixing bolt of the
removed completely from syringe and T pieces, and then install the syringe.
syringe, the washer as shown below should be kept properly, and
reinstall the washer when reinstalling the syringe. Otherwise the
reliability of the syringe will be affected) Then install the syringe
so that the upper edge of the V-groove is aligned with the 7.5th
scale line of the sample syringe (the 7.5th scale line from top to
bottom) and reinstall the washer.

Washer
Piston locking
screw
Empty the water in the exterior wash tubing of the mixer. Observe if no 1) Click Continue, set the number of emptying, and click Start to
water is sprayed out from the wash well of the mixer. Otherwise, increase perform Empty Mixer Exterior Wash Tube.
8 the priming times. 2) If there is still water from the outlet of the mixer exterior wash well
at the end of the procedure, click Start, and execute emptying
again.

9 This procedure is complete. Select Continue to save it and exit the screen. Select Continue to exit the alignment.

13.2.3 Emptying Waste Tubes

Empty Index
1) No water flows out from the low-concentration waste connector of the fluidics outlet assembly.
2) Wipe the water in the reagent\sample carousel.
Figure 13-6 Empty Waste Tubes
1) Enter the Wash Waste Pump screen.

2) Remove the auto wash probe and place it in a clean container filled with deionized water. Click
Start to wash the pump 10 times. During the washing procedure, manually lift the auto wash
probe out of the liquid, and immerse it into the liquid periodically until the end of the procedure.
Select OK to proceed.

Figure 13-7 Empty Vacuum and Waste Tube-Wash Waste Pump
3) Put the auto wash probe back in place, click Start to perform Empty Waste Pump Tubes, and
observe that no water flows out from the outlet of the waste tube. Click Stop to end the process.
Tap "OK".
Figure 13-8 Empty Waste Pump Tubes
4) Click Continue until the process on the software screen ends.

5) Wipe the water on the fluidics inlet and outlet assemblies with a clean cloth and seal the inlet of
the DI water and wash solution with high temperature adhesive tape.
6) Remove the sample/reagent carousel, wipe the liquid in the chamber and in the carousel with a
clean cloth, and then reinstall it.
13.2.4 Use Count of Emptying Pump and Syringe

13.2.5 Confirmation after emptying

1) Refer to the table below to confirm that the emptying has been completed.
Table 13-1 Confirmation list after emptying fluidic tubes
No. Chemistry Inspection Standard/Requirement
No water flows out from the tube connecting the ISE

Empty ISE Tube reagent pack.
1
(optional) All electrodes have been removed and the peristaltic
pump tubing has been removed.
Empty Cuvette Wash No liquid flows out from the aspirate port of DI water and
2
Tube wash solution.
No water is sprayed out from the outlet of the exterior
wash wells of the sample probe and the mixer.
3 Empty exterior tubing
There should be no colored waste liquid flowing out the
waste outlet.
No water drops are sprayed out from the tip of the sample
4 Empty Interior Tube
probe.
No water flows out from the waste connector of the fluidics
5 Emptying Waste Tubes outlet assembly.
Wipe the water drops in the sample reagent chamber.
2) Enter the Parameter Configuration screen, select Wash Unit, find the Is Fluidic Prime Performed
parameter, check whether the value of this parameter is 0. If yes, click Done to exit the screen;
otherwise confirm whether emptying has been performed as required, and change the parameter to
0, and then click Configure to configure the parameter.

Figure 13-9 Parameter Configuration -Change the Is Fluidic Prime Performed parameter
13.3 Clearing Data

Note: This step is only performed when needed. By default, this step is skipped. This will erase all data on the
computer and cannot be recovered. Please be cautious!
If you need to delete historical data, please operate as follows:
1)Exit the BS-360E system software, return to the WINDOWS operation screen, open the control
panel from the Start menu, and uninstall the BS-360E system software.
2)Delete all system-independent files under the operating software installation path.
3)Delete all desktop shortcuts and files related to the BS-360E system, then perform Empty
Recycle Bin.

13.4 Packing
If the analyzer should be packed, please confirm whether the contents in the table below are
completed and whether the relevant materials have been prepared.
No. Check Item
1 The sample/reagent carousel has been emptied and cleaned
2 The reagents, cleansers, etc. in the analyzer have been taken out
3 The fluidic tubes have been emptied. Refer to 13.2 .
4 The materials list is as below:
 Tape. TESA4298 tape ivory white, 18 mmX50 (material ID: 095-000039-00)
 Stretch film width 450 mmX thickness 0.02 mm (material ID: A90-000095---)
 Roll foam. 53 M*1 M*8 mm (Material ID: 0000-10-10765)
 Bubble film Width 1 m Double flat Bubble Diameter 10 mm (material ID: A90-000077---)
 Heat shrinkable sleeve. Φ2.0 mm 105 Celsius degrees 600 V transparent (material ID: A20-
000018---), 1 for protecting the probe
 Cable tie (common tools, self-provided)
 Transparent sealed bag (self-provided)
 Sealing transparent tape (self-provided)
 Computer box (package left when installed)
 Accessory box (package left when installed)
 Main box and fixing screws (retained items when installed)
After confirming that the above items are correct, follow the installation guide in reverse. The specific steps are
as follows:
13.4.1 Removing the Tubes

Remove all tubes and tanks in reverse order of section 8.4.4 8.4.4 Connect the pipeline, clean all tubes and
tanks and put them into the accessory box.
13.4.2 Removing the Accessories

1) According to the reverse order of 8.4.3 , respectively remove the sample probe and the mixer. Wrap
the sample probe tip with a heat shrinkable sleeve, place it into a sealed bag, and place it into the
accessory box.

Note: Be careful not to lose the washer of the sample probe.
2) Remove the computer and the display, and remove the serial cable and the power cable of the main
unit.
13.4.3 Securing the Assemblies by Tape and Foam

As shown in the figure below, place the foam under the sample probe arm, the mixer arm, and the wash station,
and then fix them with tape. Fix each loading hole, sample/reagent carousel cover, and reaction carousel cover
with tape.
Figure 13-10 Fix accessories by tape and foam
13.4.4 Securing and Packing the Main Unit
1) Separate the main unit from the cabinet and wrap them with stretch film separately, first from the lower
side to the upper side, and then wrap the protective cover diagonally (the whole machine is wrapped
around tightly with 3-4 layers), and expose the carrying handle.
2) Pack the main unit and the cabinet according to the reverse order of section 8.4.1 Unpacking.
13.4.5 Packing the Accessories

Check that the accessories are complete (sample probe, mixer, tubing, tanks, instructions, operating cards, etc.)
and then wrap them in clear tape.
13.4.6 Packing the Main Unit and Display of the PC
1) Attach warning labels to the hand holes on both sides of the box of the computer main unit, and seal the
hand holes.
2) After attaching the serial number label on the box, bind the box with four straps as shown.
3) Bind the display box with two straps.

Figure 13-11 Pack the Main Unit and Display of the PC


14 Optional Modules
14.1 Overview
The optional modules include the ISE module, clog detection module and barcode scanning module.
When the client wants to add the above functions, you should perform the upgrade installation and alignment
work as follows to ensure that the modules function properly.
14.2 ISE Module

14.2.1 Overview of ISE Module
Please refer to3.10 ISE Unit (Optional).
The ISE module upgrade requires ISE upgrade package (BS-360E) 115-047662-00 and ISE accessory box
(with packaging) 115-003320-00
14.2.2 Installing the ISE Module

1) Power off the whole machine, and remove the sample/reagent face plate, left side plate and back plate
of the analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-1 Shells assembly .
2) Remove the ISE module packaging and the accessories in the list.
3) Install the electrolyte module on the shielding box with four US screws #6-32X5/16 UNC-2A.
Shielding box
Four screws for fixing
Figure 14-1 Install the electrolyte module on the shielding box
4)Insert the connector of the waste tube into the ISE module, which should be tightly fit. Pay
attention to the installation direction, and the red seal should not fall off.

Check the
connector of the
ISE waste tube.
Figure 14-2 ISE waste tube connection
5)Install the adapter cable of the ISE module onto the ISE module, and install the ISE module on the
mainframe bottom plate with four M4X8 pan head combination screws. The screws are not tightened
at the moment, and then tighten them after confirming the position of the ISE module. Be careful not
to press on the wire.
Figure 14-3 Adapter cable of the ISE module

Figure 14-4 Secure the ISE module to the mainframe
6) Remove the six M3X6 screws from the three peristaltic pumps, add one M3 spring washer to each
screen, and then re-tighten the screws. Use twelve M2.5X6 Phillips pan head screws with flat
washers and spring washers to fix the three peristaltic pumps onto the lower bracket hole of the
syringe. Note that the wiring directions are upwards as shown in the figure.
Figure 14-5 Secure the peristaltic pumps of the ISE module
7) Use four M3X6 pan head screws with washers to mount the ISE power board onto the board
bracket:
For the position of the ISE power board, see Figure 4-1 Locations of the PCBA on the instrument
1.
a) Connect the power cord of the ISE module to the corresponding ISE power board and
DC-DC board.

b) Insert the ISE module cable from the elliptical hole into the ISE power board.
ISE power board
ISE module
ISE module
power cord
cable
From the
elliptical hole
Figure 14-6 Connect the cable of the ISE power board
8) Insert the cables from the main control board to the ISE module onto the main control board and
bundle the cables onto the cable seat.
Cables
Bundle from the
the main
cables control
onto the board to
cable the ISE
seat module
Figure 14-7 Cables between the main control board and the ISE module
9) Connect the cables between the ISE module and the three peristaltic pumps.
Note: Bundle the cables at the peristaltic pumps during the assembly procedure, and prevent the cables from
coming into contact with the shafts of the three peristaltic pumps.
Bundle the power cord of the ISE module and the cables between the main control board and the clog detection
board to prevent the cables from coming into contact with the fan of the main control board.
10) Connect the ISE tubes as shown in the following figure. Use the small cable ties on the ISE module
interface to attach the A and B tubes to the shielding box. Install a retaining ring SB-1316 in the
outlet hole of the shielding box of the ISE waste tube.

Figure 14-8 Connection diagram of ISE tubes
Figure 14-9 Physical map of ISE peristaltic pumps

Wire harness
retainer (small)
Figure 14-10 Cable tie of ISE module
11) After the installation is complete, follow the above steps to check again.
12) Open the operating software with the engineer user name and password and click UtilitySystem
SetupFactory Setup.
Figure 14-11 Utility-System Setup-Factory Setup
13) Click Optional Modules.

Figure 14-12 Factory Setup-Optional Modules
14) Tick the Enable/Disable ISE checkbox, and click Save.
Figure 14-13 Optional Modules-Enable/Disable ISE
15) Align the ISE module
14.2.3 Alignment of the ISE module

1) Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>ISE Unit.See Figure 7-63 ISE unit Alignment.
2) Install the reference, Cl-, K+, Na+ and the spacer into the ISE module from the bottom to the top.
Caution:
 Please be careful not to lose the O-ring seals;

 It is recommended to install the electrodes from the bottom to the top. You need to press down the
base when you install the last electrode, to make sure the electrode is fixed well.
 Double check if the electrodes are fixed well.
Figure 14-14 Installation of ISE module electrodes
3) Connect the reagent pack to the reagent pack wand: as shown in the figure below, install the reagent
pack wand in place until you hear a "click" sound. Therefore, the "ISE communication error" appears.
Figure 14-15 Install the reagent pack wand
4) Align the probe postion. (Refer to7.5.8 Probe to Horizontal Postion on ISE Part (Optional) and 7.5.9
Probe to Vertical Postion on ISE Part (Optional))
5) Module Intialization,refer to 7.11.1 Module Intialization.
6) Put away the panels including the ISE shielding shell.
Note: After the ISE module is installed, do not cut off the mains power (the power switch for
the analyzing unit can be cut off). If the mains power must be cut off and the downtime is more than 2
hours, empty the ISE and remove the electrodes. For details, refer to rob in 13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube
(optional). To remove electrodes, the ISE module shall be cleaned and emptied as well.

14.2.4 Precautions for ISE

 Don’t turn off the main switch if the machine has ISE module. Because the machine primes every half an
hour automatically. Long time no priming can lead to damage of electrode
 After the upgrade of ISE module. We suggest standing and auto-prime for 24 hours before calibration and
normal test.
 After the ISE cleaning, please wait at least 15 minutes before calibration because the electrode is unstable
right after the cleaning.
 When execute calibration, we suggest calibrating 3-4 times, waiting the calibration data to be stable before
control or sample test.
 After electrodes are installed, the reagent pack shall be installed as well and at the same time, the mains
power for the analyzer shall be turned on to ensure that the ISE is continuously powered on.
 Carry out the calibration before ISE testing and the calibration result is normal. Otherwise, the accuracy of
the test result cannot be ensured.
 Clean it with MEDICA-specific wash solution at the end of daily operation (for details, refer to user manual);
 If testing for samples is carried out continuously for more than 8 hours or more than 50 consecutive samples
are tested, clean it and carry out calibration again.
 To remove electrodes, execute maintenance instructions and remove electrodes, along with the reagent
pack. Then, execute the ISE emptying procedure. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Empty ISE Tube (optional).

14.3 Clog Detection Module

14.3.1 Introduction to Clog Detection Module
The clog detection module is composed of a clog detection board and a clog detection tee.
 The pressure sensor detects the tubing pressure when aspirating.
 It automatically removes clogs with high pressure to ensure smooth operation.
 For different sample types, set different pressure thresholds.
Pressure change
during aspiration
Aspiration Aspiration
Pressure
starts ends
Normal
Aspiration aspiration
waveform during waveform
probe clog
Time
Figure 14-16 Clog detection tee
For the clog detection board, please refer to 4.4.7 Clog Detection Board(Optional).
The upgrade code of the clog detection module is 115-046239-00.
14.3.2 Installing the Clog Detection Module
Procedure
1) Power off the whole machine, and remove the back plate of the analyzer.
2) Use four M3×6 pan head screws with washers to mount the clog detection board onto the board
bracket.

1 - Installation position of clog detection tee; 2 - Mounting bracket of clog detection board
Figure 14-17 Installation position diagram of clog detection module
3) Then connect the cables of the main control board and the clog detection board to the corresponding
clog detection board (051-000218-00) (J2 and J3 interfaces) and the main control board (J3 interface).
Figure 14-18 J2 and J3 interfaces of clog detection board
4) Use the M3×8 Phillips pan head screws with washers to secure the clog detection tee to the frame.
The clog detection tee assembly with the mark should be faced up.

Figure 14-19 Secure the clog detection tee assembly
5) Cut the original D08 tube by 50 mm, and screw the D08 connector into the upper threaded hole of the
clog detection tee (the threaded hole at the end closer to the sensor wire). Then assemble the
connector of the D34 tube, screw one end of the D34 into the lower threaded hole of the clog detection
tee, and screw one end into the SV02 threaded hole.
Note: Be careful of the Teflon tubing, do not squeeze or bend it.
The length of D34

tube is 110 mm.
Cut the original
D08 off 50 mm,
and D08 is now
120 mm.
Figure 14-20 Tubing connection of clog detection tee

6) Open the operating software with the engineer user name and password and click UtilitySystem
SetupFactory Setup. See Figure 14-11 Utility-System Setup-Factory Setup
7) Click Optional Modules. See Figure 14-12 Factory Setup-Optional Modules
8) Tick the Probe Clog Detection checkbox, and click Save.
Figure 14-21 Optional Modules-Probe Clog Detection
9) Complete the installation of the clog detection module.
14.4 Bar Code Scanning Module

14.4.1 Overview of Bar Code Scanning Module
Auto entry of reagent/sample information: automatically enter the reagent/sample information using barcode
scanning module
For sample barcode indicators, please refer to Table 2-3 Sample bar code.
For reagent barcode indicators, please refer to Table 2-4 Reagent bar code.
To upgrade the barcode scanning module, a barcode module upgrade package is required (BA36) 115-047663-
00
14.4.2 Installing the Barcode Scanner

1) Power off the whole machine, and remove the front face plate of the analyzer, sample/reagent face
plate, left side plate and back plate. Refer to Figure 3-1 Shells assembly.
2) Remove the four M3X12 screws on the barcode scanning window cover on the sample/reagent
carousel and remove the cover.

Figure 14-22 Remove the scanning window cover
3) Install the reagent carousel anti-fog heating unit onto the reagent chamber with four M3X8 Phillips pan
head screws.
Figure 14-23 Install the reagent carousel anti-fog heating unit
4) Attach the dust cover with the sponge adjustment pad to the fixing plate with four M3X6 Phillips pan
head screws.

Figure 14-24 Install the dust cover
5) Use two M3X8 hex socket head caps with spring washers and large flat pads to secure the scanner
bracket to the barcode mounting plate. Use two M3X10 hex socket screws with spring washers and
large flat pads to mount the barcode scanner onto the scanner bracket. In this step, do not tighten the
two sets of screws. Align the position of the scanner first and then tighten the screws. Use two M3X8
hexagon socket screws with spring washers and large flat pads to secure the barcode mounting plate
to the underside of the frame beam and tighten the screws.
Barcode mounting plate
Scanner bracket
Barcode scanner
Figure 14-25 Secure and install the barcode scanner
6) Connect the cables between the anti-fog heater and the protection switch and between the main
control board and the barcode module to the corresponding connectors as shown in the figure.

The cable between the anti-fog heater and protection switch passes through the
elliptical hole in the bracket and is pulled to the back of the bracket
The barcode cable is routed along the path shown in the figure and is bundled on the
bracket hole and then pulled to the back of the bracket
Figure 14-26 Barcode wiring
Note: cable tie fixing and wiring precautions
Attach a cable to the frame to

tie the cable
The cable tie is attached to the

bracket as far as possible, and
the cable is tied close to the
top as much as possible.
Figure 14-27 Secure the cable tie

Pull the cable

from the barcode
bracket
Keep the plug

away from the
edge of the
reagent chamber
Attach two cable

ties on the air
duct to fix the
cable onto the
air duct. Keep
the plug away
from the edge of
the reagent
chamber.
Figure 14-28 Connection precautions
7) For barcode alignment, please refer to 7.8 Bar Code Unit (Optional).
8) After alignment, open the operating software with the engineer user name and password and click
UtilitySystem SetupFactory Setup. See Figure 14-11 Utility-System Setup-Factory Setup
9) Click Optional Modules. See Figure 14-12 Factory Setup-Optional Modules.
10) Tick the Enable/Disable Sample Carousel Bar Code and Enable/Disable Reagent Bar Code
checkboxes, and click Save.

Note: Please tick the checkboxes according to the actual conditions of the client. For example, if the
client only scans with the reagent barcode, but does not use the sample barcode scanning, you can
tick only Enable/Disable Reagent Bar Code.
Figure 14-29 Optional Modules-Enable/Disable Bar Code
11) Complete the installation of the barcode scanning module.

Appendices
A.1 BS-360E Installation Acceptance Report
BS-360E
Installation Acceptance Report _V1.0_EH.doc
A.2 BS-360E Moving Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No

Alignment Tooling)
BS-360E Moving
Parts Position Confirmation Guide (No Alignment Tooling)_V1.0_EH.doc
A.3 Tool list
Tool list.xlsx
A.4 BS-360E_Error Information Feedback Form_V1.0_EN
BS-360E_Error
Information Feedback Form
A.5 BS-360E Series Recovery Checklist
BS-360E Series
Recovery Checklist_V1.0_EH.docx
A.6 Maintenance log sheet
Maintenance log
sheet.xlsx

A.7 Fluidic Diagram
MF01
T05 T06 D08 T07 T08 D09
Reagent Reaction
T09 Carousel Carousel ZQ01
SV02 NS MIX W09
SY03 W10
PWCS PWCM W11
T36
T14 T17 D21
D18 D19
W12
SI1 SI2 SI3 SI4
D07 SV03 T39 T38 T37
T46 D20 T18 D22
T15 T16
D33 D29 T33 D31 W13 W14 ZQ02
SV04 W01 W02 W03 W04

D30 T32 D32 P04 P03 P02
D17 ZZ10
SV07 SV05
W15 W16 ZQ03
D27 D28
T04 T34 T35
W05 W06
D06 T28 T27 T26
T31
1 2 3
P01 D25 D26 ZZ06 ZZ09
T40 T41
D16 SV06
T25
ZZ07
CAN02 D24 ZZ05 T29

W17
ZZ08
D23 T22 T24 T30
T13
D05
T21 T23 SY02
T12 D11
T10
D10
D15 T11 D14 D12 D13 CAN01
T03 SV01
W07
D04
SY01
ZZ04
T02 Panel T20 T42 T43 T44
D03 ZZ03
FL01 FL02 W08 W18 ZQ04
D02 ZZ02
T01 T45
T19
FS03
D01 FS01 High conc.
ZZ01 FS02 Diluted wash Low conc.
V01 DI water tank V02 solution tank Waste tank Waste tank
V04

BS-360E ServiceManul V1.0 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-360E ServiceManul V1.0 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-360E Chemistry Analyzer

Electric shock hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Photometer lamp hazards

Sample, calibrator and control hazards

Reagent and wash solution hazards

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 III

System disposal hazards

Fire and explosion hazards

Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal

Cleaning and Decontamination

Electromagnetic noise precautions

Chemistry parameter configuration precautions

ISE module precautions

Reagent, calibrator and control precautions

ISE calibration precautions

ISE wash solution biohazards

Data archiving precautions

External equipment precautions

Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 VII

Tube and liquid container precautions

Labels and silkscreen

Authorized Representative in the European

The following definition of the WEEE label applies

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 VIII

Caution: hot surface

“ON” for a part of equipment

“OFF” for a part of equipment

Protective conductor terminal

Fuse(for models powered by 220V-240V~ or

Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

Wash Station bracket

Interfaces for fluid connection

ISE tube installation location

Moving parts warning

Photometer lamp warning

Probe collision warning

Liquid level floater

Cuvette replacement window

Risk of injury when replacing the lamp

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XII

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XIII

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XIV

3.3.2 Locations and FRU details ................................................................................................... 3-6

3.10.1 Module Functions ............................................................................................................. 3-59

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XVI

6.3 Installation of Operating Software.............................................................................. 6-11

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XVII

7.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status ..................................................................................... 7-31

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XVIII

9.4 Post-maintenance Check .......................................................................................... 9-11

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 XIX

13.4 Packing................................................................................................................... 13-11

Figure 1-1 Chemistry analyzer

Figure 1-2 System structure

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 1-1

Figure 1-3 Layout of the analyzer’s operation panel

(1) Probe (2) Sample/reagent carousel

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 1-2

Sample/Reagent The outer ring can hold 50 sample containers.

No.HSH-19007-BS-360E Version:1.0 1-3

2 System Performance and Workflow